Home

"user manual"

1. No Name Setting Setting L1 02 Motor protection time constant 1 0 min L2 05 Undervoltage detection level 190 V L2 11 Battery Voltage OV L3 01 Stall prevention selection during accel 1 L3 02 _ Stall prevention level during accel 150 L3 05 Stall prevention selection during running 1 L3 06 Stall prevention level during running 150 L4 01 Speed agreement detection level 0 0 Hz L4 02 Speed agreement detection width 2 0 Hz L4 03 Speed agreement detection level 0 0 Hz L4 04 Speed agreement detection width 2 0 Hz L5 01 Number of auto restart attempts 2 L5 02 Auto restart operation selection 0 L5 05 _ Under voltage fault UV 1 restart selection 1 L6 01 Torque detection selection 1 0 L6 02 Torque detection level 1 150 L6 03 Torque detection time 1 0 1 sec L6 04 Torque detection selection 2 0 L6 05 Torque detection level 2 150 L6 06 Torque detection time 2 0 1 sec L7 01 Forward drive torque limit 300 L7 02 Reverse drive torque limit 300 L7 03 Forward regenerative torque limit 300 L7 04 Reverse regenerative torque limit 300 L7 06 Torque limit time constant 200 ms L7 07 Torque Limit Operation during accel decel 0 L8 02 Overheat pre alarm level 75 C L8 03 Operation selection after overheat pre alarm 3 L8 07 Output open phase protection selection 2 L8 09 Ground protecti
2. No Function Page U1 Status Monitor Parameters 5 55 U2 Fault Trace 5 59 MENU Drive Mode U3 Fault History 5 60 Inverter can be operated and A1 Initialize Mode 5 8 its status can be displayed A2 User specified Setting Mode 5 9 b1 Operation Mode Selections 5 10 b2 DC Injection Braking 5 10 b4 Timer Function 5 11 b6 Dwell Functions 5 11 Quick Programming Mode C1 Acceleration Deceleration 5 12 C2 S curve Acceleration Deceleration 5 13 Minimum parameters required for operation can be monitored iis Motor Slipi Compensation oe rset C4 Torque Compensation 5 15 C5 Speed Control ASR 5 16 C6 Carrier Frequency 5 16 d1 Speed References 5 18 d6 Field Forcing 5 20 E1 V f Pattern 1 5 21 Advanced Programming Mode E2 Motor Setup 1 5 22 E3 V f Pattern 2 5 23 All parameters can be moni E4 Motor Setup 2 5 24 tored or set E5 PM Motor Setup 5 25 F1 PG Option Setup 5 26 F4 Analog Monitor Card 5 29 F5 Digital Output Card 5 30 F6 Serial Communications Settings 5 31 H1 Multi function Digital Inputs 5 32 Verify Mode H2 Multi function Digital Outputs 5 33 Parameters changed from the H3 Multi function Analog Inputs 5 35 default settings can be L1 Motor Overload 5 37 monitored or set L2 Power Loss Ridethrough 5 37 L3 Stall Prevention 5 38 L4 Reference Detection 5 38 L5 Fault Restart 5 39 L6 Torque Detection 5 40 L7 Torque
3. No Name Setting Setting E2 07 Motor iron saturation coefficient 1 0 50 E2 08 Motor iron saturation coefficient 2 0 75 E2 09 Monitor mechanical losses 0 0 E2 10 Motor iron loss for torque compensation l E2 11 Motor rated output power E2 12 Motor iron saturation coefficient 3 1 30 E3 01 Motor 2 control mode selection 0 E3 02 Motor 2 Max output frequency FMAX 50 00 Hz E3 03 Motor 2 Max output voltage VMAX 400 0 V E3 04 Motor 2 Base frequency FA 50 00 Hz E3 05 Motor 2 Mid output frequency FB 3i E3 06 Motor 2 Mid output frequency voltage VB E3 07 Motor 2 Min output frequency FMIN x E3 08 Min output frequency voltage VMIN E4 01 Motor 2 rated current E4 02 Motor 2 rated slip i E4 03 Motor 2 no load current j E2 04 Motor 2 number of motor poles 4 E4 05 Motor 2 line to line resistance i E4 06 Motor 2 leak inductance T E4 07 Motor 2 iron saturation coefficient 1 i E5 02 PM motor rated power E E5 03 PM motor rated current E5 04 PM motor number of poles 4 poles E5 06 PM motor d axis inductance fi E5 07 PM motor q axis inductance x E5 09 PM Motor voltage constant F1 01 PG constant 1024 F1 02 Operation selection at PG open circuit PGO 1 F1 03 Operation selection at overspeed OS 1 F1 04 Operation selection at deviation 3 F1 05 PG rotation 0 F1 06 PG division rate PG pulse monitor 1 F1 08
4. W1 4 d w1 4 d E 00000 j 1 t1 i N e a Ww I r D1 3 alle D max 10 200 V 400 V Class Inverters of 3 7 to 18 5 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 55 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW Fig 1 9 Exterior Diagrams of IP20 NEMA 1 Inverters 1 8 Fan nal Caloric Value W nal purse se per sep pus pus s Era pese ss pw ss EJEDE EJEJEJ ing Exter 7 M6 11 19 10 19 34 33 App TOX Mass 186 Be eee 00 2 ENH A e o e x T Slo 14H Jo en eo fen e st 2 2 S t z e 4 A A N 280 E E B A pss ers zu 148 80 68 KIM 0 ror LALEA rr piss a Eus 72 pe Fes pus e Fes zs us Fes sr ss rs ser pras poor us prae pass s res 23 100 nla pss 335 435 350 177 197 207 140 453 1027 359 B 300 350 sspe 550 283 260 535 Z EE NN 18 5 37 Fs es 55 oo mm and Masses kg Imensions Table 1 3 Inverter D n PP Checking and Controlling the Installation Site Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions Installation Site Install the Inverter under the following conditions in a pollution degree 2 environment Table 1 4 Installation Site Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity NEMAI IP20 10 to 40 C 95 RH or less
5. CN5 a IP24V ie 9 bare aed AT A3 Y 24V External Power Supply Sinking Mode NPN 443K a IP24V X 24v FaK pa B2 B3 1 v4 CNS AZT AS Y 2 19 2 20 Control Circuit Terminal Connections Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2 12 ze CN5 NPN setting l ae T Y3t Forward run stop s2 h Ysk e O Reverse run stop l e oo Te Nominal Speed I os RIR Multi function nspection Run 1 L Inputs e S5 T X3 Factory setting ntermediate Speed nasi S6 ii Ysk Leveling Speed T e ho RED Not used T _ BB T Ysk e M m Hardware Baseblock note 2 l BB1 EY Hi 42448m l l I at i T IP24V 24V QO 24V 24V I l l I E G MA O MB Fault contact output Voltage adjust O 250VAC max 1A ment s Analog input Note 1 The CN5 factory setting is NPN 2 To enable the inverter both inputs BB and BB1 must be closed If Speed reference 2kOhm supply 15V 20mA A1 Master
6. MC closed D O MC closed D O H Brake opened D O Brake opened D O EN During inspection run the carrier frequency is reduced to 2 kHz INFO 6 12 Brake Sequence The L7 supports two types of brake sequences one with torque compensation at start using an analog input value and one without torque compensation at start Related Parameters Parameter No Name Factory setting Change during operation Control Method S 3 Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vec tor PM H3 15 Terminal A1 function selection No 1 01 Zero speed level No N A 81 02 DC injection braking current at start 50 No 81 03 DC injection braking current at sop 50 No 81 04 DC injection braking Zero speed time at start 0 40 sec No 81 05 DC injection braking Zero speed time at stop 0 60 sec No 81 06 Brake open delay time 0 20 sec No 81 07 Brake close delay time 0 10 sec 81 16 Run delay time 0 10 sec gt gt gt gt gt gt gt R gt S1 17 DC injection current gain at regeneration 100 S1 18 DC injection current gain at motoring 20 S1 19 Output contactor open delay time 0 10 sec gt gt l S el ele ef eS ele 81 20 Zero servo gain 5 81 221 Zero servo completion width 10 81
7. Terminal Block Configuration The terminal arrangements are shown in Fig 2 2 and Fig 2 3 Control circuit terminals Main circuit terminals Charge indicator Ground terminal Fig 2 2 Terminal Arrangement 200 V 400 V Class Inverter of 3 7 kW Control i Bol circuit 9 O Ezzzczzz I JI terminals i E ES um Charge indicator mU E Seah ela eon es RICA SVL21 THL31 61 03 V T2 WT3 Main circuit terminals SH AF a Ground terminals Fig 2 3 Terminal Arrangement 200 V 400 V Class Inverter of 22 kW or more iring Main Circuit Terminals Applicable Wire Sizes and Crimp Terminals Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals using Table 2 1 to Table 2 3 Refer to instruction manual TOE C726 2 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units BaWire Sizes Inverter Model CIMR O L7Z23P7 Table 2 1 200 V Class Wire Sizes Terminal Symbol R L1 S L2 T L3 41 42 BI B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 PO NO Terminal Screws Tightening Torque Nem Possible Wire Sizes mm AWG 4 12 to 10 Recom mended Wire Size mm AWG L7Z25P5 R LI S L2 T L3 41 42 BI B2 U T
8. 7 2 TO ascia PRHRERHEHD RH BERE PON dHRA 7 18 7 2 Protective and Diagnostic Functions This section describes the fault and alarm functions of the Inverter These functions include fault detection alarm detection programming error detection and auto tuning error detection Fault Detection When the Inverter detects a fault the fault contact output is operated and the Inverter output is switched OFF and the motor coasts to stop The stopping method can be selected for some faults A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator LED Monitor The faults can be categorized in two groups Faults that can be reset without cycling the power using an input or the reset key at the Digital Operator resetable faults Faults that require to cycle the power non resetable faults When a fault has occurred refer to the following to identify the fault and to correct the causes To reset a fault it is necessary to remove the RUN signal and correct the fault reason Otherwise a Reset is not accepted or the Inverter trips with the same fault again The following tables shows a list of faults and corrective actions Display GF Ground Fault Table 7 1 Resetable Faults Meaning Ground Fault The ground current at the Inverter out put exceeded 50 of the Inverter rated output current and L8 09 1 Enabled Probable Causes One Inverter output was shorted to ground
9. m Feed Forward n5 Name Control Methods C Change on Setting Factory during Open Closed stant Display Description Range Setting Opera Loop Loop Number tion Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM Feed forward con trol selection Feedfoward Sel Enables or disables the feed for ward control 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Motor acceleration time Motor Accel Time Set the time required to acceler ate the motor at the rated torque T100 to the rated speed Nr J GO 4 P Motor rated output 27 Jikgm N rpm 4 60 Tyo Nm However t _ 60 P kW 3 10 N 100 27 N rpm Nm Feed forward pro portional gain Feedfoward Gain Sets the proportional gain for feed forward control Speed reference response will increase as the setting of n5 03 is increased 5 44 Name Display Motor acceleration time tuning N5 02 Tuning Description Enables or diables the tuning for the motor acceleration time N5 02 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Setting Range The factory setting depends on the inverter capacity The value for a 200 V C Factory Setting ass Inverter of 3 7 kW is given Automatic Frequency Regulator n2 Contro Open Loop Vector Methods Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM PM Motor Adjustments n8
10. 5 61 5 62 8200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 3 7 to 45 kW Factory Setting Closed Loop Vector Con trol Closed Loop Vector PM The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters The values will double for 400 V class Inverters 8200 V and 400V Class Inverters of 55 kW Factory Setting Closed Loop Vector Con trol The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters The values will double for 400 V class Inverters Factory Settings Changing with Inverter Capacity 02 04 8200 V Class Inverters Parameter Number Name Factory Setting Inverter Capacity kW 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 02 04 kVA selection C6 02 Carrier frequency E2 01 E4 01 Motor rated current E2 02 E4 02 Motor rated slip E2 03 E4 03 Motor no load current E2 05 E4 05 Motor line to line resistance E2 06 E4 06 Motor leak inductance Motor iron loss for torque compen E2 10 sation E5 02 E5 03 E5 04 M motor rated power M motor rated current M number of poles E5 06 E5 07 E5 09 M d axis inductance M q axis inductance P P P E5 05 PM motor line to line resistance P P P M voltage constant L8 02 Overheat pre alarm level n5 02 A
11. 9 S amp tuation o E Allowable frequency 45 amp fl V T370 5 uctuation b Mea DC reactor Optional Built In amp sures for power nc tT Not possible Possible supply The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole Yaskawa standard motor When selecting the actual motor and Inverter be sure that the Inverter s rated current is higher than the motor s rated current 2 A transformer with dual star delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12 pulse rectification 8400 V Class Table 9 2 400 V Class Inverters Model Number CIMR L7Z O Max applicable motor out put kW Rated output capacity kVA 15 22 34 40 54 67 Rated output current A Max output voltage V Max output frequency Hz 18 27 34 41 48 65 80 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC Proportional to input voltage Output Rating 120 Hz max Rated voltage V 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC 50 60 Hz Rated frequency Hz Rated input current A i Y 22 32 41 49 58 78 Allowable voltage 10 15 fluctuation Allowable frequency i 5 fluctuation j Mea DC reactor Optional Built In sures for power supply Power supply characteristics 12 phase Not possible Possible rectification The maximum applicab
12. 6 1 Carrier Frequency Derating and Current Eimitation frr dere eret ra MS HR ashe ee 6 2 4 Carrier Frequency Seltil i gsrtonsete tocaba od avtisdtesqditan stos Sit dedest Ling 6 2 Current limitation level at low speeds ssssssssseseeeenetnneees 6 2 Control Brake Sequence ssssssssseeeeenene emen 6 3 Up and Down Commands ssssssssssseeeeteeetrtenetene nennen 6 3 Speed Reference Source Selection c cceccccssssssscsssssessssesesseseeseseeseseeeeseseseseeeseeeeeaeens 6 4 Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs sssssssse 6 5 Eniergencystgg Cisco Di eod apto Aa oae Tp e al a te 6 10 Xb jnspsctionm RUNS dicks custos a ase o ct aD ee AM OE tis 6 11 Brake Seguente iur eene e tle eun 6 13 Short Floor Operation stones bet duri eee een LE E 6 17 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics sees 6 20 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times ssssssssseseeeeees 6 20 Acceleration and S curve Settings c ccccsccssssssssssssessesesseseeseseseessseeeseeeeseeeeseaeeeeseees 6 22 Output Speed Hold Dwell Function ooo ccccccssescsssstssessesestesestesestssestsreseeresteeeeateeeeees 6 22 Stall Prevention During Acceleration st nns 6 23 Adjusting Analog Input Signals c ccssccsseccseceeceaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeees 6 25 Adjusting Analog Frequency References
13. ssssssssseeseeeeeeenens 6 25 Speed Detection and Speed Limitation sssessseeesssss 6 26 Speed Agreement Function ccccccccccececcsesesessesessessseesssnssessesesessesseseseesesecsescesessees 6 26 Limiting the Elevator Speed to the Leveling Speed d1 17 ssssss 6 28 Improving the Operation Performance eseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 29 Reducing the Motor Speed Fluctuation Slip Compensation Function 6 29 Torque Compensation Function Adjustments ccccccscescssesceesesseseesesteeseeeseeeseeees 6 30 Starting Torque Compensation Function C4 03 to C4 05 sssssssee 6 32 Automatic Speed Regulator ASR Closed Loop Vector only 6 32 Stabilizing Speed Automatic Frequency Regulator Open Loop Vector 6 34 Inertia Compensation Closed Loop Vector Only ssssssssst 6 35 Automatic Current Regulator ACR Tuning cns 6 36 A D Conversion Delay Time Tuning esee nte entente 6 37 Improving the Leveling Accuracy by Leveling Speed Slip Compensation 6 37 Field FOTO users Dn asada cec ub ds an te wean testo i eot E 6 38 Adjusting the DC Injection Current rettet tnnt tentent tete 6 39 Adjusting the DC Injection Current Levels S1 02 03 ssssssssssee 6 39 Protective Functions essssssssssssssss
14. Control Methods Para Name Change Closed MEMO meter Description Setting Factory during Open Closed Loop BUS Page Num Disol Range Setting Opera Vif Loop Loop Vector Register ber isplay tion Vector Vector PM 0 Disabled Acceleration as set Stall prevention With a too heavy load the motor selection dur may stall ins accel 1 Enabled Acceleration stopped E when L3 02 level is exceeded Acceleration starts again when L3 01 the current has fallen below the 0to2 1 No A A 48FH 6 23 stall prevention level 2 Intelligent acceleration mode StallP Accel Using the L3 02 level as a basis Sel acceleration is automatically adjusted The set acceleration time is disregarded Stall prevention Sets the stall prevention during level daria acceleration operation current level aed d as a percentage of Inverter rated current L3 02 Effective when L3 01 is set to 1 0to 200 150 No A A 490H 6 23 or 2 StallP Accel Usually changing this setting is not Lvl necessary Reduce the setting when the motor stalls Stallprevention Selects the stall prevention during selection dur running ing running 0 Disabled Runs as set With a L3 05 heavy load the motor may stall 0 to 2 1 No A 493H 6 40 1 Deceleration using deceleration time 1 C1 02 StallP Run Sel 2 Deceleration using deceleration time 2 C1 04 Stall prevention Set the stall prevention during run level during ning operation current level
15. Installing a Surge Absorber Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter Inductive loads include magnetic contactors electromagnetic relays solenoid valves solenoids and magnetic brakes 2 13 BWiring the Output Side of the Main Circuit The following precautions should be considered for the output circuit wiring Connecting the Inverter and Motor The output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 must be connected according to the motor lead wires U V and W The motor should rotate forward with the forward run command If not two of the motor cable wires can be switched 2 Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals A power supply must never be connected to the output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 Otherwise the inter 5 nal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged Never Short or Ground Output Terminals If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter case an electric shock or a short circuit may occur Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor A phase advancing capacitor must never be connected to the inverter output circuit The high frequency com ponents of the Inverter output may overheat and be damaged and may cause other parts to burn Using a Magnetic Contactor A magnetic contactor MC between the Inverter and motor must not be turned ON or OFF during inverter operation If the MC is turned ON during the Inverter
16. The factory setting is enabled It is not recommended to disable this function This function is not available in software version VSL701034 and higher 6 47 Output Open Phase Detection This function detects an open output phase by comparing the output current value of each phase with the out put open phase detection level 5 of inverter rated current The detection does not work when the output fre quency is below 2 of the base frequency Three settings are available L8 07 0 no output open phase detection L8 07 1 the loss of one phase is detected only L8 07 2 the loss of 2 or 3 phases is detected as well The detection delay time can be set in parameter L8 20 Related Parameters Control Methods Open Closed Closed Loop Loop Loop Vector Vector Vector PM Change during Operation Parameter Factory No Setting L8 07 Output open phase detection selection A A A L8 20 Output phase loss detection time A A A Ground Fault Detection This function detects the earth leakage current by calculating the sum of the three output currents Normally it should be 0 If the earth leakage current gets too high the inverter output is switched off and a GF fault is 6 shown on the display The fault contact is activated iRelated Parameters Control Methods Open Closed Closed Loop Loop Loop Vector Vector Vector PM Change Pa
17. eeeeeeeesssuuuus 8 2 NU Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or has 8 2 Ml Z Maintenance and Inspection Periodic Inspection Check the following items during periodic maintenance The motor should not vibrate or make unusual noises There should be no abnormal heat generation from the Inverter or motor The ambient temperature should be within the Inverter s specifications The output current value shown in U1 03 should not be higher than the motor or the Inverter rated current for extended period of time The cooling fan in the Inverter should be operating normally Before attempting any maintenance checks make sure that the three phase power 1s disconnected With power removed from the unit the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes The charge LED in the Inverter will light red until the DC bus voltage is below 10VDC To ensure that the DC bus is completely dis charged measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltmeter Be sure not to touch terminals immediately after the power has been turned off Doing so can result in electric shock Table 8 1 Periodic Inspections Inspection Corrective Procedure Are all screws and bolts tight Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly External terminals Mounting bolts connectors Are connectors tight Reconnect the loose connectors Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun u
18. C5 7e out set MEISE 30 0 0Hz 0 0Hz 0 0Hz 14 03 2 Frequency detection 3 Or E No 49BH 6 26 Frequency detection 4 is set 100 0 A Spd Agree Lvl for a multi function output to 0 0 100 0 iiid piae crue Effective when fff agree 9 0 to A A A A ion width gn Fout feet agree 2 Fre 20 0 2 0Hz 2 0Hz 2 0Hz 7 14 04 quency detection 3 or Fre No ADOH SR quency detection 4 is set fora 0 0 to A id 7 x Spd Agree Wdth multi function output 40 0 4 0 EFault Restart L5 Name Display Number of auto restart attempts Num of Restarts Description Sets the number of auto reset attempts The auto resetable faults are OV UVI GF OC OL2 OL3 OL4 UL3 ULA PF LF SEI SE2 SE3 Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Auto restart opera tion selection Restart Sel Sets whether a fault contact output is activated during fault restart 0 No output Fault contact is not activated 1 Output Fault contact is acti vated Under voltage fault restart selection UVI Restart Sel Selects the reset method for a UVI fault 0 UV fault is reset like set in parameter L5 01 1 UV1 fault is always automat ically reset 5 39 5 40 Nam
19. ncrease C5 03 if the ASR is too slow at start or very low frequencies decrease it if vibrations occur ncrease C5 01 if the ASR is too slow at high speed or if overshooting occurs at speed changes in the high speed area decrease it if vibrations occur 6 33 6 34 Increase C5 09 if ASR is slow in the low speed area or if undershooting occurs at leveling speed If vibra tions occur in the low speed area during deceleration decrease the value Adjusting ASR Integral Times C5 02 04 10 The integral time determines how fast the ASR input is integrated in order to eliminate the speed deviation Lengthening the integral time lowers the responsiveness of the ASR and the speed accuracy when the load changes suddenly Oscillations can occur if the setting of this value is too low Decrease C5 02 if a speed deviation is compensated too slow at high speeds or 1f overshooting occurs at speed changes in the high speed area Increase it if vibrations occur Decrease C5 04 if a speed deviation is compensated too slow at start or at very low frequencies Increase it if vibrations occur Decrease C5 10 if a speed deviation is compensated too slow in the low speed area at leveling or if under shooting occurs at leveling speed If vibrations occur in the low speed area during deceleration increase the value Adjusting the ASR Gain for Encoder Offset Tuning C5 11 During the encoder offset tuning for Hiperface or EnDat uses the
20. ASR proportional P gain 3 ASR integral I time 3 ASR gain for encoder offset tuning 5 00 BASR Gain and Integral Time Adjustments There are three sets of ASR gain and integral times one for the maximum speed C5 01 02 one for the mini mum speed at acceleration C5 03 04 and one for the minimum speed at deceleration C5 09 10 see the fig ure below ASR P ASR P 6 C5 03 ASR Gain 2 C5 09 ASR Gain 3 C5 04 ASR time 2 C5 10 ASR time 3 C5 01 ASR Gain 1 C5 02 ASR time 1 C5 01 ASR Gain 1 C5 02 ASR time 1 T T OHz C5 07 E104 Speed gi C5 07 E1 04 Speed During Acceleration During Deceleration When the ride starts with the nominal speed selected the ASR P gain and I time change from C5 03 04 to C1 01 02 at nominal speed When the speed selection changes to leveling speed the P gain and I time are changed from C1 01 02 to C1 09 10 If parameter d1 18 is set to 0 or 3 the nominal leveling speed detection function must be enabled refer to page 6 6 Nominal Leveling Speed Detection with Multi Speed Inputs in order to use the ASR 3 settings Adjusting ASR Proportional Gains C5 01 03 09 The gain settings determine how much the ASR input speed deviation is amplified in order to eliminate the speed deviation The responsiveness of the ASR is increased when the gain setting is increased but oscillations can occur when this setting is too high
21. Light Load Search speed Rescue operation torque limit Light load search method Multi function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Open Closed Closed Setting Function mane Loop Loop Loop Vec Vector Vector tor PM Multi function Digital Outputs H2 01 to H2 03 Open Closed Closed Setting Function mane Loop Loop Loop Vec Vector Vector tor PM Light load direction output ON Forward OFF Reverse Light load detection status ON Ready for detection run OFF Detection in progress mRescue Operation Power Supply Ratings The power supply to the DC bus and to the control card during rescue operation must meet the following requirements Voltage class DC Bus Power Supply Control Power Supply 200 V 48 to 300 VDC 280 to 300 VDC 400 V 96 to 600 VDC 280 to 600 VDC aw P When an AC power supply e g a single phase UPS like example 1 or 2 below is used n dr make sure that the rectified voltage meets the voltage range above 6 6 78 iRescue operation wiring examples Example 1 Wi The following diagrams show some wirings examples for rescue operation 1 Phase 230 V UPS Power Supply L1 L2 L3 Example 2 used Wiring Inverter ieee ait ogee A cs N B1 UPS I 1x230 Padi VAC ed LETS i rd te 4 I AU RIT t L1 i 4 L2 x 4 o Se Al T L3 L3 gt A9 4 i Control Rectifier Diode Power Suppl
22. Sets the contrast on the optional LCD operator JVOP 160 OY 0 light 2 3 normal 4 5 dark 5 45 5 46 Name Display LOCAL REMOTE key enable disable Local Remote Key Digital Operator 02 Description Enables Disables the Digital Operator Local Remote key 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Switches between the Digital Operator and the parameter settings b1 01 b1 02 Factory Setting Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register STOP key during control circuit ter minal operation Oper Stop Key Enables Disables the Stop key in the run mode 0 Disabled When the run com mand is issued from an exter nal terminal the Stop key is disabled 1 Enabled Effective even dur ing run User parameter initial value User Defaults Clears or stores user initial val ues 0 Stores not set 1 Begins storing Records the set parameters as user initial values 2 All clear Clears all recorded user initial values When the set parameters are recorded as user initial values 1110 will be set in A1 03 kVA selection Inverter Model Do not set unless after replacing the control board Refer to page 5 61 for the setting values Frequency refer ence setting method selection Operator M O P Sets whether the ENTER key is needed for a frequency
23. The pulse monitor output factor can be changed using parameter F1 05 Refer to page 2 31 Wiring Precautions for general precautions 2 26 BPG X2 Option Card Input Output Specifications Table 2 13 PG X2 I O Specifications Terminal 2 Contents Specifications 12 VDC 2596 200 mA max Power supply for pulse generator 0 VDC GND for power supply 5 VDC 5594 200 mA max Pulse input terminal phase A Pulse input terminal phase A Pulse input terminal phase B Line driver input RS422 level maximum input frequency 300 kHz Pulse input terminal phase B Pulse input terminal phase Z 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Pulse input terminal phase Z eo Common terminal inputs Pulse monitor output terminal phase A Pulse monitor output terminal phase A Pulse monitor output terminal phase B Line driver output RS422 level output Pulse monitor output terminal phase B Pulse monitor output terminal phase Z Pulse monitor output terminal phase Z Common terminal monitor outputs Shield connection terminal The 5V and 12V power supply should not be used at the same time 2 27 Wiring the PG X2 card The following illustrations show wiring examples for the PG X2 using the option cards power supply or an external power source for supplying the PG Th
24. 200 Class Inverter Stops when main circuit DC voltage is below 190 V Undervoltage protection 400 Class Inverter Stops when main circuit DC voltage is below 380 V Protective Functions Cooling fin overheating Protection by thermistor Stall prevention Stall prevention during acceleration deceleration and running independently Grounding protection Protection by electronic circuits Charge indicator Glows when the main circuit DC voltage is approximately 10 VDC or more 9 4 Model Number CIMR L7Z O Protective structure Table 9 3 Common Specifications Specification Enclosed wall mounted type IP20 All models Enclosed wall mounted type NEMA 1 18 5 kW or less same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters Open chassis type IP00 22 kW or more same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters 5 z z Q Ambient operating tem perature 10 C to 45 C max 60 C with derating refer to page 9 6 Ambient Temperature Derating Ambient operating humidity 95 max with no condensation Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C short term temperature during transportation Application site Indoor no corrosive gas dust etc Altitude 1000 m max 3000 m with derating refer to page 9 7 Altitude Derating Vibration 10 to 20 Hz 9 8 m s max 20 to 50 Hz 2 m s max Safe Disable Hardware Baseblock meets EN954 1 safety category 3 stop categor
25. Slip Compensation Gain at Regenerating Slip Compensation Torque Detection Delay Slip Compensation Torque Detection Time Slip Compensation primary Delay Time BAdjustments The Slip compensation values can be set separately for motoring and regenerative operation Before adjusting this function the general setup should have been done Motor Setup V f pattern Speeds ASR settings etc To adjust the Slip compensation function do the following in motoring and regenerative mode Set the motor speed in S2 01 if V f control is used Try to measure the actual motor speed during leveling If the motor speed is lower than the leveling speed reference increase S2 02 in motoring mode or decrease S2 03 in regenerative mode fthe motor speed is higher than the leveling speed reference decrease S2 02 in motoring mode or increase S2 03 in regenerative mode S2 05 and S2 06 should not be modified except if the stop accuracy 1s poor and the constant speed time after the speed agree is shorter than S2 05 S2 06 6 Field Forcing The field forcing function controls the motor flux and compensates the flux establishment delay of the motor Thereby it improves the motor responsiveness to changes in the speed reference or the load Field forcing is applied during all operation conditions except DC Injection Using parameter d6 06 a field forcing limit can be applied A setting of 100 is
26. Output fre quency or motor speed Freq Detection 1 ON OFF Multi function output setting 4 Frequency FOUT Detection 3 L4 03 gt Output frequency Output fre quency or motor speed Freq Detection 3 ON OFF Multi function output setting 15 Frequency FOUT Detection 2 L4 01 Output frequency Output fre quency or motor speed Freq Detection 2 OFF ON Tid Multi function output setting 5 Frequency Detection 4 L4 03 lt Output frequency Output fre quency or motor speed Freq Detection4 OF Multi function output setting 16 6 2 Limiting the Elevator Speed to the Leveling Speed d1 17 To use a high speed limit in the UP or DOWN direction to the leveling speed one of the digital inputs must be set to High speed limit switch Up or High speed limit Down H1 LILI 87 88 Multifunction Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Control Methods Open Closed Closed Loop Loop Loop Vec Vector Vector tor PM Set Value Function High speed limit switch Up direction High speed limit switch Down direction High speed limit switch Up The high speed limit switch UP function limits the speed to the leveling speed when the UP direction signal 1s given The DOWN direction has no speed limit High speed limit switch Down The high speed limit swi
27. Related Parameters Control Methods Open Closed ao Ano oop Poop Vector tuning Vector Vector PM Change during Operation Parameter Factory Closed Set by No Setting Input voltage setting 400 v No Q Q Q Max output frequency FMAX 150 rpm No Q Q Base frequency FA 150 rpm No Q Q Q A A Min output frequency FMIN 0 rpm Base voltage VBASE 400 v Motor rated power 3 7kW E Motor rated current 731A Number of motor poles 4 poles Motor line to line resistance 1 326 Q 2 Motor d axis inductance 19 11 mH Motor q axis inductance 26 08 mH gt gt gt Sle el gt Oo gt Ol O Motor voltage constant 478 6 mV The given value is valid for 400V inverters 2 The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity the values shown are for a 400 V Class Inverter for 3 7 kW Motor Rated Power E5 02 Set E5 02 to the rated power value as written on the motor nameplate or in the motor data sheet Motor Rated Current E5 03 Set E5 03 to the motor rated current as written on the motor nameplate or in the motor data sheet Number of Motor Poles Setting E5 04 Set the number of motor poles as written on the motor nameplate or in the motor data sheet Motor Line to Line Resistance Setting E5 05 Set the motor line to line resistance as written in the motor data sheet Alternatively a measured value can be e
28. 1 00 to 300 00 ASR gain switching frequency 0 0to 120 0 ASR P gain 3 1 00 to 300 00 ASR Integral time 3 0 000 to 10 000 Max Frequency 0 to 120 00 Hz 20 to 7200 rpm Base Frequency 0 to 120 00 Hz 20 to 7200 rpm Mid output frequency voltage VB 0 0 to 510 0 Min output frequency FMIN 0 to 120 00 Hz 20 to 7200 rpm Min output frequency voltage VMIN 0 0 to 510 0 Base Frequency 0 0 to 510 0 Mid output frequency FB 0 to 120 00 Hz Mid output frequency voltage VB 0 0 to 510 0 Min output frequency FMIN 0 0 to 120 0 Min output frequency voltage VMIN 1 0 0 to 510 0 PG constant 0 to 60000 512 1024 2048 PG rotation direction Oor1 AO 12 Channel 1 Signal selection 1 to 56 1 to 75 Motor protection selection 0 to3 0or5 L4 01 03 Speed agreement detection level 0 to 120 00 0 0 to 100 0 L4 02 04 Speed agreement detection width 0 0 to 20 0 0 0 to 40 0 Output open phase detection selection 0 to 2 Oor 1 Feed forward control selection Oorl Frequency monitor reference display 0 to 39999 V f pattern frequency parameter unit Oorl Zero speed level The given values are for a 400 V class Inverter 2 Can be set only if Hiperface is selected as interface 0 00 to 10 00
29. 5 3 User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode ssssseee 5 4 User Parameter Tables i neto ones pedet Aue Dsucu doe kubve b awe eive c d 5 8 Setup Settings A usce tuto D D I RE o ESI 5 8 Application Parameters b sss 5 10 T nilig Earamelers eee case seach occas treaties te Rr ceps caca edes aea rede sete 5 12 Reference Parameters dc ccccccccccccsssessescsssseccssescssescesesesseses tente tente tente tette sette se senses 5 18 Motor Parameters E ccntaus ee obiter Sets detras eiecti css Mo lad E eda 5 21 9 Option Parameters F ouis epo ba id a ea a 5 26 Terminal Function Parameters H ccscsccsessssesecsesecseseceesecsesecnssecessecessecesseceesecsene 5 32 Protection Function Parameters L eese tentent tentent etes 5 37 gt Special Adjustments n2 nb eee reique nea gba qe e DRE 5 43 9 PM Motor Adjustments N8 N9 cocoa conecte tein Fett pneus toc paret neue 5 44 Digital Operator LED Monitor Parameters o sccccsscssssessssessessesessssescesesceececstceteeeseees 5 45 Lift Function Parameters S Leone ee Sania inte eas 5 47 Motor Autotuning T son toes trice e e e arcet Un Deed 5 53 Monitor Parameters saxicola ete a eec Lo petat esf eds 5 55 Settings which change with the Control Mode A1 02 ss 5 61 Factory Settings Changing with Inverter Capacity 02 04 sssssssss 5 63 Parameter Settings by Function
30. H 8 to 12 V max input frequency 50 kHz Pulse input terminals phase B GND pulse input phase B Pulse monitor output terminals phase A Open collector output 24 VDC 30 mA max Pulse monitor output terminals phase B Open collector output 24 VDC 30 mA max Shield connection terminal 2 25 Wiring the PG B2 card The following illustrations show wiring examples for the PG B2 using the option cards power supply or an external power source for supplying the PG Three phase 200 Inverter VAC 400 VAC RIL1 te RLI Ur st2 E Q 4 Om w TIL3 EL T3 WIT3 Power supply 12 V Power supply 0 V Pulse input phase A GND pulse input phase A Pulse input phase B GND pulse input phase B Pulse monitor output phase A sS Pulse monitor output phase B Fig 2 16 PG B2 Wiring Using a 12 V External Power Supply Precautions The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F1 05 The factory setting is A phase leading in forward direction motor shaft turning counterclockwise seen from motor shaft side Forward rotation of standard motor PG Motor output axis rotates counter clockwise during In verter forward command Forward d Rotation comman CCW L gt A phase B phase oT L F1 The A phase leads CCW when motor rotation is forward
31. Main Menu De uency REP 2 7 Dil Squency Ref NONE Loup ENS i U1 F50 00Hz U1 01 950 00Hz 7777U1 02 50 00Hz lK 000 5000 Ci 00 00Hz 9 U1 02 50 00Hz U1 03 10 05A VERIFY Main Menu Modified Consts A TUNE Main Menu Auto Tuning Note When changing the display with the Increment Decrement keys after the last monitor parameter the display jumps back to the first monitor parameter UP Output F y utpu re U1 A 500 00Hz UT 03 10 08A 7 U1 04 2 The Frequency Setting Display will not be displayed when using an analog reference The fault name will be displayed if the DATA ENTER Key is pressed while a constant is being displayed for which a fault code is being displayed Fault History O0C NM ee Rdy i reat t Message 2 2 0V ESC pave Last Fault tj OC U3 02 OV U3 03 OH mj j TENE ny 2J ault Message IL u3 ON bre Us O4 U El Of Fig 3 5 Operations in Drive Mode and vice versa e g U1 55 is followed by U1 01 The display for the first
32. 91 H l 4 i RIL1 S L2 Al TIL3 d R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 rM 4200 Control do S Circuit Note Consult your Omron Yaskawa Motion Control representative for using 12 phase rectification Standard Connection Diagrams Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2 4 These are the same for both 200 V Class and 400 V Class Inverters The connections depend on the Inverter capacity BCIMR L7Z23P7 to 2018 and 43P7 to 4018 ps reactor Braking optional Resistor P pada A z loo 2 B1 B2 i i RIL1 Ui I S2 VIT2 Q M TIL3 WIT3 3 Phase 200VAC or 400VAC Ge l i E s Be sure to remove the short circuit bar before connecting the DC reactor Braking Resistor optional BCIMR L7Z22037 to 2055 CDBR Braking Unit optional ucl 1 G o EA 9 R L1 UTI i I 6 S L2 v2 M EJ TIL3 WIT3 3 Phase 200VAC or l 400VAC 9 RI L11 i I S1 L21 T1 L31 i 5 r n l All2 i BCIMR L7Z2022 2030 and 4022 to 4055 Braking Resistor optional CDBR Braking Unit optional A Sa E3 R L1 UTI I E6 s L2 VT2 M E TIL3 wiT3 3 Phase 200VAC or l 400VAC R1 L11 OK S1 L21 9 T1 L31 i J l The DC reactor is
33. Overspeed detection level 115 F1 09 Overspeed detection delay time 0 0 sec F1 10 Excessive speed deviation detection level 1096 F1 11 Excessive speed deviation detection delay time 0 5 sec F1 12 Number of PG teeth 1 0 F1 13 Number of PG teeth 2 0 F1 14 PG open circuit detection delay time 1 0 sec F1 18 DV3 fault detection selection 1 F1 19 DVA fault detection selection 1024 F1 21 Absolute encoder resolution 2 F1 22 Magnet position offset 60 deg F1 24 PGO Detection level at stop 20 F1 25 Encoder copy function selection 0 10 10 8 Factory No Name Setting Setting F1 26 Encoder copy write permission 0 F4 01 Channel 1 monitor selection 2 F4 02 Channell gain 100 0 F4 03 Channel 2 monitor selection 3 F4 04 Channel 2 gain 50 0 F4 05 Channel output monitor bias 0 0 F4 06 Channel 2 output monitor bias 0 0 F4 07 Analog output signal level for channel 1 0 F4 08 Analog output signal level for channel 2 0 F5 01 Channel 1 output selection 0 F5 02 Channel 2 output selection 1 F5 03 Channel 3 output selection 2 F5 04 Channel 4 output selection 4 F5 05 Channel 5 output selection 6 F5 06 Channel 6 output selection 37 F5 07 Channel 7 output selection OF F5 08 Channel 8 output selection OF F5 09 DO 08 output mode selection 0 F6 01 Operat
34. PM L3 01 Stall prevention selection during acceleration 1 No A A L3 02 Stall prevention level during acceleration 150 No A A 6 23 iMTime Chart The following figure shows the output frequency characteristics when L3 01 1s set to 1 Output current Stall level during L3 02 acceleration 85 of L3 02 Time Output frequency Ji gt lt gt 1 9 The acceleration rate is lowered 2 The acceleration is stopped to reduce the output current Time Fig 6 8 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration i Setting Precautions Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100 Do not increase the stall prevention level unnecessarily An extremely high setting can reduce the inverter lifetime Also do not disable the function 6 Ifthe motor stalls with the factory settings check the V f pattern settings E1 LI1L1 and the motor setup E2 O0 Ifthe stall level has to be increased very much to get the elevator running consider to use a one size bigger inverter 6 24 M Adjusting Analog Input Signals Adjusting Analog Frequency References Using the H3 O0 parameters the analog input values of terminal A1 or the Channels 1 to 3 of the optional analog input card AI 14B can be adjusted Related Parameters Control Methods Change during Operation Parameter Factory No Setting lt Open Loop Vect
35. Selected Speed i 8 D y 8i i E 3i ls S1 04 1 05 NH iX i Zemsevo Zero servo iP et NZ Sk y Noy ag B DC Injection f i DC inhection jo 5 f i 2 at start Leveling Speed i at stop 8i H 1 9i oi Speed i i Jel VH i IEOS nge i Ags Ej lt E e m i amp o pou RUN Inverter Hardware BB D I i i i i i i Contactor Control D O j i i i j Contactor Confirmation D I Brake Open Command iui 2 B t4 i t5 Pel ws ij Fig 6 2 Timing chart of Brake sequence without torque compensation at start The timing chart above is divided in time zones The following table explains the sequence in each time zone Description The inverter gets the direction signal UP DOWN The inverter gets the hardware base block disable signal Not BB condition 6 The inverter receives the speed reference signal The inverter sets the contactor closed signal ED The inverter waits for the contactor confirmation signal If no digital input is set to contactor confirmation signal H1 L1L1 86 the sequence is proceeded after exceeding the operation start delay time S1 16 When the RUN delay time S1 16 has elapsed DC injection Open Loop or zero servo operation position lock in Closed Loop is started When the brake open delay time S1 06 has elapsed the inverter sets the brake open command The inverter keeps DC injection zero speed
36. sessseseeeeeeeeeneeeee 1 10 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover seeeeseeess 1 11 Removing the Terminal Cover secet tree dee leszedadctsesutcnsadestectasdeass 1 11 Attaching the Terminal Cover cccccccccscscssesccsssecseseseeseceesecesecesseceeseceeseceesecnsseceseens 1 12 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator LED Monitor and Front Cover ssssssssssssssseseeeeen nene 1 13 Inverters of 18 5 KW or Less sssseeee tette tents 1 13 Inverters of 22 KW or More ss netten tenentes 1 15 Wiring Mere te HT P OR TTE TITO 2 1 Connection Diagram seanda opes o it Asset ema esi aloes en teu dooce 2 2 Circuit Descriptions tate lesa eit state Cres tue esca Ce cie mods 2 3 Terminal Block Configuration ssene e 2 4 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals cte tp root eet nrbe e dent 2 5 Applicable Wire Sizes and Crimp Terminals sssssssseetes 2 5 Main Circuit Terminal Functions c cccccsessescsssssssestesestesestesestssestesestssesteseseerssteseseees 2 9 9 Main Circuit Configurations seca odd totos ausge utet teatro ote tpe 2 10 Standard Connection Diagrams 205 cde nec dan cbe boe ah ded ted 2 11 3p Wiring the Main Circuits anat tennis test pcuse tod tet emot eee Fc ercta euni eiue 2 12 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ient 2 17 ORI AI T ore ee 2 17 4 Control Circuit Ter
37. 08 Q 2yoigeH 89 egensieipiy spre m O L uorsiag a m 8 LSPOOSZLL Haws Hey ans ANL m A D gt AEA EE BSH JO 1uesuoo UayUM soud y jnouj ped ui peidoo aq jou Aew pod y Jeotuuoa siu arog oro LANIE OO O vSLO SLL 0 sc ZHO9 0S SEEAOBP 01 08 SSOv 1 MWIO 96 022 TU ZHOZL 0 0 eCAOSP 010 O SLL 0 98 o sy ZHO9 0S SBEAOSr 01 08 SP0v 2T YINID 0 08 0 09 3 z PR oi F e ZHOZL 01 0 9E AOS 01 0 096 02 ole HOS 0S READY 01 08 10v LTWIO rm 0 S9 9 8v Ps usyoun 0 84 0 6S 0 0 ZHOQ OS SEEDY 01 08E O 0r 27 YINID 4YOURIN 6 08 d ZHOZL 01 0 SEEADBY 010 i GQ SYCISIO PIY 0 8v 0 9 4 E m o 5 HOZE i0 RENDE Or 0 O es 0 ev ozz HO9 0S Se AO8Y 01 OBE ZZOY L TYNI m ASO 21004129 3 pue sseMYos uoneuioiny O Lv 8 0 ZHOZL 010 2e A08 010 0 6P 0 s al ZH09 0S SEEAOBP 01 OBE 8L0p LTYNID ia Hawg ey ans ANL O PE S SZ ke N ZHOZL 010 2E AOS 0 0 O Lv 0 L o si ZHO9 0S SEEAOBP 01 08E SLOP LT WIO 9u982 ISO OLzE 02 z ZHOZL 010 SBEADBY 010 O zel0 vz ur ZH09 0S oEAO8 01 08 LLOp 27 MINIO OBLS EL i 2 ZHOZL 010 SEEAORP 010 O zzio oL S ZHO9 0S SEEAORP 01 08 SdL LTHWIO ER OPUS Tm ca ZHOZL 01 0 2eEAORP 01 0 O LL9 ZL s s ZH09 0S SEEAOBY 01 08E Sdt L TYND ze 900Z Ainr gz peiep 0 uoisi e T OLL E S Z EL 0 OL o r ZHO9 0S 9eCAOBY 01 OBE Odtt L TYWI ZHOZL 01 0 9e AOBY 01 0
38. 400 VAC 3 7 kW IEC IP20 standards Inverter model gt MODEL CIMR L7Z43P7 SPEC 43P77A Inverterspecifications Input specification INPUT AC3PH 380 480V 50 60Hz 10 2A Output specification OUTPUT AC3PH 0 480V 0 120Hz 8 5A 3min 5096ED 8 5kVA Lot number gt O N MASS 4 0 kg Mass Serial number gt S N PRG LLEEEEELEEEELEE ELE ELE EE ELE ELLE TL N UL file number FILE NO E131457 V Y YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORARION MADE IN JAPAN Ms J Fig 1 1 Nameplate Binverter Model Numbers The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification voltage class and maximum motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes CIMR L7Z2 3P7 Inverter 3 Varispeed L7 No Specification OYMC European Std No Max Motor Capacity Voltage Class AC Input 3 phase 200 V AC Input 3 phase 400 V P Indicates the decimal point Fig 1 2 Inverter Model Numbers Inverter Specifications The Inverter specifications SPEC on the nameplate indicate the voltage class maximum motor capacity the protective structure and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes 2 3P7 1B Hardware Revision Voltage Class AC Input 3 phase 200 V AC Input 3 phase 400 V No Max Motor Capacity P Indicates the decimal point Fig 1 3 Inverter Specifications Inv
39. 6 17 6 18 Condition Standard Short Floor Advanced Short Floor Leveling command during run with constant speed higher than 40 Viominal 40 x V Nominal V Lcveling f out Leveling During Run with con command stant speed No effect Leveling command during run with constant speed lower than 4096 V Nominal Nominal Leveling out Leveling command Related parameters Control Methods Change Closed during Open Closed Loop Operation end n Vector PM 50 00 Hz 100 0096 Parameter Factory No Setting Nominal Speed Speed reference priority selection 1 Short floor operation 0 Nominal Leveling Speed detection level 0 0 Hz Nominal speed for short floor calculation 0 0Hz Minimum constant speed time 0 0 sec Distance calculation acceleration time gain 150 0 gt gt S er S gt l elo Distance calculation deceleration time gain 150 0 Simple Short Floor Operation Setup The short floor function can be activated by setting parameter S3 01 to 1 f parameter d1 18 is set to 0 or 3 multispeed input the set value of parameter S3 05 is taken as nominal speed reference for the short floor calculation Additionally it is required to use the nominal leveling speed detection refer to page 6 6 Nominal Leveling Speed Detection with Multi Speed Inputs f parameter d1 18 is set to 1 or 2
40. CW when the input is open and counterclockwise CCW when the input is closed The parameter F1 05 has no effect if this function is activated E Multi function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Control Methods Closed Function Open Closed lege Loop Loop Wanton Vector Vector PM PG direction change over No Yes Yes 6 54 Motor 2 Selection If a digital input is set to Motor 2 selection H1 O0 16 this input can be used to switch over between motor and motor 2 settings E1 E2 LIL and E3 E4 OD A digital output can be used to monitor the selec tion H2 LILI 1C If motor 2 is selected the speed set in d1 19 will be the speed reference d1 19 has priority over all speed inputs except the service speed input The output signal sequence brake control contactor etc is the same as for motor 1 This function is not available for Closed Loop Vector for PM motors If motor 2 is selected the brake sequence is active and rescue operation can be performed iRelated Parameters Control Methods Parameter Factory i Open Closed No Name Setting Loop Loop i Vector Vector E Multi function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Control Methods 3a Function Closed Closed Value L 3 Loop oop V ector Vector PM 6 55 Output Terminal Functions The digital multifunction outputs can be set to several functions using the H2 01 to H2 03 parameters termi nal M1
41. Digital Operator LED Monitor Com munication Fault 1 Communication with the digital opera tor could not be established within 5 seconds after the power was supplied to the Inverter Digital operator cable was not securely connected or digital operator is defec tive and or control board is defective Check the speed selection start sequence Disconnect the Digital Operator LED Monitor and then connect it again Replace the Inverter CPU External RAM Fault The control board is damaged Cycle the Inverter power supply Replace the Inverter CPF01 COM ERR OP amp INV Digital Operator LED Monitor Com munication Fault 2 After communications with the digital operator was established the communi cation stopped for 2 seconds or more Digital operator cable is not properly connected or the digital operator is defective Disconnect the Digital Operator LED Monitor and then connect it again The control board is damaged Cycle the Inverter power supply Replace the Inverter CPF02 BB Circuit Err Table 7 2 Not Resetable Faults Baseblock circuit error A baseblock circuit error occurred at power up Gate array hardware failure at power up Perform an initialization to factory defaults Cycle the Inverter power supply Replace the Inverter CPF03 EEPROM Error EEPROM error Check sum is not valid Noise or spike was on the control cir
42. Fig 6 18 Torque Limit Parameters BUsing a Digital Output to Signalize Operation at the Torque Limit If a multifunction output is set to this function H2 01 to H2 03 is set to 30 the output is switched ON when the motor output torque reaches one of the torque limits 6 43 BAdjusting the Torque Limit Integral Time L7 06 In Open Loop Vector control during constant speed the limit function works with an integral control part dur ing acceleration and deceleration just a P control is used Normally there is no need to change this setting ncrease the setting if vibrations or short cycle oscillations occur when the motor is running at the set torque limit Decrease the setting if long cycle oscillations occur when the motor is running at the set torque limit B Enabling the Torque Limit Integral Operation during Accel Decel L7 07 In Open Loop Vector control an integral operation can be applied to the torque limit function P control is standard This improves the torque limit responsiveness and smoothes the torque limit operation To enable the integral operation set parameter L7 07 to 1 The integral time set in parameter L7 07 is used ESetting Precautions When the output torque reaches the torque limit control and compensation of the motor speed is disabled to prevent the output torque from exceeding the torque limit The torque limit has the priority The torque limit accuracy is 4 lower than 10 Hz
43. Frequency setting resolution Analog references 0 025 50 Hz 11 bits plus sign Output frequency reso 0 01 Hz lution Overload capacity and 150 of rated output current for 30 sec maximum current Frequency setting signal 0 to 10V Acceleration Decelera in uds 2 P tion time 0 01 to 600 00 s 4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration time settings Over torque under torque detection torque limits 8 speed control maximum 4 acceleration and deceleration times S curve acceleration deceleration auto tuning rotational or stationary dwell function cooling fan ON Main control functions OFF control slip compensation torque compensation auto restart after fault DC braking for starting and stop ping automatic fault reset and parameter copy function special Lift functions and sequences short floor operation rescue operation with light load direction search machine data copy function save in encoder memory Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal overload relay Instantaneous overcur Stops at approximately 200 of rated output current rent protection Fuse blown protection Stops for fuse blown Overload protection OL2 fault at 150 of rated output current for 30 sec 200 Class Inverter Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 410 V Overvoltage prots ti n 400 Class Inverter Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 820 V
44. Gain and H3 17 Bias for analog input A1 The gain sets the level of the selected input value if 10V is input the bias sets the level of the selected input value if OV is input PLP Sel el el el el Sl gt gt gt gt gt PL el Sel el el el el mee 6 25 6 U Speed Detection and Speed Limitation Speed Agreement Function There are eight different types of frequency detection methods available The digital outputs M1 to M6 can be set to this function and can be used to indicate a frequency detection or agreement to any external equipment Related Parameters Control Methods Parameter Factory Open Closed No Setting Loop Loop Vector Vector L4 01 Speed agreement detection level 0 0 Hz A A L4 02 Speed agreement detection width 2 0 Hz A A L4 03 Speed agreement detection level 0 0 Hz A A A A L4 04 Speed agreement detection width 4 2 0 Hz iaMultifunction Output Settings H2 01 to H2 03 M1 M6 function selection The table below shows the necessary H2 01 to H2 03 parameter setting for each of the speed agreement func tions Refer to the timing charts on the following page for details Function Setting fret four Agree I fout fset Agree 1 Frequency detection 1 Frequency detection 2 fref fout Agree 2 6 fout fset Agree 2 Frequency detection 3 Frequency det
45. Handling Inverters This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter Vatrispeed L7 Models T PER 1 2 Confirmations upon Delivery mnes 1 3 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions 1 7 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site 1 9 Installation Orientation and Space 1 10 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover 1 11 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator LED Monitor and gore MOTO M E 1 13 ae un so arispeed L7 Models The Varispeed L7 Series includes Inverters in two voltage classes 200 V and 400 V The maximum motor capacities vary from 3 7 to 55 kW 23 models Table 1 1 Varispeed L7 Models Specifications penus MA ISpSed Er Always specify through the protective structure when ordering Voltage Motor Oum Class Capacity Lee Basic Model IEC IP00 NEMA 1 IEC IP20 kW kasisi Number CIMR L7Z CIMR L7Z CIMR L7Z CIMR L7Z23P7 23P710 23P770 CIMR L7Z25P5 25P510 25P570 CIMR L7Z27P5 27P510 27P570 CIMR L7Z2011 201110 201170 CIMR L7Z2015 201510 201570 200 V class CIMR L7Z2018 201810 201870 CIMR L7Z2022 202200 202210 202270 CIMR L7Z2030 203000 203010 203070 CIMR L7Z2037 203700 203710 203770 CIMR L7Z2045 204500 204510 204570 CIMR L7Z2055 205500 205510 205570 CIMR L7Z43P7 43P710 43P770 CIMR L7Z44P0 44P010 43P770 CIMR L7Z45P
46. Increase the Zero servo gain in parameter 1 20 Common Motor torque is not fully established when the brake opens Lengthen the brake release delay time S1 06 and the DC injection Zero servo time at start S1 04 Motor contactors close too late Make sure that the contactors are cosed before the Up Down com mand is set Jerk at start Common Motor starts turning when the brake is not completely opened or runs against the brake Increase the DC injection time at start 81 04 Too fast acceleration rate change Increase the S Curve at start C2 01 Vibrations in low and medium speed area Too high output voltage Reduce the V f pattern settings E1 08 E1 10 Too fast torque compensation Increase the torque compesation delay time C4 02 Too high output voltage Reduce the V f pattern settings E1 08 E1 10 Too high ASR settings Decrease C5 01 C5 03 and increase C5 02 C5 04 Wrong motor slip value Check the motor slip value in param eter E2 02 Increase or decrease it in steps of 0 2 Hz Vibrations in the high and top speed area Too fast torque compensation Increase the torque compesation delay time C4 02 Too high ASR settings Decrease C5 01 C5 03 and increase C5 02 C5 04 4 11 4 12 Problem Jerk caused by over shooting when the top speed is reached Possible Reason Too fast torque compensation or slip c
47. L1 N I VIT2 Batt m j i S L2 Ho ae p dE A lt wns pecu i T L3 ME T 49 ES l Power Supply one Rescue Operation 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i Enable Input The contactors must be operated so that contactor B is always opened before A is closed When the rescue operation is disabled the contactor A must be opened before B is closed iRescue Operation Speed During rescue operation the speed is limited by the battery voltage using the following formula for the 200 V class Rescue Operation Speed Limit DC Bus Voltage 12 11 Base cre quencye bo 300V x2 for the 400 V class Rescue Operation Speed Limit DEus Voltage 12 11 Base frequency EE 600 V x2 If the rescue speed reference d1 15 is higher than the rescue operation speed limit the output frequency is automatically limited to the calculated limit It prevents a voltage saturation and a possible motor stalling BPrecautions Because of the possibly low DC bus voltage during rescue operation the heatsink cooling fans may not work A continuous operation under this condition can result in over heat faults and inverter damage 6 79 6 80 i Torque Limits during Rescue Operation Depending on the rescue system it might be useful to apply a torque limit The torque limit for rescue opera tion can be set in parameter S3 11 It is active only if the rescue operation digital input is set an
48. L2 L3 Control Power Supply circuit l L et 7 Fig 2 9 Control Power Supply Connection Please refer to page 6 77 Rescue System for details about rescue operation 2 16 U T1 V T2 W T3 M iring Control Circuit Terminals Wire Sizes For remote operation using analog signals the control line length between the Analog Operator or operation signals and the Inverter should be less than 30 m The controller wires should always be separated from main power lines or other control circuits in order to avoid disturbances It is recommended to use shielded twisted pair wires and ground the shield for the largest area of contact between shield and ground The terminal numbers and the appropriate wire sizes are shown in Table 2 7 Table 2 7 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes Same for all Models Terminals AC SC Al V SI S2 S3 84 S5 S6 S7 BB MA MB MC MI M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 Terminal Screws Phoenix type Tightening Torque Nem 0 5 to 0 6 Possible Wire Sizes mm AWG Solid wire 0 5 to 2 5 Stranded wire 0 5 to 1 5 26 to 14 Recom mended Wire Size mm AWG E G 0 5 to 2 5 20 to 14 Wire Type Shielded twisted pair wire Shielded polyethylene covered vinyl sheath cable Ferrules with plastic sleeves should be used for the signal lines to simplify wiring and
49. Open Loop Vector control and Closed loop Vector control The Inverter supplies power to the motor for approximately 20 seconds to measure the motor line to line resistance and cable resistance The motor does not turn during this tuning procedure Encoder Offset Tuning T1 0124 This tuning mode is available in Closed Loop Vector control for PM motors only It automatically sets the off set between the magnetic pole and the encoder zero postion It can be used to retune the offset after an encoder change without changing the motor data settings Auto Tuning Precautions gt General Precautions P 1 Use rotating autotuning whenever high precision is required or for a motor that is not connected to a S load e 2 Use not rotating autotuning whenever the load cannot be disconnected from the motor e g the ropes IMPORTANT can t be removed Make sure that the mechanical brake is not open for not rotating autotuning During autotuning the motor contactors have to be closed For autotuning the BB and BB1 signals must be ON Inverter must not be in base block condition Confirm that the motor is mechanically fixed and can not move Power is supplied during auto tuning even though the motor does not turn Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed Remove the feather key from the motor shaft before performing a tuning with rotating motor with a stand alone motor no traction sheave or gear mounted 9 To canc
50. Sets the run command input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal digital multifunction inputs 3 Option Card Control input scan Cntl Input Scans Used to set the responsiveness of the control inputs forward reverse and multi function inputs 0 Fast reading 1 Normal reading Can be used for possible malfunction due to noise Run com mand selec tion in programming modes RUN CMD at PRG Used to set an operation prohibi tion in programming modes 0 Operation prohibited 1 Operation permitted Disabled when Digital Operator is the selected Run command source b1 02 0 EDC Injection Braking b2 Name Display Magnetic flux compensation volume Field Comp Description Sets the magnetic flux compensa tion as a percentage of the no load current Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Name Display Timer function ON delay time Delay ON Timer i Timer Function b4 Description Sets the timer function output ON delay time dead band for the timer function input in 1 second units Enabled when a timer function is set in HI LILI or H2 LILI Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector
51. Sets the speed level for Nominal Leveling speed detection when multispeed inputs are used d1 18 0 3 Nominal speed for short floor calculation Vn Short floor Sets the nominal speed value which is used for the short floor calculation Light load search for res cue operation LightLoad Search Enables or disables the Light load search function for rescue opera tion 0 disabled 1 enabled 2 enabled for motor only Light load search time LightLd Srch Time Sets the light load search time for the rescue operation Output phase order Exchg Phase Sel Sets the output phase order 0 Output phase order is U V W 1 Output phase order is U W V Frequency refer ence loss detec tion FRL selection Enables or disables the frequency reference loss detection when dl 18 1 and HI LILI 83 0 Disabled Enabled Light load search fre quency LightLd Srch Freq Sets the light load speed for the rescue operation Rescue opera tion torque limit Rescue OP TLM Sets the torque limit for the rescue operation 0 to 300 Base Block restart selection BB Restart Sets the behaviour of the inverter if a Base Block command is set during run 0 Disabled The Run command must be cycled to restart 1 Enable The inverter restarts when the Base Block signal is released and the Run signal is still active Traction sheave
52. flash memory FLASH ID Manufacturer s ID number Cannot be output Terminal A1 input level Term A1 Level Monitors the input level of ana log input Al A value of 100 corresponds to 10V input 10 V 10096 0 to 10 V possible AI 14B channel 2 input level AI 14 Ch2 InpLvl Monitors the input level of ana log input 2 on a AI 14B option board A value of 100 is equal to 10V input 10 V 10096 0 to 10 V possible AI 14B channel 3 input level AI 14 Ch3 InpLvl Monitors the input level of ana log input 3 on a AI 14B option board A value of 100 is equal to 10V input 10 V 10096 0 to 10 V possible Motor second ary current Iq Mot SEC Cur rent Monitors the calculated value of the motor secondary current The motor rated current corre sponds to 100 10 V Motor rated current 0 to 10 V output Motor excita tion current Id Mot EXC cur rent Monitors the calculated value of the motor excitation current The motor rated current corre sponds to 100 10 V Motor rated current 0 to 10 V output Name Control Methods Closed MEMO Loop BUS Vector Register PM Output Signal Level During Open Closed Multi Function Analog Output Loop Loop Vector Vector Description Display Frequency refer Monitors the frequency refer ence after soft ence after the
53. no condensation IEC IP00 10 to 45 C 95 RH or less no condensation Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter Be sure to remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18 5 kW or less in a panel Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter Install the Inverter in a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust It can be installed in a totally enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust When installing or operating the Inverter always take special care so that metal powder oil water or other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter Do not install the Inverter on combustible material such as wood Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight Controlling the Ambient Temperature To enhance the reliability of operation the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature increases If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment such as a cabinet use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45 C Prot
54. of standard spec al P 7 The maximum altitude is 3000m above sea level IMPORTANT Example The following example shows the derating of a 400V 7 5 kW inverter L7Z47P5 Table 9 5 Altitude derating example 1000 m or less 480 VAC or less 18 A or less 10 to 45 C 1000 to 2000 m 432 VAC or less 16 2 A or less 10 to 43 C 2000 to 3000 m 384 VAC or less 14 4 A or less 10 to 41 C ws MM Q AC Reactors for EN 12015 Compatibility The following table shows the AC reactors which have to be applied in order to fulfill the requirements of the EN 12015 Table 9 6 AC Chokes Inverter Model AC Reactor Code Description CIMR L7Z44P0 L7Z PUZ44P0 CE Reactor III 44PO 3 7kW 7mH 13A L7Z45P5 L7Z PUZ45P5 CE Reactor III 45P5 5 5kW 5 10mH 17A L7Z47P5 L7Z PUZ47P5 CE Reactor III 47P5 7 5kW 4 35mH 22A L7Z4011 L7Z PUZ4011 CE Reactor III 4011 11kW 3mH 32A L7Z4015 L7Z PUZ44P0 CE Reactor III 4015 15kW 2 34mH 41A L7Z4018 L7Z PUZ4015 CE Reactor III 4018 18 5kW 1 95mH 49A L7Z4022 L7Z PUZ4018 CE Reactor III 4022 22kW 1 65mH 58A L7Z4030 L7Z PUZ4022 CE Reactor III 4030 30kW 1 23mH 78A L7Z4037 L7Z PUZ4037 CE Reactor III 4037 37kW 1mH 96A L7Z4045 L7Z PUZ4045 CE Reactor III 4045 45kW 0 83mH 115A L7ZA4055 L7Z PUZ4055 CE Reactor III 4055 55kW 0 62mH 154A L7Z23P7 L7Z PUZ23P7 CE Reactor III 23P7 3 7kW 2 28mH 21A L7Z25P5 L7Z PUZ25P5 CE Reactor III 25P5 5 5kW 5 10mH 1
55. the accuracy is lower 596 at an output frequency of 10 Hz or above When output frequency is Motor Overload Protection The motor can be protected from overload using the built in electronic thermal overload relay function Related Parameters 6 Parameter No Factory Setting Change during Operation Control Methods Open Closed Loop Vector Vector Loop Closed Loop Vector PM E2 01 Motor 1 rated current 7 00 A Q Q E4 01 Motor 2 rated current 7 00 A E5 02 PM Motor rated current 731A L1 01 Motor protection selection 1 L1 02 Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity The given value is for a 400 V Class Inverter with 3 7 kW Motor protection time constant Multi Function Outputs H2 01 to H2 03 Function Q Q Q A Control Methods Q Q Q A Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM Motor overload OLI including OH3 pre alarm ON 90 or more of the detection level iSetting the Motor Rated Current E2 01 E4 01 or E5 02 Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in parameters E2 01 for motor 1 E4 01 for motor 2 or E5 02 PM motor This set value is the base current for the internal thermal overload calculation e 44 Yes Yes Yes iSetting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics L1 01 Set the overload protec
56. uniw 6 08 A 1491qeH SQ egeaisie pry O L uorsi au 8 LSPOOSLLL Haws ies ans ANL JUSIGeH JOpNYy Jeeg peJjv WIP AA Hawg ley aNs ANL 900 EEZZZ 90 90 OLZ 829439 oj juawyoeye ees pesn eq Aew qns ANL WO 9je2jhueo eui jo jueuuoeje y ui paS JejieAuoo 1ewod orejs Jo sed y AIUD L L8N3 40 SjueujeuinbeJ BuipuodseJj00 y Buipioooe zno pated eq oj seu Bum eu LOM eje1 Kuejixne y sano jun amod y jo jueujeAou 1ueneJd JSNW J9 0JjUO 10 8 9 3 OY ZY JO JO uorounjjeui e jo eseo y u Jelojuoo JOje e 3 ey Aq pexoeuo eq 0 seu 126juoo Jojiuou gg siu sindino jej6rp uonounjninui y jo euo oj peuuueJ oJd eq jsnui JejieAuoo amod onejs euj jo uonounj JOUOW gg eu uodai siu jo y Jejdeuo oj Buipyoooe jno paeo eq oj seu uonoeuuooJejui eu TEL Jeideuo 9661 L LgN3 JO siueueJmbeij ay jeaui ysnw s ejoi s ne eu un Jamod eui jo umop 1nus ejejs ejes eui s uonipuoo jjo je od eui zey peuuueJ8oJd eq snw gg pue gg sindu xoo q eseq eu suonipuo 8 wey NL 9 14 10 Appendix This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter motor and peripheral devices and also provides lists of con stants Inverter Application Precautions ssuss 10 2 Motor Application Precautions essssss 10 4 User 9o 2010 PREMO a Ere EEEE 10 5 da Inverter Application Precautions S
57. 00 600 00 1 50 C1 01 01 50sec 0 09 600 00 QUICK Decel Time 1 N m k p 001 50sec 0 00 600 00 1 50 0 00 600 00 1 50 Oo U 5 a QUICK NL Ba aid d NN Mir Rated Power E2 11 4 00kW E2 11 004 00kW 0 00 650 00 0 00 650 00 4 00kW 4 00kW L1 0 1 Std Fan Cooled ESC 1 Fig 3 6 Operations in Quick Programming Mode Advanced Programming Mode In the advanced programming mode all Inverter parameters can be monitored and set A parameter can be changed from the setting displays using the Increment Decrement and Shift RESET keys The parameter is saved and the display returns to the monitor display when the DATA ENTER key is pressed Refer to page 5 1 User Parameters for details about the parameters iExample Operations Example key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display ADV ADV ADV Main Menu Initialization EN select Language Select Language Programmin 9 g Select Language __ Main Menu Hos i A BH 0 707 Modified Consts Control Method Main Menu Auto Tuning DRIVE Main Menu Operation C1 B 1 5sec 0 00 600 00 1 50sec p v i a DV ADV eo2 1 02 i C1 02 07 5sec 0 00 600 00 Accel Tim
58. 09 Not used Not used Control terminals input status Bit 0 Input terminal S1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 Input terminal S2 ON 0 OFF Bit 2 Multi function input terminal S3 1 ON 0 OFF Bit3 Multi function input terminal S4 ON 0 OFF ON 0 OFF ON 0 OFF ON 0 OFF Bit4 Multi function input terminal S5 Bit 5 Multi function input terminal S6 1 1 1 1 Bit 6 Multi function input terminal S7 Bits 7 to F Not used Register Address Contents Inverter status Bit 0 Operation Operating Bit 1 Zero speed Zero speed Bit 2 Frequency agree Agreement Bit 3 User defined speed agree Agreement Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 Output frequency L4 01 Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 Output frequency 2 L4 01 Bit 6 Inverter startup completed Startup completed Bit 7 Undervoltage detection Detected Bit 8 Baseblock Inverter output baseblock Bit 9 Frequency reference mode Not communication 0 Communication option Bit A Run command mode Not communication 0 Communication option Bit B Overtorque detection Detected Bit C Frequency reference lost Lost Bit D Restart enabled Restarting Bit E Error including MEMOBUS communications time out l Error occurred Bit F MEMOBUS communications time out1 Timed out Multi function contact output status Bit 0 Multi function contact output 1 terminal MI M2
59. 1 2 3 and Integral Time 1 2 3 ASR integral T limit ASR I Limit Set the parameter to a small value to prevent any radical load change A setting of 100 is equal to the max imum output frequency ASR propor tional P gain 3 ASR P Gain 3 ASR integral T time 3 ASR I Time3 Set the proportional gain 3 and the integral time 3 of the speed control loop ASR for the minimum fre quency The settings is active for decelera tion only ASR gain for encoder offset tuning Pullin ASR Pgain Name Display Carrier fre quency selec tion 1 CarrierFreq Sel Sets the ASR P gain which is used for the encoder offset tuning if Hip erface or EnDat encoders are used Carrier Frequency C6 Description Selects the carrier frequency for Induction motor control modes 1 2 kHz 2 5 kHz 3 8 kHz 4 10 kHz 5 12 5 kHz 6 15 kHz Fac tory Setting Change during Opera tion Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Name Display Carrier fre quency selec tion 2 CarrierFreq Sel Description Selects the carrier frequency for PM motor control modes 1 2 kHz 2 4 kHz 3 6 kHz 4 8 kHz 5 12 kHz 6 15 kHz Fac tory Setting Control Methods Open Loop Vector
60. 1 ON Bit 1 Multi function contact output 2 terminal M3 M4 1 ON Bit 2 Multi function contact output 3 terminal MS M6 1 ON Bits 3 to F Not used 002EH 0030H Not used 0031H Main circuit DC voltage 0032H Torque Monitor U1 09 0033H Power Monitor U1 08 0034H 003AH Not used 003BH CPU software number 003CH Flash software number Communications error details Bit 0 CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used 6 Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error E ol Bit 5 Framing error Bit 6 Time out Bits 7 to F Not used kVA setting Control method Note Communications error details are stored until an error reset is input 6 91 6 92 Inverter Error Codes The content of a current fault and faults that have occurred earlier can be read out by Memobus using the Fault Trace U2 O1D and the Fault History U3 O1D parameters The fault codes are shown in the table below Fault Description Fault Description Fault Description EF6 SEI EF7 SE2 OS SE3 DEV CPF02 PGO CPF03 PF CPF04 LF CPF05 CPF06 CPF07 CPF08 CPF09 CPF10 CPF20 CPF21 CPF22 CPF23 ENTER Command When parameters are written in the Inverter from a PC PLC using MEMOBUS communications the parame ters are temporarily stored in the parameter data area of the Inverter To enabl
61. 2 Protection for frequency converter motor external cooled 3 Protection for special vector control MOL Select motor 5 Permanent magnet constant torque motor Motor protection selection Magnetic pole Sets the detection method for magnetic position detection pole position of a PM motor 0 Automatic detection applicable for Yaskawa IPM motor only Mag det sel 4 Hiperface Data 5 EnDat Data The setting ranges for acceleration deceleration times depends on the setting of C1 10 Acceleration deceleration Time Setting Unit If C1 10 is set to 0 the setting range is 0 00 to 600 00 s 2 The given values are for a 400 V class Inverter 3 The setting range is from 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The given values are for a 3 7 kW 400 V Class Inverter 4 The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The given value is for a 3 7 kW 400 V Class Inverter M E User Parameter Tables Setup Settings A B Initialize Mode A1 5 8 Name Display Language selection for Digital Opera tor display Select Language Description Used to select the language dis played on the Digital Operator JVOP 160 OY only 0 English 1 Japanese 2 German 3 French 4 Italian 5 Spanish 6 Portuguese This parameter is not changed by the initialize operation Setting Range Factory Setting Control Met
62. 2 0 r l1 A I2 1 3 to 1 4 0 5 to 4 20 to 10 L7Z2045 R LI S L2 T L3 41 U TI V T2 W T3 RI L11 1 L21 T1 L31 NO 17 6 to 22 5 95 3 0 to 4 0 3 PO 8 8 to 10 8 6 to 16 10 to 4 Power cables 17 6 to 22 5 50 to 70 1 to 2 0 50 1 e g 600 V vinyl power cables rl A I2 1 3 to 1 4 0 5 to 4 20 to 10 1 5 16 L7Z2055 R LI S L2 T L3 1 NO 31 4 to 392 50 to 95 1 0 to 4 0 50 x 2P 1 0 x 2P U TI V T2 W T3 R1 L11 S1 L21 TI L31 17 6 to 22 5 90 4 0 90 4 0 3 PO 8 8 to 10 8 6 to 70 10 to 2 0 17 6 to 22 5 35 to 95 3 to 4 0 r l1 A 12 1 3 to 1 4 The wire size is valid for PVC insulated copper cable 30 ambient temperature Inverter Model CIMR O L7Z43P7 Table 2 2 400 V Class Wire Sizes Terminal Symbol R LI S L2 T L3 1 42 BI B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 NO PO Terminal Screws Tightening Torque Nem 0 5 to 4 20 to 10 Possible Wire Sizes mm AWG 2 5 to 4 14 to 10 Recom mended Wire Size mm AWG Wire Type L7Z44P0 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 W T3 NO PO 2 B1 B2 2 5t04 14 to 10 L7Z45P5 R LI S L2 T L3 1 2 B1 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 NO PO 1 2 to 1 5 4 12 to 10 2 5t04 14 to 10 L7ZATPS R LI S L2 T L3 1 U TI V T2
63. 22 Starting torque compensation increase time starting torque fade out time 500 ms 81 23 Torque compensation gain in Down direction 1 0 81 24 Torque compensation bias in Up direction 0 0 81 25 Torque compensation bias in Down direction 0 0 81 29 Torque fade out speed level 0 0 Hz 81 30 Torque fade out compensation time 1000 msec 81 31 Torque limit fade out time at stop 0 msec E Multi function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Set Value Function Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM Inputs Speed selection inputs refer to page 6 5 Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Contactor closed answer back signal E Multi function Digital Outputs H2 01 to H2 03 Set Value Function Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM Zero servo end Brake release command Output contactor close command 6 13 iBrake Sequence without torque compensation at start To use the brake sequence without torque compensation at start the Terminal A1 function must be set to 0 H3 15 0 speed reference input the AI I4B Ch2 and Ch3 input functions must not be set to 14 H3 05 09 z 14 torque reference not selected The figure below shows the timing chart for this brake sequence
64. Bit 7 to F Not used CPF Fault Content 2 Bit 0 CPF20 Bit 1 CPF21 Bit 2 CPF22 Bit 3 CPF23 Bit4toF Not used Alarm Content 1 Bit 0 UV DC bus undervoltage Bit 1 OV DC bus overvoltage Bit 2 OH Inverter heatsink overheat pre alarm OH2 Inverter overheat alarm input by a digital input OL3 Overtorque detection 1 OL4 Overtorque detection 2 EF Forward Reverse input set at the same time BB Baseblock active EF3 External alarm set on terminal S3 it 9 EF4 External alarm set on terminal S4 BitA EF5 External alarm set on terminal S5 Bit B EF6 External alarm set on terminal S6 Bit C EF7 External alarm set on terminal S7 Bit D E Not used BitF OS Overspeed alarm Alarm Content 2 Bit 0 DEV Speed deviation Bi PGO PG disconnected Bi OPR Digital operator disconnected Bi CE Memobus communications error Bi BUS Communications error Bi CALL Memobus communications on standby Bi OLI Motor overload Bit 7 OL2 Inverter overload Bit 8toB Not used Bit C CALL Communications on standby BitD UL3 Undertorque detection 1 Bit E ULA Undertorque detection 2 BitF Not used Not used 6 89 Register Address Contents Inverter s Forward operation Reverse opera
65. Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Timer function OFF delay time Delay OFF Timer Name Display Dwell fre quency at start Dwell Ref a Start Dwell time at start Dwell Time Start Dwell fre quency at stop Dwell Ref Stop Dwell time at stop Dwell Time Stop Name Display Torque monitor gain Torque Mon Gain Sets the timer function output OFF delay time dead band for the timer function input in 1 second units Enabled when a timer function is set in HI LILI or H2 LIEI BDwell Functions b Description Run command ON Output frequency b6 01 b6 03 N Time The dwell function can be used to hold the output frequency tempo rarily iTorque Monitor b8 Description Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Open Close Loop dLoop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Open Close Loop dLoop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register 5 11 Tuning Parameters C BAcceleration Deceleration C1 Name Display Acceleration time 1 Accel Time 1 Description Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the maximum output frequency Decelera
66. Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register 5 17 Reference Parameters d BPreset Reference d1 Control Methods Name Setting Fec Description Range tory Display Setting Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Frequency refer ence 1 Sets the frequency reference Reference 1 Frequency refer ence Sets the frequency reference when multi step speed command 1 is ON for a multi function Reference 2 input Frequency refer ence 3 Sets the frequency reference when multi step speed command 2 is ON for a multi function Reference 3 input Frequency refer ence 4 Sets the frequency reference when multi step speed com mands 1 and 2 are ON for multi Reference 4 function inputs Frequency refer ence 5 Sets the frequency when multi step speed command 3 is ON for a multi function input Reference 5 Frequency refer ence 6 Sets the frequency reference when multi step speed com mands 1 and 3 are ON for multi Reference 6 function inputs Frequency refer ence 7 Sets the frequency reference when multi step speed com mands 2 and 3 are ON for multi Reference 7 function inputs Frequency refer ence Sets the frequency reference when multi step speed com mands 1 2 and 3 are ON for Reference 8 multi function inputs Nominal
67. Detection pp for an alarm list mFault Reset Command Active Setting 11 If a multifunction output is set to this function the output is switched ON as long as a fault reset command is input at one of the digital inputs BTimer Function Output Setting 12 Refer to page 6 52 Using the Timer Function iDuring Reverse Run Setting 1A If a multifunction output is set to this function the output is switched ON whenever a RUN command in reverse direction is active also during DC injection and base block It is OFF when a forward RUN is input iDuring Base Block 2 Setting 1B If a multifunction output set to this function is switched OFF as long as a Baseblock command is input Motor 2 selected Setting 1C If a multifunction output is set to this function the output 1s switched OFF when motor 1 is selected and switched ON 1f motor 2 is selected 6 57 iDuring Regenerative Operation Setting 1D If a multifunction output is set to this function the output is switched ON when the motor works regenerative i e when energy is fed back to the inverter Restart Enabled Setting 1E Refer to page 6 81 Automatic Fault Reset iDuring Torque Limit Setting 30 Refer to page 6 43 Limiting the Motor Torque Torque Limit Function BZero Servo End Setting 33 Refer to page 6 16 Zero Speed Control Zero Servo position lock iBrake Release Command Setting 40 This output signal can be used to control
68. Explanation Digital Operator Display Press the MENU Key and select advanced programming mode ADV Main Menu Programming Press the DATA ENTER Key ADV Initialization J Bd 00 1 Select Language 6 67 Explanation Digital Operator Display ADV Press the Increment and Decrement Key until parameter 03 01 is displayed Copy Function COPY Function Selection F Copy Funtion Sel ADV Copy Function Sel Press the DATA ENTER Key and select the constants setting display COPY SELECT ADV Copy Function Sel Change the set value to 2 using the Increment Key o301 H OP INV WRITE ADV COPY Set the changed data using the DATA ENTER Key The COPY function starts OP 5 INV COPYING ADV COPY If the COPY functi d lly End is displayed on the Digital Operator e inction ends normally End is displayed on the Digital Operator COPY COMPLETE ADV Copy Function Sel The display returns to 03 01 when a key is pressed o3 j 0 v COPY SELECT If an error is displayed set the parameters again Refer to page 7 16 Digital Operator Copy Function Faults 6 for corrective actions 6 68 il Comparing Inverter Parameters and Digital Operator Parameter Set Values VERIFY To compare Inverter parameters and Digital Operator parameter set values use the following method Step No Expl
69. Faults 6 5 e 76 B Verify Saved Parameters To compare the parameters stored in the inverter and encoder the parameter F1 23 must be set to 3 EVRFY DATA VERIFYING is displayed during the verify process If the data are identically the display will show EVRFY VERIFY COMPLETE If the data do not match EVRFY VERIFY ERROR will be displayed xor In order to perform the WRITE COPY function P E The motor must not turn and the drive must be in baseblock condition e for EnDat the OEMI areal of the EEPROM must be available address 64 to 255 IMPORTANT for Hiperface the data field DF 0 must be available A CPF03 24 must not be active Y Rescue System Using rescue operation the car can be moved to the next floor if the power supply fails In this case the inverter must be supplied by a UPS or a battery and the rescue operation must be enabled by a digital input H1 O0 85 The DC bus voltage during rescue operation has to be set in parameter L2 11 A light load detection func tion can be used to detect the light load direction for the car evacuation iRelated Parameters Control Methods Open Closed Closed Loop Loop Loop WERT Change during operation Parameter Factory No setting Vector Vector pm Rescue operation speed DC bus voltage during rescue operation Light Load Search for rescue operation Light Load Search time for rescue operation
70. Jerk at stop Common Brake closed too early so that the motor runs against the brake Increase the brake close delay time S1 07 and if necessary the DC injec tion time at stop S1 05 Motor contactor opens when the brake is not yet completely closed Check the motor contactor sequence High frequency motor noise Common The carrier frequency is too low Increase the carrier frequency in parameter C6 02 or C6 11 If the car rier frequency increased higher than the factory setting a current derating must be considered refer to page 9 6 Carrier Frequency Derating Vibrations which increase with the speed Encoder vibrates Check the encoder mounting and the orientation to the motor shaft Common Mechanical problems Check bearings gearbox Rotational parts motor armature hand wheel brake disk drum have an unbalance Balance the rotating parts User Parameters This chapter describes all user parameters that can be set in the Inverter User Parameter Descriptions cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 2 Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels 5 3 User Parameter Tables iieecieueicie eee eera kenn h nnn pokrhe 5 8 IY SUIS A T 5 8 Application Parameters D s sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 5 10 Tuning Parameters Liuius iuo plas ccc eee eats 5 12 Reference Parameters Ghisaricatiiersssceasarant
71. Meaning DC Bus Overvoltage The DC bus voltage has exceeded the overvoltage detection level Default detection levels are 200 V class 410 VDC 400 V class 820 VDC Probable Causes The deceleration time is set too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large Corrective Actions Increase the deceleration time C1 02 04 06 08 or connect a braking option The power supply voltage is too high Check the power supply and decrease the voltage to meet the inverter s specifications The braking chopper braking resistor is not working Check the braking chopper resis tor UVI DC Bus Undervolt DC Bus Undervoltage The DC bus voltage is below the Und ervoltage Detection Level L2 05 The default settings are 200V class 190 VDC 400 V class 380 VDC The voltage fluctuations of the power supply are too high A momentary power loss occurred Check the input voltage The terminal screws of the input power supply are loose Check the wiring of the input termi nals An open phase error occurred at the input terminals Check the input voltage and the wiring of the input terminals The acceleration time is set too short Extend the settings in C1 01 03 05 07 Main Circuit MC Operation Failure The MC stopped responding during Inverter operation An error occurred in the inrush current prevention circuit while the Inverter was running Replace t
72. O B Phase Output CLOCK 0 1 TB2 S CLOCK i Us Up and Up sensor ZIN GND 0 UN and OV sensor l Oo REFSIN B SIN B JP OL ASIN B Oo REFCOS A TB1 Data DATA a Data IDATA O jf TB4 O Fig 2 20 PG F2 Wiring EnDat signal names in brackets ONON AON Precautions The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 50m for the signal lines and 30m for the monitor output at terminal TB3 The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F1 05 PG Rotation The factory set ting is A phase SIN leading in forward direction motor shaft turning counterclockwise seen from the shaft side Refer to page 2 31 Wiring Precautions for general precautions The signal voltage levels must be within the following limits REFSIN B REFCOS A offset 2 2 2 8V SIN B COS B peak to peak voltage 0 9 1 1V 2 30 Wiring the Terminal Blocks BWire Sizes Same for All PG Card Models Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 2 15 For the ferrule types refer to Table 2 8 Pulse generator power supply Pulse input terminal Pulse monitor output terminal Table 2 15 Wire Sizes Terminal Terminal Crows Wire Thickness Wire Type Tightening Torque max 1 0 mm for flexible wire Shielded twisted pair max 0 5 mm for flexible wire wire with ferrules Shielded polyethylene max 1
73. Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM Motor rated slip Motor Rated Slip Sets the motor rated slip This set value will become the refer ence value for the slip compensation This parameter is automatically set during autotuning Motor no load current No Load Current Sets the motor no load current This parameter is automatically set during autotuning Number of motor poles Number of Poles Sets the number of motor poles This value is an input data for autotun ing Motor line to line resis tance Term Resis tance Sets the motor phase to phase resis tance This parameter is automatically set during autotuning Motor leak inductance Leak Induc tance Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage This parameter is automatically set during autotuning Motor iron saturation coefficient 1 Saturation Compl Sets the motor iron saturation coeffi cient at 50 of magnetic flux This parameter is automatically set during rotating autotuning Motor iron saturation coefficient 2 Saturation Comp2 Sets the motor iron saturation coeffi cient at 75 of magnetic flux This parameter is automatically set during rotating autotuning Motor mechanical losses Mechanical loss Sets the motor mechanical losses as a percentage of motor rated
74. Precautions When a user defined V f pattern is used consider the following points By changing the control method the parameters E1 07 to E1 10 are changed to the factory settings for the 6 selected control method a Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows E1 04 FMAX 2 E1 06 FA E1 07 FB 2 E1 09 FMIN iaManual Setting of the Motor Parameters Motor Rated Current Setting E2 01 E4 01 Set E2 01 to the rated current value as written on the motor nameplate Motor Rated Slip Setting E2 02 E4 02 Set E2 02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the motor nameplate Rated speed Rpm x No motor poles Motor rated slip Motor rated frequency Hz 120 Motor No Load Current Setting E2 03 E4 03 Set E2 03 to the motor no load current at the rated voltage and rated frequency Normally the motor no load current is not written on the motor nameplate The following formula can be taken as an indication I sin acos cos Number of Motor Poles Setting E2 04 E4 04 E2 04 is displayed only when Closed Loop Vector control method is selected Set the number of motor poles as written on the motor nameplate 6 61 6 6 62 Motor Line to Line Resistance Setting E2 05 E4 05 E2 05 is set automatically during motor line to line resistance autotuning When it can not be performed for any reason consult the motor manufacturer for the line to line resistance value Th
75. Q No E3 01 Motor 2 control mode selection 0 No A A A A No E1 04 Q Q Q Q E3 02 Max output frequency FMAX 50 0 Hz No A A A hi Yes E1 05 Q Q Q Q E3 03 Max voltage VMAX 380 0 V No A A pi Yes E1 06 E3 04 Base frequency FA 50 0 Hz No Q Q P P Yes pda Mid output frequency FB 30Hz No A A Yes E1 08 37 3 V Q Q E3 06 Mid output frequency voltage VB wi No A A Yes E1 09 l 2 Q Q E3 07 Min output frequency FMIN 0 5 Hz No s r4 A A Yes E1 10 19 4 V Q Q E3 08 Min output frequency voltage VMIN 19 No A A Yes E1 13 Base voltage VBASE 0 0V No A A Q Yes E2 01 3 Q Q Q E4 01 Motor rated current 7 00 A No A A A Yes P Motor rated slip 2 70 Hz No A A A s Yes EL Motor no load current 230A 8 No A A A Yes 6 59 Parameter No Factory Setting Change during Operation Control Methods Open Closed Loop Vector Vector Loop Closed Loop Vector for PM Set by Auto tuning Number of motor poles Number of poles 4 poles No Q A Q A 33330 A Motor line to line resistance Motor leak inductance 19 396 Motor iron saturation coefficient 1 Motor iron saturation coefficient 2 Motor mechanical losses Motor iron loss for torque compensation Motor rated output power Motor iron saturation coefficient 3 PG constant The value is valid f
76. Rated Slip and E2 03 Motor No load Current The motor rated slip can be calculated using the values on the motor nameplate and the following formula Rated motor speed rpm x Number of motor poles 6 120 The motor data can be set automatically using the autotuning function 2 With V f control set C3 01 to 1 0 3 Apply a load and compare the speed reference and the actual motor speed during run with constant speed Adjust the slip compensation gain by 0 1 at a time If the speed is less than the target value increase the slip compensation gain if the speed is higher than the target value reduce the slip compensation gain slip Hz Motor rated frequency Hz 4 Setting C3 01 to 0 0 disables the slip compensation function BAdjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant C3 02 The slip compensation delay time constant is set in ms The setting value of C3 02 is 2000ms Normally there is no need to change these settings When the slip compensation responsiveness is low lower the set value When the speed is unstable increase the set value 6 29 6 30 BAdjusting Slip Compensation Limit C3 03 Using parameter C3 03 the upper limit for the slip compensation can be set as a percentage taking the motor rated slip as 100 If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even after adjusting the slip compensation gain the slip compensation limit may have been reached Increase the limit an
77. Table 2 4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions 200 V Class and 400 V Class Model CIMR L7ZO000 200 V Class 400 V Class R LI S L2 T L3 23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055 RI LII SI L21 TI L31 2022 to 2055 4022 to 4055 Inverter outputs U TI V T2 W T3 23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055 Purpose Terminal Symbol Main circuit power input DC bus terminals 1 e 23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055 Braking Resistor Unit connection B1 B2 23P7 to 2018 43P7 to 4018 DC reactor connection 1 42 23P7 to 2018 43P7 to 4018 Braking Unit connection 33 C 2022 to 2055 4022 to 4055 Ground C 23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055 Control Power Supply 23P7 to 2055 43P7 to 4055 2 10 Main Circuit Configurations The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Table 2 5 Table 2 5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations 200 V Class 400 V Class CIMR L7Z23P7 to 2018 CIMR L7Z43P7 to 4018 Bs Control A Control Circuit Circuit 91 RIL1 no S L2 TIL3 ES R1 L11 RIETI S1 L21 SA TA1 L31 Vu Control Power Control Circuit i Supply Circuit
78. Used to set a four digit number as the password Usually this parameter is not dis played When the Password A1 04 is displayed hold down the RESET key and press the Menu key The password will be dis played BUser set Parameters A2 A2 01 to A2 32 Factory Setting The parameters set by the user are listed in the following table Name Display User specified parameters Description Used to select the function for each of the user specified param eters User parameters are the User Param 1 to 32 only accessible parameters if Parameter Access Level is set to user parameters A1 01 1 Setting Range b1 01 to 83 24 Factory Setting Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector MEMO BUS Register MEMO BUS Register 106H to 125H 6 71 5 10 Application Parameters b BlOperation Mode Selections b1 Name Display Reference source selec tion Reference Source Description Sets the frequency reference input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal ana log input 3 Option Card Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register RUN com mand source selection Run Source
79. according to the setting in F1 04 iDetecting a Wrong Rotation Direction DV3 F1 18 Closed Loop Vector for PM only A DV3 fault indicates a wrong motor rotation direction It is detected if the speed deviation is higher than 30 and the internal torque reference value and the acceleration have opposite signs The fault is detected after the time F1 18 x 5 ms Detecting a Wrong Rotation Direction DV4 F1 19 Closed Loop Vector for PM only A DVA fault indicates a wrong motor rotation direction It is detected if the reference direction and the motor rotation direction have opposite signs and the deviation is higher than the value of parameter F1 19 set in encoder pulses Machine Data Copy Function Ifa Hiperface or an EnDat encoder is used the motor and encoder data can be saved in the encoder memory and can be read out later e g if a motor has been replaced to an equal type or if the inverter is replaced iRRelated Parameters Control Methods Closed Loop Vect Vector Vector n Parameter Factory Open Closed No Setting Loop Loop F1 25 Encoder copy selection A F1 26 Encoder write protection A ilSaved Parameters The following parameters are saved in the encoder memory E1 04 Motor maximal speed E5 06 Motor d axis inductance Ld E1 06 Motor rated speed E5 07 Motor q axis inductance Lq E1 13 Motor rated voltage E5 09 Motor voltage constant Ke E5 02 M
80. as a percentage of the Inverter rated cur running rent 301 ective when L3 05 1s 1 or 2 o o s 7 L3 06 Effecti hen L3 05 is 1 or 2 200 150 N A 494H 6 40 Usually changing this setting is not StallP Run FUB 5 necessary Level Reduce the setting when the motor stalls iBReference Detection L4 Control Methods N on Ex Setting Factory M Oo Closed Close MEMO Description E E SIDE Tieren BUS Page Num Displ Range Setting Opera Vif Loop Loop Vector Register ber Seay tion Vector Vector PM Speed agreement Effective when fout fset agree 0 0 to A A A detection level on 120 0 0 0Hz 0 0Hz 0 0Hz 7 L4 01 1 Frequency detection 1 or No 499H 6 26 Frequency detection 2 is set 0 0 to A Spd Agree Level for a multi function output 100 0 g i g 0 0 Speed agreement Effective when fref fout agree 0 0 to A A A detection width 1 fout fset agree 1 or Fre 20 0 2 0Hz 2 0Hz 2 0Hz L4 02 quency detection 1 or Fre Ed No 49AH 6 26 i i i 0 0 to A Spd Agree Width quency detection 2 is set fora multi function output 40 0 4 0 Control Methods Param Name Change Closed MEMO 5 ose eter Description Setting Factory during Open Closed Loop BUS Page Num Displ Range Setting Opera Vif Loop Loop Vect Register ber isplay tion Vector Vector ken PM Speed agreement Effecti hen f f p A A A detection level
81. be considered Both values C4 03 and C4 04 have to be set The compensation works for motoring operation only It can not be used for regenerative operation fthe starting torque compensation is used and a large shock is generated at the start increase the starting torque compensation time constant C4 05 The function can be not be used unrestricted for elevators since the load is not know before the start Automatic Speed Regulator ASR Closed Loop Vector only In Closed Loop Vector control the automatic speed regulator ASR adjusts the torque reference in order to eliminate the deviation between the speed reference and the measured speed PG feedback The ASR settings determine the motor speed accuracy and stability Fig 6 17 shows the ASR structure C5 01 03 09 Frequency P Delay Torque Reference or E Time Reference re Je Torque Motor Limits Speed C5 02 04 10 C5 08 I Limit Fig 6 11 ASR Block Diagram 6 32 iRRelated Parameters Control Methods Change during Operation Parameter Factory No Setting Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector i 40 00 ASR proportional P gain 1 TEN Yes 0 500 sec 0 300 sec 20 00 6 00 ASR integral I time 2 0 500 sec ASR integral I time 1 ASR proportional P gain 2 0 0 Hz 2 0 ASR integral limit 400 40 00 12 00 0 500 sec 0 300 sec ASR switching frequency
82. be selected This function has no effect on the LCD operator JVOP 160 OY iaMonitor Display when the Power Supply is Turned ON 01 02 The parameter 01 02 selects the monitor item U1 LILT which is to be displayed in the first line on the Digi tal Operator when the power supply is turned ON Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units 01 03 Parameter 01 03 sets the display units of some frequency speed related parameters on the Digital Operator The setting in 01 03 affects the display units of the following monitor items U1 01 Frequency Reference U1 02 Output Frequency U1 05 Motor Speed 6 64 U1 20 Output Frequency after Soft Start e dl 01 to d1 17 Frequency references Display in Hz Set 01 03 to 0 to change the display unit of the above mentioned parameters to Hz Display in Set 01 03 to 1 to change the display unit for the above mentioned parameters to related to the maximal frequency speed set in parameter E1 04 Display in rpm Set 01 03 to the number of poles of the used motor to display the mentioned parameters in rpm Display in m s Set 01 03 to 3 to enable the display in m s The inverter uses the parameters S3 13 traction sheave diameter S3 14 roping ratio and S3 15 gear ratio to calculate the m s display To achieve an accurate display value these parameters must be set accurately ilChanging the Units for Frequency Parameters Related to V f se
83. built in Control power is supplied internally from the DC bus at all inverter models Fig 2 4 Main Circuit Terminal Connections 2 11 Wiring the Main Circuits This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs BWiring Main Circuit Inputs Consider the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input Installing Fuses 2 To protect the inverter it is recommended to use semiconductor fuses like they are shown in the table below Table 2 6 Input Fuses Rated Fuse Selection Selection Example FERRAZ nore Meena Voltage V Current A 12t A2s Model Rating Pt A s 23P7 21 240 30 82 220 A60Q30 2 600V 30A 132 25P5 25 240 40 220 610 A50P50 4 500V 50A 250 27P5 40 240 60 290 1300 ASOP80 4 500V 80A 640 2011 52 240 80 450 5000 ASOP80 4 500V 80A 640 2015 68 240 100 1200 7200 A50P125 4 500V 125A 1600 2018 96 240 130 1800 7200 A50P150 4 500V 150A 2200 2022 115 240 150 870 16200 A50P150 4 500V 150A 2200 2030 156 240 180 1500 23000 A50P200 4 500V 200A 4000 2037 176 240 240 2100 19000 A50P250 4 500V 250A 6200 2045 220 240 300 2700 55000 A50P300 4 500V 300A 9000 2055 269 240 350 4000 55000 A50P350 4 500V 350A 12000 43P7 10 2 480 15 34 72 A60Q20 2 600V 20A 4l 44P0 132 480 20 50 570 A60Q30 2 600V 30A 132 45P5 17 480 25 100 570 A60Q30 2 600V 30A 132 47P5 22 480 30 100 640 A
84. change the parameters recklessly To ensure a safe operation with PM motors always set the correct motor data the PG open detection parameters the speed deviation detection parameters the over acceleration detection parameters Wrong parameter settings can cause dangerous behavior or motor and inverter damage CAUTION If a permanent magnet motor is used the peak current capability of the motor should always be higher than the maximum inverter output current in order to prevent a demagnetization of the motor Refer to page 4 2 Start Up for details about the correct start up procedure B7 Notes The Varispeed L7 frequency inverters are certified to CE UL and c UL M Emc Compatibility B1 Introduction This manual was compiled to help system manufacturers using Omron Yaskawa Motion Control frequency inverters to design and install electrical switch gear It also describes the measures necessary to comply with the EMC Directive The manuals installation and wiring instructions must therefore be followed Our products are tested by authorized bodies using the standards listed below EN 61800 3 2004 B2 Measures to Ensure Conformity of Omron Yaskawa Motion Control Frequency inverters to the EMC Directive Omron Yaskawa Motion Control frequency inverters do not necessarily have to be installed in a switch cabi net It is not possible to give detailed instructions for all o
85. circuits other circuits by protective separation but only with basic insulation These circuits must not be interconnected with any circuits which are accessible unless they are isolated from accessible circuits by supplemental insulation SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage circuits have no direct connection to the primary power and are supplied by a transformer or equivalent isolating device The circuits are designed and protected so that under normal and single fault condition its voltage does not exceed a safe value See IEC 61010 Y P e IMPORTANT 1 Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below SC SC SC BB V A1 AC M5 M6 MA MB MC E G S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 BB1 M3 M4 M1 M2 E G 2 The output current capability of the V terminal is 20 mA 3 Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with sin gle circles 4 The wiring of the digital inputs S1 to S7 and BB is shown for the connection of contacts or NPN transis tors OV common and sinking mode This is the default setting For the connection of PNP transistors or for using a 24V external power supply refer to Table 2 10 5 A DC reactor is an option only for Inverters of 18 5 KW or less Remove the short circuit bar when con necting a DC reactor
86. connector 4 Open the fan cover on the left and right sides in direction of arrows 3 and remove the fan cover from the fan LP amp Air flow direction Power wer V connector Fan cover Fig 8 1 Cooling Fan Replacement Inverters of 18 5 kW or Less Mounting the Cooling Fan 1 Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan Be sure that the air flow direction is correct see figure above 2 Connect the cables securely and place the connector and cable into the fan cover 3 Mount the fan cover on the Inverter Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Inverter heatsink 8200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More The heatsink cooling fan is attached to the top of the heatsink inside the Inverter The cooling fan s can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel Removing the Cooling Fan 1 Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan assembly 2 Remove the terminal cover Inverter cover Digital Operator LED Monitor and front cover from the Inverter 3 Remove the control PCB if necessary bracket to which the cards are mounted Remove all cables con nected to the control PCB and remove the cooling fan power connector from the fan board positioned near the top of the Inverter 4 Remove the cooling fan power connectors from the gate drive board positioned at the back of the Inverter Remove the fa
87. cuit input terminals or the control board is damaged Perform an initialization to factory defaults Cycle the Inverter power supply Replace the Inverter CPF04 Internal A D Err CPU Internal A D Converter Fault Noise or spike was on the control cir cuit input terminals or the control board is damaged Perform an initialization to factory defaults Cycle the Inverter power supply Replace the Inverter CPF05 External A D Err CPU External A D Converter Fault Noise or spike was on the control cir cuit input terminals or the control board is damaged Perform an initialization to factory defaults Cycle the Inverter power supply Replace the Inverter CPF06 Option Error Option Card Connection Fault The Option Card is not connected prop erly Turn off the power and re install the Option Card again The Inverter or Option Card is dam aged Replace the Option Card or the Inverter ASIC Internal RAM fault Cycle the Inverter power supply The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPF08 WAT Err Watchdog Timer Fault Cycle the Inverter power supply The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPF09 CPU Err CPU ASIC Mutual Diagnosis Fault Cycle the Inverter power supply The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPF10 ASIC Err ASIC version fault The contro
88. detection selection F1 19 DVA detection selection F1 21 Absolute encoder resolution F1 22 Magnet position offset F1 24 PGO detection Level at stop gt gt S el Sl el ef el el eS m iDetecting PG Open Circuit During Run F1 02 and F1 14 Parameter F1 02 selects the stopping method when a PG disconnection is detected PG open PGO is detected only when the inverter is running at least with a frequency reference higher than 196 of the maximum output frequency or above the minimum frequency E1 09 and the PG feedback signal is missing for the time set in F1 14 or longer iDetecting Motor Overspeed F1 03 F1 08 and F1 09 An overspeed OS is detected when the motor speed continues to exceed the set frequency value in F1 08 for a time longer than set in F1 09 After detecting an overspeed OS the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1 03 Detecting a Speed Deviation between the Motor and Speed Reference F1 04 F1 10 and F1 11 A speed deviation fault is detected when the speed deviation 1 e the difference between the speed reference and the actual motor speed is too large Speed deviation DEV is detected only after a speed agreement speed reference and actual motor speed are within the setting range of L4 02 and if a speed deviation higher than the set value in F1 10 continues for longer than the time set in F1 11 After a speed deviation is detected the Inverter stops
89. equal to the no load current set in parameter E2 03 Related Parameters Parameter No Change during Operation Factory Setting Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector d6 03 Field forcing selection A A d6 06 Field forcing limit 6 38 A A Adjusting the DC Injection Current The DC current injection is used in V f and Open Loop Vector Control in order to hold the motor when the brake is opened or closed iRelated Parameters Control Methods Change during Operation Closed Loop Vector PM Parameter Factory No Setting Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector 81 02 DC injection current level at start 50 No A S1 03 DC injection current level at stop 50 No A S1 17 DC injection gain at stop in regenerative operation 100 A A S1 18 DC injection gain at stop in motoring operation 20 Adjusting the DC Injection Current Levels S1 02 03 Two different DC injection current levels can be set to start and stop Increase the corresponding set value when the holding torque during brake open or brake close is too low Decrease the corresponding set value when the holding torque is enough but e g the DC injection noise is too loud Adjusting the DC Injection Gains for Stop S1 17 18 In Open Loop Vector control two different DC injection current gains for motoring and regenerative
90. high voltages Do not remove the digital operator while the mains supply 1s switched on The printed circuit board must also not be touched while the inverter is connected to the power Never connect general LC RC interference suppression filters capacitors or overvoltage protection devices to the inverter input or output To avoid unnecessary over current faults etc being displayed the signaling contacts of any contac tor or switch fitted between inverter and motor must be integrated into the inverter control logic e g baseblock This is absolutely imperative This manual must be read thoroughly before connecting and operating the inverter All safety pre cautions and instructions for use must be followed The inverter must be operated with the appropriate line filters following the installation instructions in this manual and with all covers closed and terminals covered Only then will adequate protection be provided Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual VII 1 Safety Precautions and Instructions B1 General Please read these safety precautions and instructions for use thoroughly before installing and operating this inverter Also read all of the warning signs on the inverter and ensure they are never dama
91. input 5 S7 is ON The unit is set in 01 03 frequency units of reference setting and monitor Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output Cannot be output Control Methods Closed Loop Vector Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register 5 55 5 56 Name Display Output terminal Status Output Term Sts Description Shows output ON OFF status UtMz otrdi T E 1 Multi function contact output 1 M1 M2 is ON 1 Multi function contact output 2 M3 M4 is ON 1 Multi function L contact output 3 M5 M6 is ON Not used Always 0 1 Error output MA MB MC is ON Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output Cannot be output Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Operation status Int Ctl Sts 1 Inverter operating status U1 122 1 111 T Run L_ 1 Zero speed L 1 Reverse L 1 Reset signal input Speed agree Inverter ready Minor fault Major fault Cannot be output Cumulative operation time Elapsed Time Monitors the total operating time of the Inverter The initial value and the operat ing time power ON time selec tion can be set in 02 07 and o2 08 Cannot be output Software No
92. is operation a large inrush current will be created and the inverter s over current protection may operate iGround Wiring The following precautions should be considered for the ground connection Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Q and that of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Q Ground wires should not be shared with other devices such as welding machines or power tools A ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment must be used The length of the ground wire should be as low as possible Leakage current flows through the Inverter Therefore if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable When more than one Inverter is used the ground wires should not be looped O X OK NO Fig 2 6 Ground Wiring 2 14 i Connecting a Braking Resistor and Braking Unit CDBR A Braking Resistor and Braking Unit can be connected to the Inverter like shown in the Fig 2 7 To prevent overheating of the braking unit braking resistor the inverter operation should be stopped when the overload contacts are operated 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 3 7 to 18 5 kW Output Capacity Braking Resistor Thermal over Inverter load relay c
93. jueuiuoege eos asnjejouawou 104 3in2uro dojs AioBajeo xsu YIM JOHSAU OV B ZLT HINIO s Iepoiw JeyueAu OV J9j19Auo2 JOMOd 2ne1s ONPOld AB uone synie2 EELZZ sa1 Asojoe4 NVdVf vc8 eyonyn iuseunynA 1uoreAnullusiN L EL Z jue d 19yi9Au uoneJodjo2 2129 3 EMEYSEA 9j821JIJ92 JO 1 PJOH 900 42Z 90 9001Z ON Jalvoildildid 5 eowieg jonpoid ALVIIILYAD 225 P IEIRR EPA ub rj m v 4 R4 e A gt 4 xj m Es ix MIELE EREE EU Aueuuag uayoUNY GEOR G9 essensije pig aljalssalzyEZ Hquig ears 12npog ANS ANL 40 z bed 0Zdl u 00d 0 Sunes di d MASS 990 MAS SYO MALE 4 0 MAO 0 0 MAZZ ZZO NOIS 8L 810 MAS 910 MALL iLO MAS L SdL MASS SdS MA0 Ode MAZ E dE nd no Jojow ajqealddy J deEA00r v 2eEN00Z c e8eyo pay a jonpoud emeyse 104 g Ag 1033009 uogow emeySeA NOMIAO 19npoud QIAO 104 Z epoo JaWO SND 5 weu Seles 3 g s p n YWID V 3 3 a 2 8 v m 7 gt A INID adh yonpold jo einje oueuloN 900 Zcc 90 90 OLZ 91e5148 0 jueuigoegn v BANAS jonpoud ans 222 ALVIIILYAD UA P NISILYIZ pa W o m v Er x e 5 A gt XJ m E oO gt c e xj m ES rJ E Auewsa uau2un N 6EE08 G9 essensja pig ejjeisje zunie7 Hquig aaIAlag 19npojg ONS ANL N m 9 Jo abed 6Z Xe4 g Z2 L6 6 680 uojaja 5 gooz Ainr oz uayounW 6
94. kW and larger Replace the cooling fan s RR DynBrk Transistr Dynamic Braking Transistor The built in dynamic braking transistor failed Defective or failed dynamic braking resistor caused braking transistor dam age Cycle power to the Inverter Replace the Inverter OLI Motor Overload Motor Overload Detected when L1 01 is set to 1 2 or3 and the Inverter s output current exceeded the motor overload curve The overload curve is adjustable using parameter E2 01 Motor Rated Cur rent L1 01 Motor Protection Selec tion and L2 02 Motor Protection Time Constant The load is too large The acceleration time deceleration time or cycle time are too short Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the accel decel times C1 00 The voltage settings of the V f pattern is incorrect Check the V f characteristics E1 OD The setting of Motor Rated Current E2 01 is incorrect Check the setting of Motor Rated Current Setting E2 01 OL2 Inv Overload Inverter Overload The Inverter output current exceeded the Inverter s overload capability The load is too large The acceleration time or deceleration times are too short Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the accel decel times C1 00 The voltage settings of the V f pattern is incorrect Check the V f characteristics E1 OD The size of the Inverter i
95. leveling distance If the speed reference is higher than 40 but lower than the nominal speed the speed is decreased to t 40 first is hold for a calculated time an then decreased to the leveling speed Advanced short floor operation which can be enabled by setting S3 01 2 If the leveling speed command is set the inverter calculates the optimal speed using the speed reference two gain factors S3 21 22 and a time constant S3 20 If the leveling input is set before the optimal speed has been reached the inverter accelerates to the optimal speed and keeps it for the time constant S3 20 If the leveling input is set when the optimal speed was exceeded the inverter keeps the reached speed for a certain time before it decelerates to the leveling speed The table below shows the behavior of the short floor functions under different conditions Condition Standard Short Floor Advanced Short Floor Leveling Signal before 40 of the nominal speed Leveling speed signal before Vo is reached has been reached P V Nominal Nominal VLeveing 7 V Leveling out Leveling Leveling command command Leveling Signal after 4096 of the nominal speed has Leveling speed signal after V has been reached been reached During Acceleration v V Nomina Nominal Von Vioninai X Optimal speed profile AL 82 20 calculated V Leveing V Leveling out Leveling Leveling command command
96. method selection 0 C6 11 Carrier frequency for PM motor control 4 d1 01 Frequency reference 1 0 00 Hz d1 02 Frequency reference 2 0 00 Hz d1 03 Frequency reference 3 0 00 Hz dl 04 Frequency reference 4 0 00 Hz d1 05 Frequency reference 5 0 00 Hz dl 06 Frequency reference 6 0 00 Hz d1 07 Frequency reference 7 0 00 Hz d1 08 Frequency reference 8 0 00 Hz d1 09 Frequency reference 9 Vn 50 00 Hz d1 10 Frequency reference 10 V 0 00 Hz dl 11 Frequency reference 11 V3 0 00 Hz d1 12 Frequency reference 12 V3 0 00 Hz d1 13 Frequency reference 13 V 0 00 Hz dl 14 Frequency reference 14 Inspection 25 Hz dl 17 Jog frequency reference Leveling speed 4 00 Hz d1 18 Speed priority selection 1 d1 19 Second motor speed 0 00 Hz d6 03 Field forcing function selection 0 d6 06 Field forcing function Limit 400 E1 01 Input voltage setting t E1 04 Max output frequency FMAX 50 0 Hz E1 05 Max output voltage VMAX R E1 06 Base frequency FA 50 0 Hz E1 07 Mid output frequency FB E1 08 Mid output frequency voltage VB t E1 09 Min output frequency FMIN E1 10 Min output frequency voltage VMIN t E1 13 Base voltage VBASE 0 0 V E2 01 Motor rated current E2 02 Motor rated slip ig E2 03 Motor no load current E2 04 Number of motor poles 4 poles E2 05 Motor line to line resistance E2 06 Motor leak inductance Factory
97. monitor parameter frequency reference will be displayed when power is turned ON The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in 01 02 Monitor Selection after Power Up J U2 01 OC Over Current Rdy U2 02 OV DC Bus Overvolt Rdy U3 01 OC Over Current Rdy U3 027 OV DC Bus Overvolt 3 8 Quick Programming Mode In quick programming mode the basic parameters required for the elevator operation like speeds acceleration deceleration times etc can be monitored and set The parameters can be changed from the setting displays Use the Increment Decrement and Shift RESET keys to change the frequency The parameter is written and the display returns to the monitor display when the DATA ENTER key is pressed Refer to page 5 4 User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode for details iExample Operations Example key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure Mode Selection Display DRIVE Main Menu Operation QUICK Main Menu Quick Setting ADV Main Menu Programming VERIFY Main Menu Modified Consts KTUNE Main Menu Auto Tuning Monitor Display Setting Display 1 Control Method A1 02 0 0 Vit control QUICK Control Method oO mg 1 50sec 0
98. motor exci ACR d axis tation current 10 V 100 0 to 10 V possible OPE fault Shows the first parameter num parameter ber when an OPE fault is Cannot be output OPE Detected detected Zero servo Shows the number of PG pulses movement of the movement range when pulses Zero servo was activated The Cannot be output Zero Servo shown value is the actual pulse Pulse number times 4 Cooling fan Monitors the total operating operating time time of the cooling fan The FAN Elapsed time can be set in Time 02 10 Cannot be output Inverter Heat Shows the inverter heatsink sink Tempera temperature measured by the ture IGBT thermal protection sen Actual Fin Temp SOf Cannot be output 5 5 Name Display ASR output without filter ASR Out w o Fil Description Monitors the output from the speed control loop i e the pri mary filter input value 100 is displayed for rated second ary current of the motor Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output 10 V Rated secondary cur rent of motor 10 V to 10 V Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Feed forward control output FF Cout Output Monitors the output from feed forward control 100 is dis played for rated secondary cur rent of the motor 10 V Rated s
99. n9 EPM Motor Adjustment 1 n8 Con stant Number Name Display Automatic Current Regulator q axis P gain ACR q gain Description Sets the proportional gain for the q axis current regulator ACR Setting Range Factory Setting Contro Open Loop Vector Methods Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM Automatic Current Regulator q axis integral time ACR q Itime Sets the integral time for the q axis current regulator ACR 10 0 ms Automatic Current Regulator d axis P gain ACR d gain Sets the proportional gain for d axis current regulator ACR Automatic Current Regulator q axis integral time ACR d Itime Sets the integral time for the d axis current regulator ACR 10 0 ms Magnet position detection method Mag det sel Sets the magnet position detec tion method 0 Estimate method 4 Hiperface detection 5 EnDat detection Inductance mea surement current level Induct Meas Lev Sets the current which is used for the inductance measurement dur ing rotating auto tuning The value is set in of the motor rated current EPM Motor Adjustment 2 n9 A D conversion start delay timer AD DelayT Start Sets the A D conversion delay time i oleae B Name Display iMMonitor Selections o1 Description Setting Range Digital Operator LED Monitor Param
100. necessary to use a braking option braking resistor braking resistor unit or braking unit Output volt age limit operation selection Output V limit Sel 5 14 0 Disabled 1 Enabled The motor flux will be lowered automatically when the output voltage become saturated Name Display Torque compen sation gain Torq Comp Gain iTorque Compensation C4 Description Sets the torque compensation gain Usually changing this setting is not necessary Adjust it under the following circumstances When the cable is long increase the set value When the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity Max applicable motor capacity increase the set values When the motor is oscillat ing decrease the set values Adjust the torque compensation gain so that at minimum speed the output current does not exceed the Inverter rated output current Do not change the torque com pensation gain from its default 1 00 when using Open Loop Vector control Factory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector MEMO BUS Register Torque compen sation delay time constant Torq Comp Time The torque compensation delay time is set in ms units Usually changing this setting is not necessary Adjust it under the following circumstances When the motor is oscillat ing increase the set values When the responsivene
101. operation can be adjusted in order to improve the stopping behavior The gains are related to the S1 03 set value The 6 function can be used to equalize jerk effects if the DC injection is too low with motoring load and too high RED with regenerative load The load condition regenerative or motoring is detected when the inverter is running at another speed than the leveling speed If the DC injection is ok with motoring load but not with regenerative load adjust parameter S1 17 Ifthe DC injection is ok with regenerative load but not with motoring load adjust parameter S1 18 6 39 1 Protective Functions Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the inverter out put frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor 1s operating at a constant speed Stall prevention during operation can be enabled in V f control only If the Inverter output current continues to exceed the setting in parameter L3 06 for 100 ms or longer the motor speed is reduced Enable or disable the stall prevention using parameter L3 05 Set the according deceleration times using C1 02 Deceleration time 1 or C1 04 Deceleration Time 2 If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3 06 2 the motor will accelerate again to the set fre quency iRelated Parameters Con
102. operation until the time S1 04 S1 06 has elapsed if 81 06 lt S1 04 or the time S1 06 has elapsed if 1 06 gt S1 04 try to avoid this setting since the motor could be driven against the brake The speed is increased to the selected speed and is kept constant until the leveling speed is selected The speed is decreased to the leveling speed and is kept constant until the stop signal is given depending on d1 18 either by removing the direction signal by removing the leveling signal or by deleting the speed inputs see page 6 5 Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs The speed is decreased to the zero speed level When the zero speed level is reached S1 01 the DC injection Open Loop or zero servo operation position lock in Closed Loop is applied for the time set in S1 05 When the brake close delay time S1 07 has elapsed the brake open command is removed The inverter continues DC Injection Open Loop or zero speed operation Closed Loop until the time 1 06 1 07 has elapsed After that the inverter output is shut down and the hardware base block signal must be set After the output contactor open delay time S1 19 has elapsed the output contactor close signal is removed 6 14 iBrake Sequence with Torque Compensation at Start Closed Loop Vector for IM and PM only Torque Compensation function If a load measuring device is installed in the elevator an analog input can be used
103. or a DCCT is defective The output contactor was opened when the inverter output was still active Corrective Actions Remove the motor and run the Inverter without the motor Check the motor for a phase to ground short Check the output current with a clampmeter to verify the DCCT reading Check the control sequence for wrong motor contactor signals OC Over Current Overcurrent The Inverter s output current exceeded the overcurrent detection level Shorted Inverter output phase to phase shorted motor locked rotor too heavy load accel decel time too short contac tor on the Inverter output has opened or closed a special motor or a motor with a rated current larger than the Inverter s output current is used Remove the motor and run the Inverter without the motor Check the motor for a phase to phase short Verify the accel decel times c1 00 Check the Inverter for a phase to phase short at the output PUF DC Bus Fuse Open DC Bus Fuse blown The fuse in the main circuit is open Warning Never run the Inverter after replacing the DC bus fuse without checking for shorted components Shorted output transistor s or terminals Check the motor and the motor cables for short circuits or insula tion failures phase to phase Replace the inverter after correct ing the fault Display OV DC Bus Overvolt Table 7 1 Resetable Faults
104. parameter is automatically set dur ing autotuning Control Methods Name Closed Loop Vector PM Setting Factory Open Closed Range Setting Loop Loop Vector Vector Description Display Motor rated output Sets the rated output power of the power motor This parameter is an input data for auto tuning Mtr Rated Power Motor rated output power Sets the rated output power of the motor Rated Power Rated Motor Cur rent Sets the rated motor current Rated Current Number of motor poles Sets the motor pole number Number of poles Motor terminal resistance Sets the motor line to line resistance Term resistance d Axis Inductance 7 Sets the D axis inductance d ax inductance q Axis Inductance Sets the Q axis inductance q ax inductance Motor voltage con stant Sets the voltage constant of the motor Voltage constant PG constant Sets the number of PG pulses per revo lution PG Pulses Rev i 0 Phase A leads with forward run com PG rotation mand Phase B leads with reverse run command 1 Phase B leads with forward run com PG Rotation Sel mand Phase A leads with reverse run command Set to enable or disable the motor over load protection function using the elec tronic thermal relay 0 Disabled 1 Protection for general purpose motor fan cooled
105. power Usually changing this setting is not necessary The value can be adjusted if there is e g a great torque loss due to heavy friction in the machine The output torque will be compensated for the set mechanical loss Motor iron loss for torque com pensation Tcomp Iron Loss Sets motor iron losses Control Methods Name Closed Loop Vector PM Setting Factory Open Closed Range Setting Loop Loop Vector Vector Description Display Motor rated output power Mtr Rated Power Sets the rated output power of the motor This parameter is an input data for autotuning Motor iron saturation coefficient 3 This parameter is automatically set Saturation during rotating autotuning Comp3 The setting range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter s rated output current The given value is for a 400 V inverter with 3 7 kW 2 The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity The given value is for a 400 V inverter with 3 7 kW 3 The setting range depends on the inverter capacity and on the setting of E2 01 The maximum value is E2 01 minus 0 01A The given setting range is or a 400 V inverter with 3 7 kW EV f Pattern 2 E3 Name Change Control Methods Fac Description tory during Open Closed i Setti Opera Loop Loop Mcd AS ton Vector Vector Control mode Sets the contol mode for motor 2
106. refer ence change or not when the Digital Operator is selected as frequency reference source 0 Enter key needed Enter key not needed If 1 is selected a frequency reference change is accepted without the need of pressing the Enter key Operation selec tion when digital operator is dis connected Oper Detection Sets the operation when the Dig ital Operator LED Monitor is disconnected 0 Operation continues even if the Digital Operator LED Monitor is disconnected 1 OPR is detected at Digital Operator LED Monitor dis connection Inverter output is switched off and the fault con tact is operated Cumulative oper ation time setting Elapsed Time Set Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units Cumulative oper ation time selec tion Elapsed Time Run 0 Accumulated inverter power on time 1 Accumulated inverter run time Name Display Fan operation time setting Description Sets the initial value of the fan operation time Fan ON Time Set The operation time is accumu lated starting from this set value Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Closed Loop Vector Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Fault trace initialize 0 No initialisation 1 Initialize zero clear after Fault Trace Init setting 1 02 12 will be returned to 0
107. rotating Tunes all motor parameters motor Tunes the basic motor parame ters TM tuning with not rotationg motor Tunes the line to line resistance IM Line to line resistance tuning only Tunes the offset between the Encoder offset tuning encoder and magnetic zero posi tion BAutotuning Modes Autotuning with Rotating Motor T1 01 0 This autotuning mode can be used in any Vector control mode After the motor nameplate data have been input the inverter will operate the motor for approximately 1 2 minutes and set the required motor parameters automatically WEN P Use this tuning mode only if the motor can rotate freely which means that the ropes must be removed e and the brake must be open The gearbox can remain connected to the motor IMPORTANT Autotuning with Not Rotating Motor T1 01 1 This autotuning mode can be used for Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control for IM only The inverter supplies power to the motor for approximately 1 minute and some of the motor parameters are set automati cally while the motor does not turn The motor no load current and the rated slip value will automatically be fine tuned during the first time operation Verify the rated slip value E2 02 and the no load current E2 03 after the first run with nominal speed Autotuning for Line to Line Resistance T1 01 2 Non rotating autotuning for line to line resistance can be used in V f control
108. simultaneously in the Inverter Each of the three option board sockets on the controller card A C and D can take up one option card like shown in Fig 2 14 Table 2 11 shows the available option cards and their specifications Table 2 11 Option Card Specifications Mounting Specifications l ocati n F i 2 PG B2 Two phase phase A and B 12V inputs max response frequency 50 kHz PG speed control cards Three phase phase A B Z line driver inputs ee RS422 max response frequency 300 kHz PG F2 Hiperface or EnDat 2 1 interface card 3G3RV PDRT2 Intelligent DeviceNet option card SI P1 Option card for Profibus DP fieldbus SI RI Option card for InterBus S fieldbus SI S1 Option card for CANOpen fieldbus S1 J Option card for LONworks 3G3RV P10ST8 E PLC option card PLC option card z La p 3G3RV P10ST8 DRT E PLC option card with DeviceNet communications port Slave Communications cards 3 Channel analog input card Analog Input card Signal level 10 to 10 V or 0 to 10V Resolution 13 Bit sign 2 channel analog output card Signal level 0 to 10 V Resolution 8 Bit Analog Output Cards 2 channel high resolution analog output card Signal level 10 to 10 V Resolution 11 Bit sign 6 channel digital output card for monitoring the Digital Output Cards inverter status fault zero speed running etc 2 channel relay contact output Installa
109. slip slip This set value will become the refer ence value for the slip compensation Motor Rated This parameter is automatically set Slip during autotuning Motor no load current No Load Current Sets the motor no load current This parameter is automatically set during autotuning Number of motor poles Sets the number of motor poles This value is an input data for autotun ing Number of Poles Motor line to line resis Sets the motor phase to phase resis tance This parameter is automatically set during autotuning tance Term Resis tance Motor leak Sets the voltage drop due to motor inductance leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage Leak Induc This parameter is automatically set tance during autotuning Motor rated power Mtr Rated Power Sets the motor rated power The setting range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter s rated output current The given value is for a 400 V inverter with 3 7 kW 2 The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity The given value is for a 400 V inverter with 3 7 kW 3 The setting range depends on the inverter capacity and on the setting of E2 01 The maximum value is E2 01 minus 0 01A The given setting range is for a 400 V inverter with 3 7 kW 5 24 EPM Motor Setup E5 Name Control Methods J TT Closed MEMO Setting Factory Open
110. soft starter starter This frequency value does not 10 V Max frequency include compensations such as 0 to 10 V possible SFS Output slip compensation The unit is set in o1 03 ASR input Monitors the input to the speed control loop 10 V Max frequency The maximum frequency corre 0 to 10 V possible sponds to 10095 ASR Input Monitors the output from the speed control loop The maximum frequency corre sponds to 100 ASR output 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible ASR output DI 16H2 input Monitors the reference value from a DI 16H2 Digital Refer ence Card The value will be displayed in DI 16 Reference binary or BCD depending on user constant F3 01 status Cannot be output Output voltage Monitors the Inverter internal reference Vq voltage reference for motor sec Voltage Ref Vq ondary current control 10 V 200 VAC 400 VAC 0 to 10 V possible Output voltage i ae Monto the metre Tyo y 209 vac 40 VAC 0 to 10 V possible Voltage Ref Vd excitation current control Software No CPU Manufacturer s CPU software No Cannot be output CPU ID ACR output of q i axis Monitors the current contro 10 V 10094 output value for the motor sec p ACR q ondary current 0 to 10 V possible Output ACR output ofd Monitors the current control axis output value for the
111. speed Sets the frequency reference when the nominal speed is selected by a digital input Nomin Speed vn 5 18 Control Methods Fac Closed Description tory Display Setting Name Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Loop Vector PM Intermediate speed 1 Sets the frequency reference when the intermediate speed 1 is selected by a digital input Interm Speed v1 Intermediate speed 2 Sets the frequency reference when the intermediate speed 2 is selected by a digital input Interm Speed v2 Intermediate speed 3 Sets the frequency reference when the intermediate speed 3 is selected by a digital input Interm Speed v3 Releveling speed Sets the frequency reference when the releveling speed is RelevelSpeed Selected by a digital input Vr Inspection speed Sets the frequency reference when the inspection speed is selected by a digital input Inspect Speed vi Rescue Opera tion Speed Sets the frequency reference when rescue operation is enabled by a digital input Rescue OP Spd Leveling Speed Sets the frequency reference when the leveling speed is selected by a digital input Level Speed vl Speed reference priority selection Speed priority 0 Use Multi Speed reference d1 01 to d1 08 1 High Speed reference has pri ority 2 Leveling speed referenc
112. the brake The output is closed when the brake shall be opened Refer also to page 6 13 Brake Sequence iMotor Contactor Control Command Setting 41 This output can be used to control the motor contactors The output 1s closed when the contactors shall be closed Refer also to page 6 13 Brake Sequence i Cooling Fan Running Setting 38 This output can be used to indicate the inverters heatsink cooling fan operation The output is on if the cooling fan s is are on 6 iSpeed Detection at deceleration Door Zone Setting 42 NENNEN This output can be used to detect if the car is in the door zone The detection is speed dependent V f control and Open Loop Vector control Closed Loop Vector control The output frequency is lower than S1 27 during The motor speed is lower than S1 27 during deceler deceleration ation The output frequency is higher than S1 27 during The motor speed is higher than S1 27 during deceler deceleration ation If the Up Down command is released this output is switched OFF BNot Zero Speed Setting 43 This function can be used for indicating the inverse condition of the Zero speed status OFF The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level ON The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level Light Load Search End Setting 44 45 Refer to page 6 80 Light Load Direction Detection iBase Block Monitor 1 and 2 Setting 46 47 If a multifunction output is program
113. to input a torque compensa tion value to the inverter This function requires Closed Loop Vector control for IM or PM The input torque compensation value is latched when the direction command is given At the start it is increased from zero to the latched value using the torque increase time set in parameter S1 22 The torque compensation value fades out to 0 using the time constant S1 30 after the speed has reached the torque com pensation fade out level The torque compensation function can be adjusted using the parameters shown in the block diagram below Adjust the parameter so that the torque compensation value is zero when the elevator is balanced Torque compensation bias during raising 1 24 terminal A1 UP H3 16 7 H3 15 1 Y direction torque e J3 Torque compensation compensation H3 17 123 gt 0 10v DOWN Torque compensation gain direction during lowering 1 25 Torque compensation bias during lowering The torque compensation input source can be selected as follows e the analog input A1 can be used if b1 01 is not set to 1 speed reference source is not the A1 input and the A1 function is selected for torque compensation H3 15 1 e the channel Ch1 of an AI 14B option card can be used if b1 01 is not set to 1 speed reference source is not the Al input and the A1 function is selected for torque
114. units Decel time switch ing frequency Acc Dec SW Freq Sets the frequency for automatic acceleration deceleration switching If the output frequency is below the set frequency Accel decel time 4 If the output frequency is above the set frequency Accel decel time 1 The setting range for acceleration deceleration times depends on the setting of C1 10 If C1 10 is set to 1 the setting range for acceleration deceleration imes becomes 0 0 to 6000 0 seconds 5 12 B S Curve Acceleration Deceleration C2 Control Methods Fac Closed MEMO Description tory Display Setting Name Open Closed BUS Loop Loop Leap Regist Vector Vector po seal PM S curve char acteristic time at accelera tion start S Crv Acc Start S curve char Set the S curve times at speed changes to reduce the jerk The S curves can be set separately for every kind of speed change acteristic time at accelera tion end S Crv Acc End S curve char acteristic time at decelera tion start S Crv Dec Taccel ceo C1 01 Start Tdecel 299 c1 02 S curve char 2 acteristic time at decelera When the S curve characteristic time is tion end set the accel decel times will increase by only half of the S curve characteristic times at start and end S Crv Dec End S curve Char acteristic time below
115. up in Verify Mode A TUNE Lights up in Autotuning Mode Keys Execute operations such as setting parameters moni toring jogging and autotuning Fig 3 2 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions Digital Operator Keys The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Key Functions Key LOCAL md LOCAL REMOTE Key REMOTE Function Switches between operation via the Digital Operator LOCAL and the settings in b1 01 and b1 02 REMOTE This key can be enabled or disabled by setting parameter 02 01 MENU Key Selects menu items modes ESC Key Returns to the status before the DATA ENTER key was pressed JOG Key Starts jog operation when the inverter is operated by the Digital Operator and d1 18 is set to 0 Function Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is oper FWDIREY iey ated by the Digital Operator Sets the active digit when programming parameters SHUURESE TE EY Also acts as the Reset key when a fault has occurred Selects menu items sets parameter numbers and increments set val Increment Key ues Used to move to the next item or data Selects menu items sets parameter numbers and decrements set val Decrement Key ues Used to move to the previous item or data DATA ENTER Key Enters menus and parameters and set validates parameter changes Starts the Inverter op
116. 0 ESC ESC MENU VERIFY Main Menu Modified Consts The constant number will be displayed if a None Modified 4 constant has been changed Press the DATA ENTER key to enable the change ATUNE Main Menu Auto Tuning A TUNE 2 Tuning Mode Sel T1 012 0 Standard Tuning o Fig 3 4 Mode Transitions To run the inverter after viewing changing parameters press the MENU key and the DATA ENTER key in A sequence to enter the Drive mode A Run command is not accepted as long as the drive is in any other INFO mode To enable Run commands from the terminals during programming set parameter b1 08 to 1 Drive Mode In the Drive mode the Inverter can be operated All monitor parameters U1 LI1L1 fault informations and the fault history can be displayed in this mode When b1 01 Reference selection is set to 0 1 or 3 the selected frequency reference value d1 LILT can be changed from the frequency setting display using the Increment Decrement Shift RESET and Enter keys After confirming the change by pressing the ENTER key the display returns to the Monitor display iExample Operations Example key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure oe During Running eq uency Rel 50 00Hz Mode Selection Display Monitor Display J Frequency Setting Display DRIVE Y
117. 0 and H2 01 to H2 03 output terminals M1 M2 M3 M4 and M5 M6 function selection to 1F motor overload OL1 pre alarm the motor overload pre alarm will be output at the selected terminals If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum 90 of the overload detection level the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON 6 45 Output Current Observation The inverter can observe the output current and thereby detect e g a wrong motor contactor sequence or bad motor connection There are two observation functions one for the start and one during run iRRelated Parameters Control Methods Parameter NS Factory E Open Closed iss Ne seting Operation vi oe woe Vector PM S1 14 SE2 detection time 200 ms No A A A S1 15 SE3 detection time 200 ms No A A A SE2 fault SE2 Current observation at start The current is measured for the time 81 06 S1 14 Brake open delay plus SE2 detection time after the Up Down command input If it is falls below 25 of the motor no load current E2 03 a SE2 fault is output 81 06 S1 14 must be smaller than 1 04 DC injection at start SE3 fault SE3 Current observation during Run When the acceleration is started DC injection Zero Speed time S1 04 after the Up Down command input the inverter observes the output current continuously If it falls below 25 of the motor no load current E2 03 a SE3 fault is output 6 Over Acceleration D
118. 05 PM motor line to line resistance E5 06 PM d axis inductance E5 07 PM q axis inductance 5 E5 09 PM voltage constant L8 02 Overheat pre alarm level M 15 02 A 0273 n5 02 A1 02 5 Motor acceleration time Motor acceleration time Parameter Number Name i Factory Setting Inverter Capacity kVA selection C6 02 Carrier frequency E2 01 E4 01 E2 02 E4 02 E2 03 E4 03 E2 05 E4 05 E2 06 E4 06 Motor rated current Motor rated slip Motor no load current Motor line to line resistance Motor leak inductance Motor iron loss for torque compen E2 10 sation E5 02 E5 03 E5 04 M motor rated power M motor rated current M number of poles E5 06 E5 07 E5 09 M d axis inductance M q axis inductance P P P E5 05 PM motor line to line resistance P P P M voltage constant L8 02 Overheat pre alarm level n5 02 A1 02 3 Motor acceleration time n5 02 A1 02 5 Motor acceleration time 5 64 Parameter Settings by Function Carrier Frequency Derating and Current Limitation 6 2 Control Brake SOquB VE essri 6 3 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics 6 20 Adjusting Analog Input Signals ssiaxaiavscacscrcscasectonsuscetavarsars 6 25 Speed Detection and Speed Limitation 6 26 Improving the O
119. 1 Verify Mode The Verify mode is used to display the parameters that have been changed from their default settings either by programming or by autotuning None will be displayed if no settings have been changed The parameter A1 02 is the only parameter from the A1 LILI group which will be displayed in the modified constant list if it has been changed before The other parameters will not be displayed even if they are differ ent from the default setting In the verify mode the same procedures as used in the programming mode can be used to change settings Use the Increment Decrement and Shift RESET keys to change a setting When the DATA ENTER key is pressed the parameter setting are written and the display returns to the Monitor display iExample Operations In the example below the following settings have been changed from their default settings 3 e C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 e C1 02 Acceleration Time 2 ES E1 01 Input Voltage Setting E2 01 Motor Rated Current Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display MENU ADV Main Menu VERIFY DRIVE Main Menu QUICK Main Menu C1 01 002 0sec 0 00 600 0 1 50sec C1 02 002 0sec 0 00 600 0 1 50sec E1 012390VAC 310 510 380VAC Fig 3 8 Operations in Verify Mode VERIFY Accel Time_1 C1 01 802 0sec 0 00 600 00 1 50sec VERIFY D
120. 1 V T2 W T3 PO NO 1 2 to 1 5 L7Z27P5 R LI S L2 T L3 41 42 BI B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 PO NO L7Z2011 R LI S L2 T L3 41 2 BI B2 U TI V T2 W T3 PO NO 16 6 to 4 L7Z2015 R LI S L2 T L3 1 42 U TI V T2 W T3 NO 4 0 to 5 0 25 4 to 2 B1 B2 PO 2 5 10 8 to 6 4 0 to 5 0 25 4 L7Z2018 R LI S L2 T L3 41 2 U TI V T2 W T3 NO 9 0 to 10 0 25 to 35 3 to 2 B1 B2 PO 2 5 10 to 16 8 to 6 4 0 to 5 0 25 4 L7Z2022 R LI S L2 T L3 41 U TI V T2 W T3 RI L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 NO 9 0 to 10 0 25 to 35 3 to 1 3 PO 4 0 to 5 0 10 to 16 8 to 4 9 0 to 10 0 25 to 35 4 to 2 L7Z2030 R L1 S L2 T L3 41 U TI V T2 W T3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 NO 9 0 to 10 0 50 1 to 1 0 3 PO 4 0 to 5 0 10 to 16 8 to 4 9 0 to 10 0 25 to 35 4 to 2 Wire Type 2 Power cables e g 600 V vinyl power cables 2 6 Inverter Model CIMR O L7Z2037 Terminal Symbol R LI S L2 T L3 41 U TI V T2 W T3 RI L11 1 L21 T1 L31 NO Terminal Screws Tightening Torque Nem 17 6 to 22 5 Possible Wire Sizes mm AWG 70 to 95 2 0 to 4 0 Recom mended Wire Size mm AWG Wire Type 3 PO 8 8 to 10 8 6 to 16 10 to 4 17 6 to 22 5 35 to 70 2 to
121. 1 02 Related Parameters Control Methods Parameter Factory Change Open Closed Closed No Name Setting UMS ve ob L pas j 3 Operation eer OOP vector Vector Vector PM b1 02 RUN command source selection 1 No Q Q Q Q Up Down Commands Using the Digital Operator b1 02 0 When b1 02 is set to 0 the Up Down command must be input using the Digital Operator keys RUN STOP and FWD REV For details on the Digital Operator refer to page 3 1 LED Monitor Digital Operator and Modes This operation can be used for test purposes only Up Down Commands Using Control Circuit Terminals b1 02 1 factory setting When b1 02 is set to 1 the Up Down command is input at the control circuit terminals S1 and S2 This is the factory setting and the most common configuration Up Down Commands Using an Input Option Card b1 02 3 When b1 02 is set to 2 the Up Down command can be set using an input option card for example a field bus communications card 6 Speed Reference Source Selection ilSpeed Reference Source Selection The speed reference source can be selected using parameter b1 01 Related Parameters Change Control Methods Parameter Name Factory during Open Closed an No Setting Opera v f Loop Loop ee tion Vector Vector PM b1 01 Frequency reference source selection 0 No Q Q Q Q Input the Speed Reference fro
122. 1 02 3 Motor acceleration time n5 02 A1 02 5 Motor acceleration time Parameter Number Name i Factory Setting Inverter Capacity kVA selection C6 02 Carrier frequency E2 01 E4 01 E2 02 E4 02 E2 03 E4 03 E2 05 E4 05 E2 06 E4 06 Motor rated current Motor rated slip Motor no load current Motor line to line resistance Motor leak inductance Motor i loss for t E2 10 otor iron loss for torque compen sation E5 02 E5 03 E5 04 M motor rated power M motor rated current M number of poles E5 06 E5 07 E5 09 M d axis inductance M q axis inductance P P P E5 05 PM motor line to line resistance P P P M voltage constant L8 02 Overheat pre alarm level n5 02 A1 02 3 Motor acceleration time n5 02 A1 02 5 Motor acceleration time 5 63 8400 V Class Inverters Parameter Number Name i Factory Setting Inverter Capacity kW l z E 02 04 kVA selection C6 02 Carrier frequency E2 01 E4 01 Motor rated current E2 02 E4 02 Motor rated slip E2 03 E4 03 Motor no load current E2 05 E4 05 Motor line to line resistance E2 06 i E4 06 Motor leak inductance E2 10 Motor iron loss for torque compen sation E5 02 PM motor rated power E5 03 PM motor rated current E5 04 PM number of poles E5
123. 1 05 can be used to change the encoder signal direction if it is wrong f F1 05 is set to 0 the inverter expects channel A to lead 90 before channel B Sin channel leads 90 before Cos channel on PG F2 card if a forward command is applied FWD means counterclockwise rota tion seen from the shaft side f F1 05 is set to 1 the inverter expects channel B to lead 90 before channel B Cos channel leads 90 before Sin channel on PG F2 card if a forward command is applied 1 a P If Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors is used an encoder offset autotuning must be per e formed if parameter F1 05 is changed IMPORTANT li Setting PG Pulse Monitor Output Division Ratio F1 06 This function is enabled only when a PG B2 speed feedback card 1s used Set the division ratio for the PG pulse monitor output The set value 1s expressed as n for the higher place digit and m for the two lower place digits The dividing ratio is calculated as follows Dividing ratio 1 n m Setting range n 0 or 1 m 1 to 32 Li o0 F1 06 gt wm The division ratio can be set within the following range 1 32 lt F1 06 lt 1 For example if the division ratio is 1 2 set value 2 half of the number of pulses from the PG are output at the pulse monitor ESetting Number of Gear Teeth Between PG and Motor F1 12 and F1 13 If there are gears between the motor and PG the gear ratio can be set using F1 12 and F1 13 6 When the number of gear t
124. 1 18 0 3 If d1 18 2 0 8 preset speed steps defined in the parameters d1 01 to d1 08 can be selected using 3 binary coded digital inputs The Up Down command starts the inverter It stops when the Up Down command is removed If d1 18 2 3 7 preset speed steps defined in the parameters d1 02 to d1 08 can be selected using 3 binary coded digital inputs The Up Down command starts the inverter It is stopped when the Up Down command is removed or when no speed is selected all D Is off Related Parameters Control Methods Change during Operation Closed Loop Vector PM Parameter Factory No Setting Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector 0 00 Hz A A Multi Step speed 1 to 8 reference value 0 00 A Terminal person Set Value Details Number S4 H1 02 Multi step speed command 1 S5 H1 03 Multi step speed command 2 S6 H1 04 Multi step speed command 3 Speed Selection Table The following table shows the combinations of the digital input and the according speed If b1 02 is set to 1 speed 1 is input as analog reference at terminal Al or Channel CH1 of an analog input option card AI 14B if it is installed If an AI 14B option card is used and the functions for channel CH2 and CH3 are set to Auxiliary Frequency 2 H3 05 09 2 and Auxiliary Frequency 3 H3 05 09 3 Command 1 Multi step Speed Multi step Speed Command 2 Multi s
125. 2 T L3 41 U TI V T2 50 9 0 to 10 0 W T3 RI L11 SI L21 TI L31 NO 1 to 1 0 L7Z4055 10 to 16 3 PO 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 4 25 to 35 4 to 2 9 0 to 10 0 The wire size is valid for PVC insulated copper cable 30 ambient temperature iRecommended Crimp Terminal Sizes Ring type Table 2 3 Crimp Terminal Sizes Crimp Terminal Type Wire Cross Section mm Terminal Screws Klauke 620 4 1620 4 630 4 1620 4 630 4 1630 4 650 4 1650 4 650 4 1650 4 101 R 5 1650 5 101 R 6 1650 6 101 R 8 1650 8 102 R 5 1652 5 102 R 6 1652 6 102 R 8 1652 8 103 R 5 1653 5 103 R 6 1653 6 103 R 8 1653 8 104 R 6 1654 6 104 R 8 1654 8 105 R 6 1655 6 105 R 8 1655 8 105 R 10 655 10 106 R 8 1656 8 106 R 10 656 10 106 R 12 656 12 107 R 8 1657 8 0 2 0 2 107 R 10 657 107 R 12 657 108 R 10 658 108 R 12 658 Not applicable for L7Z20 1 Select the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2 of the rated voltage Line voltage drop is calculated as follows e IMPORTANT Line voltage drop V 3 x wire resistance Q km x wire length m x current A x 10 Main Circuit Terminal Functions Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2 4 Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purposes
126. 2 Open Loop Vector control 3 Closed Loop Vector control 6 Closed Loop Vector for PM motors Acceleration time 1 Accel Time 1 Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the maximum output fre quency Deceleration time 1 Decel Time 1 Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to 0 Hz S curve character istic time at accel eration start S Crv Acc Start S curve character istic time at accel eration end S Crv Acc End S curve character istic time at decel eration start S Crv Dec Start S curve character istic time at decel eration end S Crv Dec End S curve Character istic time below leveling speed Scurve leveling When the S curve characteristic time is set the accel decel times will increase by only half of the S curve characteris tic times at start and end ASR proportional P gain 1 ASR P Gain 1 ASR integral time 1 ASR I Time 1 Set the proportional gain 1 and the inte gral time 1 of the speed control loop ASR for the minimum frequency The settings becomes active for acceler ation only Name Display ASR proportional P gain 2 ASR P Gain 2 ASR integral I time 2 ASR I Time 2 Description Set the proportional gain 2 and the inte gral time 2 of the speed control loop ASR for th
127. 2 S lection eoe eee ce e a A e M E 6 55 Output Terminal Functions iicet e boc x cree opea ope rg acu nice 6 56 Motor and V f Pattern Setup sssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeneeen nen 6 59 Setting Motor Parameters for Induction Motors Motor 1 and 2 sss 6 59 Setting Motor Parameters for PM Motors enn 6 62 Motor Rotation Direction Change cccsccccsscscessssssscsssseseeseseesesseseseecesescesesceseseeseescsees 6 63 Digital Operator LED Monitor Functions eeee 6 64 Setting Digital Operator LED Monitor Functions ssssssse 6 64 Copying Parameters JVOP 160 OY only ssssssssssseetteeeees 6 66 Prohibiting Overwriting of Parameters sssssssttetentees 6 70 Setting aiPassword 3 6 o eet dee HR ee ect 6 70 Displaying User set Parameters Only cccsccccscsccsescssescssescesescesescenesecnesecneseeseseens 6 71 PG Option Cards eee tt e etta ca LER rara OMA de MAD Te ga 6 72 9 PG Sol D ricette t ali eat a testis orna Len et 6 72 Fault Detect ota mi ie Epl tir det xn ea eve R 6 74 Machine Data Copy Function tenente treten 6 75 Ipi ed SY SIGNI M ELE ihe tate atete od eteeaanl 6 77 Automatic Fault Reset ccc cesseesseeseeeeseeeeeeaeeaaaeeaeeaaeeaaaeaaeeaaeeaaeeaeeeas 6 81 Memobus Communications esses 6 83 MEMOBUS Communications Configuration ccccscccescsssscsssscessecescesescseeseeees
128. 2FuncSel Selects the function for the chan nel 2 input if an AI 14B option card is installed See the table below for the available functions 4B Channel 2 Gain 4 CH2 Gain Sets the input level according to the 100 value of the function set in parameter H3 09 when the voltage current at channel 2 of the AI 14B option card is 10V 20mA 100 0 AI 14B Channel 2 Bias 4 CH2 Bias Sets the input level according to the 0 value of the function set in parameter H3 09 when the voltage current at channel 2 of the AI 14B option card is 0V OmA 5 35 Name Control Methods Closed Loop Vector PM Description Setting Factory Open Closed Display Range Setting Loop Loop Vector Vector Analog input filter Sets delay filter time constant for time constant the three analog input channels of the AI 14B option card Effective for noise control etc CH1 3 FilterTime Terminal Al func Sets the multi function analog tion selection input function for terminal A1 0 Frequency Reference Terminal A1 Func 1 Torque compensation Terminal A1 input Sets the frequency reference gain value when 10 V is input as a per centage of the maximum output frequency set in E1 04 100 0 Terminal Al Gain Terminal A1 input Sets the frequency reference bias value when 0 V is input as a per centage of the maximum fre quency set in E1 04 T
129. 3RV PFI3 130 SE 130 4 7 90 x 180 x 366 CIMR L7Z40557 Maximum Voltage AC 480V 3phase Ambient Temperature 45 C max Permissible emission of power drive systems for commercial and light environment EN61800 3 A11 general availability 1st environment Inverter Model Line Filter Varispeed L7 CIMR L7Z23P77 CIMR L7Z25P57 3G3RV PFI2035 SE Current A Dimensions WxDxH 141 x 46 x 330 CIMR L7Z27P57 CIMR L7Z20117 3G3RV PFI2060 SE 206 x 60 x 355 CIMR L7Z20157 CIMR L7Z20187 3G3RV PFI2100 SE 236 x 80 x 408 CIMR L7Z20227 CIMR L7Z20307 3G3RV PFI2130 SE 90 x 180 x 366 CIMR L7Z20377 3G3RV PFI2160 SE 120 x 170 x 451 CIMR L7Z20457 CIMR L7Z20557 3G3RV PFI2200 SE Maximum Voltage AC 240V 3phase Ambient Temperature 45 C max max motor cable length 10 m Class B 50 m Class A Rated Voltage AC240V 3 ph Ambient Temperature 45 C max 130 x 240 x 610 Registered Trademarks The following registered trademarks are used in this manual DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendors Association Inc nterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co Profibus is a registered trademark of Siemens AG e Hiperface Is a registered trademark of Sick Stegmann GmbH Klauke isa registered trademark of Klauke Textron XIII XIV
130. 4 Password A1 05 Password setting lBSetting a Password The password can be set in parameter A1 05 Normally A1 05 is not displayed To display and modify A1 05 the MENU and Reset key must be pressed together in the A 1 04 display e 70 Displaying User set Parameters Only The A2 parameters user set parameters and A1 01 parameter access level can be used to establish a param eter set that contains only the most important parameters Set the number of the parameter to which should appear in the A2 O0 parameters and then set A1 01 to 1 The advanced programming mode now allows to read and modify A1 01 to A1 03 and the parameters set in A2 01 to A2 32 only iRelated Parameters Control Methods Change during Operation Parameter Factory No Setting Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector A2 01 to User setting parameters A A A2 32 6 71 Pc Option Cards To have a more precise speed control the inverter can be equipped with a PG option card for the connection of a pulse generator Three different PG cards can be used the PG B2 the PG X2 and the PG F2 card Refer to page 2 24 Option Card Models and Specifications to see details PG Setup iRRelated Parameters Control Methods Parameter Factory Open Closed No Setting Loop Loop Vector Vector Q 1024 PG constant PG rotation PG div
131. 4th last fault 93H Fault Message 4 Cumulative operation U3 05 time at fault The total operating time when the Ist previous 1 94H fault occurred hr Elapsed Time 1 Accumulated time of sec ond fault The total operating time when the 2nd previous 1 U3 06 p B P Cannot be output 95H fault occurred hr Elapsed Time 2 Accumulated time of U3 07 third fault The total operating time when the 3rd previous 1 96H fault occurred hr Elapsed Time 3 Accumulated time of U3 08 fourth oldest fault The total operating time when the 4th previous 1 97H fault occurred hr Elapsed Time 4 Fifth last to tenth last 804 U3 09 fault He The error content of the 5th to 10th last fault 807H U3 14 Fault Message 5 to 10 808H 809H Accumulated time of 806H U3 15 fifth to tenth fault 80FH i Total generating time when Sth 10th previous ihr 810H U3 20 fault occurred 811H M Elapsed Time 5 to 10 812H 813H e gt The following errors are not recorded in the error log CPF00 01 02 03 UV 1 and UV2 IMPORTANT Settings which change with the Control Mode A1 02 Parameter Number Slip compensation gain Setting Range 0 0 to 2 5 V f Control A1 02 0 Factory Setting Closed Loop Vec Loop Vec tor A1 tor PM 02 3 A1 02 5 Open Loop Closed Vector A1 02 2 Torque compensation delay time 0 to 10000 ASR P gain 1 1 00 to 300 00 ASR Integral time 1 0 000 to 10 000 ASR P gain 2
132. 5 Rated motor frequency T1 05 Rated motor frequency T1 06 Motor pole number T1 06 Motor pole number Press the UP button until T1 07 Motor rated speed T1 07 Motor rated speed Tun di T1 08 PG pul ber T1 08 PG pulse number Tuning Ready display appears pu P er CLV only Press the UP button until Press the UP button until Tuning Ready display appears Tuning Ready display appears Open the brake Close the motor contactor s Refer to page 7 14 Auto tuning Faults Press the RUN button and eliminate the fault source No Fault code is displayed Yes Tuning successful is displayed Open the contactors open the base block inputs and close the brake if auto tuning with rotating motor was performed FINISH Fig 4 2 Autotuning for Induction Motors Autotuning Procedure with PM Motors Fig 4 3 shows the autotuning procedure for permanent magnet motors Before tuning make sure that the con trol mode is set to PM Closed Loop Vector A1 02 6 START Remove the ropes so that the motor can rotate freely Set the Base Block inputs BB and BB1 Switch ON the power supply if itis OFF Switch off the power supply and check if the right PG card is correctley installed Check parameter F1 01 n8 35 Does a OPEO6 fault occur Check parameter n8 35 f EnDat Hiperface is used Does a CPF24 fault check the encoder power supply occur check the CLOCK an
133. 5 45P510 45P570 CIMR L7Z47P5 47P510 47P570 CIMR L7Z4011 401110 401170 CIMR L7Z4015 401510 401570 CIMR L7Z4018 401810 401870 CIMR L7Z4022 402200 402210 402270 CIMR L7Z4030 403000 403010 403070 CIMR L7Z4037 403700 403710 403770 CIMR L7Z4045 404500 404510 404570 CIMR L7Z4055 405500 405510 405570 400 V class P ER Confirmations upon Delivery Checks Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered Table 1 2 Checks Item Method Has the correct model of Inverter been delivered Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or other damage resulting from shipping Is the Inverter damaged in any way Are any screws or other components loose Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness In case of any irregularities in the above items contact the agency from which the Inverter was purchased or your Omron Yaskawa Motion Control representative immediately Nameplate Information The nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter showing the model number specifications lot number serial number and other information about the Inverter B Example Nameplate The following nameplate is an example for a standard European Inverter 3 phase
134. 5 mm for solid wire covered vinyl sheath Shield connection terminal 0 5 to 2 5 mm cable BWiring Precautions Consider the following precautions for wiring Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines Use cables which are recommended by the encoder manufacturer only For the cable connection to the encoder connectors which are recommended by the encoder manufacturer should be used Ferrules should be used refer to Table 2 8 The signal lines of the PG Speed Control Card should be separated from main power lines and other con trol circuits The shield must be connected green grounding cable of the option card to the ground terminal to prevent operational errors caused by noise The wire ends should not be soldered Doing so may cause contact faults The PG cards power supply must not be used for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply consumption is higher than 200 mA If momentary power loss must be handled use a backup capacitor or other method The PG cards maximum input frequency must not be exceeded The output frequency of the pulse genera tor can be calculated using the following formula Motor speed at maximum output frequency min 60 fog Hz x PG rating p rev 2 31 2 32 LED Monitor Digital Operator a
135. 60Q30 2 600V 30A 132 4011 32 480 50 150 1300 ATOP50 4 700V 50A 300 4015 4l 480 60 400 1800 A70P70 4 700V 70A 590 4018 49 480 70 700 4100 ATOP80 4 700V 80A 770 4022 58 480 80 240 5800 A70P80 4 700V 80A 770 4030 78 480 100 500 5800 A70P100 4 700V 100A 1200 4037 96 480 125 750 5800 A70P125 4 700V 125A 1900 4045 115 480 150 920 13000 A70P150 4 700V 150A 2700 4055 154 480 200 1500 13000 A70P200 4 700V 200A 4800 2 12 Installing a Moulded Case Circuit Breaker If a moulded case circuit breaker is used for the power supply connection R L1 S L2 and T L3 it must be suitable for the Inverter The MCCB should have a capacity of 1 5 to 2 times of the inverter s rated current For the MCCB s time characteristics selection the inverter s overload protection one minute at 150 of the rated output current must be considered Installing an Earth Leakage Breaker An earth leakage breaker which is able to detect all kinds of current should be used in order to ensure a safe earth leakage current detection f a special purpose earth leakage breaker for Inverters is used it should have an actuating current of at least 30 mA per Inverter f a standard earth leakage breaker is used it should have an actuating current of 200 mA or more per Inverter and a actuating time of 0 1 s or more Installing a Magnetic Contactor at the Input If the power supply for the main circuit is shut off by a control cir
136. 7 16 G 680 uojeje 9002 Ainr 9z ueu uniw 6EE08 A qyoiqeH 69 agessialply O L uolsinay 8 LSPOOSLLZ Haws ires ans ANL 9 40 p a6ed E 6T Xe3 8 22 1648 680 uojojo 1 9002 Ainr 9z ueu uniw 6 08 A qyoiqeH G9 egeisje pty O L uolsiney 8 LSPOOSLLL Haws rey ans ANL suonipuoo Buiojjoj JO BOUBAJASGO eui Japun Yoda SIU JO G Je deYo ui peisij sjueuieJinbe OY JOOW g 1 HIWIO PUE Z 1 INIO SJeueAuoo amod ones eur suonoe qo Ajayes jeoiuuoe Aue ui jjnseJ jou pip q 7 zL dse z z Jeydeuo L Lg N3 Buipjoooe jun jewod e jo umop INUS 10 gZ T HWIO PUE Z 1 MINIO S1eueAuoo Jewod onejs euj jo uoneuiuexe eu ywnsey 4 faoBejeo L p86 NI Buip1oooe sjuaweuinbas Ajayes ay e10JeJeu SIYIN pue ANS ANL Ag peuruexe ueeq ApeeJ e sey si esneoeq peAJ8sqo JOU BJM J9yigAuoo Jamod 31 S y jo s usuodwoo y ur Ss jNe4 yun Jemod ay jo UMOP inus 9jes eui uo 129jje Sj 0 p1e681 ym pejenje e ueeq Ly sjueuoduioo eui uo SYNE e et WAIN sisAjeue 128jje pue epouu eJunjre4 Aq p s jeue sew si nej jo eseo ui W3JS S eui jo uonoee eu uoneuriuexe jo e2ueulojlad 9 junoooe ojui ueyej ueeq e eu q 7z dse Buuojuou pue yun Jemod jo uwop 1nus L Z 1e1deu 966L L LENZ 24 Jo sjueuieumbaei y euouueuun yun Jewod au jo UMOP 1nUS 9JES au 104 ejqeuno ejun ue ney YOIYM Jn990 Aew syjnej ejBurs ou LL pL Jeideu2 966L L L8N3 Sulpsooce yey uonduunsse y uo jno pales sew uoreurue
137. 7A L7Z27P5 L7Z PUZ27P5 CE Reactor III 27P5 7 5kW 1 20mH 40A L7Z2011 L7Z PUZ2011 CE Reactor III 2011 11kW 0 92mH 52A L7Z2015 L7Z PUZ2015 CE Reactor III 2015 15kW 0 70mH 68A L7Z2018 L7Z PUZO18 CE Reactor III 2018 18 5kW 0 50mH 96A L7Z2022 L7Z PUZ2022 CE Reactor III 2022 22kW 0 31mH 156A L7Z2030 L7Z PUZ2030 CE Reactor III 2030 30kW 1 23mH 78A L7Z2037 L7Z PUZ2037 CE Reactor III 2037 37kW 0 27mH 176A L7Z2045 L7Z PUZ2045 CE Reactor III 2045 45kW 0 22mH 220A L7Z2055 L7Z PUZ2055 CE Reactor III 2055 55kW 0 18mH 269A Oo WO LO OO LO o0 o0 NAN Ww tes ica 1 EN81 1 Certif EN 954 Aueuuag uayoUNW 6 08 G9 assenssajpiy ejjaisjetzunia7 Hquig eaiues 1onpoud ans ANL jo abed D d 61 90 9007 aed ea wee 984008417 rou yoda S L jeeue o Sejou osje ees jonpoJd eu uo pexye eq ULI eAoqe UMOYS WW uoneaynieo eu seAnoeJip Jo spsepueys BunejeJ eui y m sei duico pue siseq uejunjoA e uo ps se sew j12npod peisi eu 1661 8 10S N3 0 Buipuo22e 9661 1 S6 NI peisel pelliin eq 1snui spJepueis 1se peuonueu eus JO sjueujeuinbai je JUawdinbe ay Buruesur Buij eysur ueuMw sewey I AuoBayeo abeo JenQ I ssej uonoejoJd ZH 09 09 sAouanbay payey WSL eEA00F vege 29e A00Z queuno pee 9ecAO8r 01 08 pue 9ecA0vz 01 00Z e AO z 9 002 eBeio payey SJ9jouleJeg
138. A1 02 setting PG Card V f control z Open Loop Vector Control Induction motor without encoder Induction motor with incremental encoder Closed Loop Vector Control PG B2 PG X2 Permanent magnet motor with Hiperface or EnDat 2 1 Closed Loop Vector Control for encoder PM motors PEST Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors roo Yaskawa IPM motor with incremental encoder CAUTION For Permanent Magnet motors do not use any other control mode than Closed Loop Vector for PM A1 02 6 Using any other control mode can cause damage to the equipment or can cause dangerous behavior Autotuning The motor data autotuning function sets the V f pattern parameters E1 LIL1 motor data parameters E2 LILI E5 OD and the encoder data F1 01 automatically The steps which have to be performed during the autotuning depend on the tuning mode selection Refer to page 5 53 Motor Autotuning T for an overview of the autotuning parameters Autotuning Mode Selection The autotuning mode has to be selected according to selected control mode and the mechanical system motor no load rotation possible or not Table 4 1 shows the selectable tuning mode for each control mode Table 4 2 Motor Data Autotuning Modes Tuning Control Mode Mo Autotuning Mode Function g Open Closed Closed Selection Loop Vec Loop Vec Loop Vec T1 01 tor tor tor PM Standard tuning with
139. AX Max Frequency Max voltage VMAX Max Voltage Base frequency FA Base Frequency Mid output fre quency voltage VB Mid voltage A Min output fre quency FMIN Min Frequency Min output fre quency voltage VMIN Min Voltage Base voltage VBASE Base Voltage Description VMAX E1 05 que FMIN FA FMAX E1 09 E1 07 E1 06 E1 04 Sets the output voltage of the base fre quency E1 06 Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM Motor rated current Mtr Rated Current Sets the motor rated current in Amps This set value becomes the base value for motor protection and torque limit It is an input data for autotuning Motor rated slip Motor Rated Slip Sets the motor rated slip This set value will become the reference value for the slip compensation This parameter is automatically set dur ing autotuning Motor no load cur rent No Load Current Sets the motor no load current This parameter is automatically set dur ing autotuning Number of motor poles Number of Poles Sets the number of motor poles It is an input data for autotuning Motor line to line resistance Term Resistance Sets the motor phase to phase resis tance This
140. BOPEO01 through OPE11 is displayed The set value for the parameter is wrong Refer to Table 7 4 in this chapter and correct the settings BCPFO00 or CPF01 is displayed This is a Digital Operator LED Monitor communication error The connection between the Digital Operator LED Monitor and the Inverter may be faulty Remove the Digital Operator LED Monitor and then re install it l NENNEN 7 18 If the Motor Does Not Operate Properly The following causes are possible BThe motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input The frequency reference is 0 00 Hz or a no speed is selected by the digital inputs Check the input signals and the frequency reference settings Also make sure to set the Baseblock signal The inverter does not accept any input if it is base blocked BThe load is too heavy Check the motor current If it is at the limit of the inverter rated current the load might be too high Check the inverter size and the mechanical system Check also if the brake is working or not to make sure that the motor is not running against the closed brake If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed If the motor rotates in the wrong direction the motor output wiring may be incorrect The direction of the motor rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U V and W If an encoder is used the polarity has to be switched over as well If the Inverter is ope
141. Cat No TOEPC71067605 03 0Y VARISPEED L7 The frequency inverter for the lifts USER S MANUAL ges t 4 Table of Contents MW AITO Rent RID PP RR VII Safety Precautions and Instructions nce enit e qt rete t eedinta VIII EMC Compatibility jess ote bh eo peto spe dott nat bd epe addo pedet tUe X Lino EIOS oer e o Dedi eH edendis eductus um lr XII Registered Lradema3rks aep d veto eg ae OX DO de uS eva gue XIII Handling Inverters eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeereeennnnnnee 1 1 Varispeed L7 Models ssessssssssssssssesesseeerenere nennen nnns 1 2 Confirmations upon Delivery eere eate etait dena aet he t 1 3 LL 1 3 Nameplate Information ccccccccsccscsescssescssessescsssssosssssvssssssseavsrsssssssvsssacsrsesesseceuceceeeeeees 1 3 Inverter Software Version tenentes 1 4 9 component Names acts cate rca hte ere aste ducta dtes A 1 5 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions eese nennen 1 7 iPO00 Inverters oem cles om ee e tede 1 7 1P20 NEMA 1 Inverters ettet teet tennis 1 7 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site sess 1 9 Dns tallation Site etate o ed dius dodenus aui ren 1 9 Controlling the Ambient Temperature sssssssesseeeetetenenennes 1 9 Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter sssssssstttes 1 9 Installation Orientation and Space
142. Closed o BUS Range Setting Loop Loop Vector Register Vector Vector PM Description Display Motor rated ower P Sets the motor rated power Rated power Motor rated Sets the motor rated current current This set value will become the refer Rated cur ence value for motor protection and rent torque limits Number of motor poles Sets the number of motor poles Number of Poles Motor line to line resis Sets the motor phase to phase resis tance tance Term Resis tance D Axis Inductance Sets the motors d axis inductance Leak Induc tance Q Axis Inductance Leak Induc tance Sets the motors q axis inductance Motor volt age constant Sets the motor voltage constant Voltage con stant The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity The given value is for a 400V class inverter with 3 7 kW 2 The setting range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter s rated output current The given value is for a 400 V class inverter of 3 7 kW is given 5 25 5 26 Name Display PG constant PG Pulses Rev Option Parameters F BPG Option Setup F1 Description Sets the number of PG pulses per revolution Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Operation
143. HI Inverter heatsink overheat T 7 Bit A OLI Motor overload Bit B OL2 Inverter overload BitC OL3 Overtorque detection 1 BitD OLA Overtorque detection 2 Bit E RR Internal braking transistor fault BitF RH Inverter mounted braking resistor overheat Fault Content 2 it 0 EF3 External fault set on terminal S3 EF4 External fault set on terminal S4 EFS External fault set on terminal S5 EF6 External fault set on terminal S6 EF7 External fault set on terminal S7 Not used Not used 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OS Overspeed detected 8 DEV Speed deviation detected it9 PGO PG disconnected A B G D E F PF Input phase loss LF Output open phase OH3 Motor overheat pre alarm PTC analog input OPR Digital operator disconnected ERR EPROM error Not used 6 88 Register Address Fault Content 3 Contents Bi CE Memobus communications error Bi BUS Bus option communications error Not used Bi CF Control fault Bi SVE Zero servo fault Bi EFO External fault from optional input card Bi Not used Bi UL3 Undertorque detection 1 Bi ULA Undertorque detection 2 Bit A to F Not used CPF Fault Content 1 Bit 0 1 Not used Bit2 CPF02 Bit3 CPF03 Bit4 Not used Bit 5 CPF05 Bit6 CPF06
144. In V f control the inverter calculates the motor primary loss voltage using the terminal resistance value E2 05 and adjusts the output voltage V to compensate insufficient torque at startup and during low speed oper ation The compensation voltage is calculated by the calculated Motor primary voltage loss x parameter C4 01 In Open Loop Vector control the motor excitation current and the torque producing current are calculated and controlled separately The torque compensation affects the torque producing current only The torque producing current is calculated by the calculated torque reference x C4 01 iRRelated Parameters Control Methods Change during Operation Parameter Factory No Setting Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector C4 01 Torque compensation gain 1 00 A C4 02 Torque compensation delay time constant 2000 ms A BAdjusting Torque Compensation Gain C4 01 Normally there is no need to change this setting If adjustments are necessary do the following Open Loop Vector control Ifthe torque response is slow increase the set value f vibrations occur decrease the set value V f control fthe cable is very long increase the set value f the motor capacity 1s smaller than the Inverter capacity max applicable motor capacity increase the set value fthe motor vibrates reduce the set value Setting precautions Adjust this parameter so that the ou
145. Induction Motors 4 6 Autotuning Procedure with PM Motors 4 7 PM Motor Encoder Offset Tuning siicccicccscncsencescseeecenesneenecens 4 8 Performance Optimization Liussr eiae ko x RR Y RO E ERR o a ex 4 11 PH General Start Up Routine Start Up The following chart shows the basic start up sequence START Mechanical installation Main and control circuit wiring Check the encoder power supply selection Closed Loop only Switch on the power supply Select the control mode in parameter A1 02 eee une ool EE REM Buceo Perform motor data encoder offset auto tuning V f control Open Loop Vector Control page 4 6 Autotuning Procedure with Induction Motors Closed Loop Vector Control Closed Loop Vector Control for PM page 4 7 Autotuning Procedure with PM Motors Digital operator b1 02 0 Select the control sequence in paramerter d1 18 Set up the analog digital I O s in the H1 xx Set up the digital l O s in the H1 xx H2 xx and H3 xx parameters and H2 xx parameters Speed reference source Analog Input Set up the Set up the Preset speed values d1 xx Acceleration Deceleration times C1 xx Acceleration Deceleration times C1 xx S Curves Jerk C2 x S Curves Jerk C2 xx Make test runs Fine Tuning Brake sequence tuning Special functions setup FINISH Fig 4 1 Basic
146. Limits 5 41 Autotuning Mode L8 Hardware Protection 5 41 n2 Automatic Frequency Regulator 5 43 Automatically sets motor n5 Feed Forward Control 5 43 parameters for vector control n8 PM Motor Adjustment Sidi pes eu ot Homere i 02 Digital Operator 5 46 03 Copy Function 5 47 S1 Brake Sequence 5 47 S2 Slip Compensation 5 50 S3 Special Sequence Functions 5 51 T1 Motor Autotuning 1 5 53 T2 Motor Autotuning 2 5 54 User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode The minimum user parameters required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming mode The user parameters displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table These and all other user parameters are also displayed in advanced programming mode Control Methods 5 4 Name Display Parameter access level Access Level Description Used to set the parameter access level set read 0 Monitoring only Monitoring drive mode and setting A1 01 and A1 04 1 Used to select user parameters Only parameters set in A2 01 to A2 32 can be read and set 2 Advanced Parameters can be read and set in both quick programming mode Q and advanced programming mode A Setting Range Factory Setting Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM Control method selection Control Method Sets the control method for the Inverter 0 V f control
147. M a eo m LSPOOSZLZ ON odes ZHOZL 0 0 SA08 O 0 Z OLL L ze ZHOQ OS oeCAOSP ORE Zd t LTWIO m O vZZ 0 BOL 7H09 SEEADET 0 002 7 HOZL o o oz o o 7692 0202 o s zH0G 2eEA0zz 0 002 SSOZ L TANID z Oeste 261 7H09 SEEAOEZ 01 002 zHozicorcg pez oo EA o sy RE AREA Sv0z L WIO ARCA vc8S9 d 0 09U 0 021 ZH09 Se AOEZ 01 002 oO uer Jo849quoJM ul ZHOZL 0 O ADEZ o 0 qal oe ZHOS 22EA0ZZ 0 00Z 2 02 L NID m 4 d H q y uv OES 26 Wg 9d0o0Jn3 214329 3 emeyse Moz o o nope o o O 9SHO LLL o oe ZHO9 0S 2EEAO Z 01 00Z OEOZ LTYNIO HquiS a 9139913 ASLA 96 0 24 z A ero vo mo oins o zz zHogis oeeAovz oio0z zzoz rrSWIO EX Jemoejnue 008 0709 Moz oi 0 oz 00 O 96 0 2L se ZHO9 0S e AOvZ 01 00Z 9102 WIO 2 O v9 0 er HO0ZL o 0 MOWZ Ol 0 0 89 0 8S o st ZHOS 0S e AOvZ 0 002 SLOZ LT WIO A Terre gt L L8N3 5ulpsoooe yun 4amod e jo umop 3nus zMozi 04 0 Aovz oi 0 O ZS 0 ou ZHO9 0S SEEADET 0 002 LLOZ LTINIO ur QU 10 Occ re O or 0 0e 9 ZHO9 OS SEEAOPZ 01 00Z Sd Z L THWNIO E ZHOZL 0 o E EE EC JOUSAU OV nex ZT HIND ssZLT HWIO MOzL o 0 AOZ O o sz o ez s s ZHO9 0S SeCAOYZ 01 00Z SdSz L WIO eo 49119Au02 JOMOd ones S LWVeL Hori 96 OL NOPE 9i s O LZIL SL L e ZHO9 0S SeCAOvZ O00 Ld EZ LT UINID UIwE Ga SL Jo mn fouenb d v zuan pue v zuana MA iouenbejj npon Bunse Ayayes eui Jo nbejj pue eBejoA indino indu pejew je od nd no pue eBeyo ndu pejeu e Jo owen
148. MEMO BUS Register Slip compensa tion gain in motoring mode SlipComp gainMot Sets the slip compensation gain in motoring mode It can be used to improve the lev eling accuracy Slip compensa tion gain in regenerative mode SlipComp gain Gen Sets the slip compensation gain in regenerative mode It can be used to improve the leveling accuracy Slip compensa tion torque detection delay TorqueDet Delay T Sets the delay time for the slip compensation torque detection The torque detection is started at S2 05 sec after speed agree Slip compensa tion torque detection time Torque detect T Sets the time for which the torque is measured for the slip compensa tion calculation Slip compensa tion delay time SlipCompDe lay T Sets the Slip compensation delay time 200ms Name Display Short floor function selec tion Short floor sel ilSpecial Sequence Functions S3 Description Enables or disables the short floor operation function 0 disabled 1 enabled Standard 2 enabled Advanced Factory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Inspection deceleration time Dec ramp inspec Sets the deceleration time for the inspection run Nominal Level ing speed detec tion level Vn VI level sel
149. Number of Trav Operation counter initialization els counter initial 0 Number of travels counter is ize kept 1 Number of travels counter Initialize Sel Name Display monitor clear B Copy Function o3 Description Factory Setting Control Methods Closed Loop Vector Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Copy func tion selec 0 Normal operation tion 1 READ Inverter to Operator Copy Func tion Sel 2 COPY Operator to Inverter 3 Verify compare Read per mission selection Read Allowable 0 READ prohibited 1 READ permitted Name Display Zero speed level at stop DC Inj I start Lift Function Parameters S iBrake Sequence S1 Description Sets the speed level at which the DC injection zero speed operation starts during stop Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Control Methods Closed Loop Vector Open Loop Vector MEMO BUS Register DC injection braking current at start DC Inj I start Sets the DC injection braking cur rent as a percentage of the Inverter rated current DC injection braking current at stop DC Inj I stop Sets the DC injection braking cur rent as a percentage of the Inverter rated current DC injection braking Zero speed ti
150. Reading Inverter Memory Register Contents The content of maximum 16 inverter memory registers can be read out at a time Among other things the command message must contain the start address of the first register to read out and the quantity of registers The response message will contain the content of the first and the consecutive num ber of registers that has been set for the quantity The contents of the memory register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits The following tables show message examples when reading status signals error details data link status and frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter Response Message Response Message Command Message During Normal Operation During Error Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H Higher 00H Data quantity 08H Error code 03H ST Aea L 20H High 00H High FIH ower igher igher j Ist storage 8 CRC 16 g Higher 00H register Lower 65H Lower 31H Quantity Lower 04H Next storage Higher 00H Higher 45H register Lower 00H CRC 16 Lower FOH Nextstorage Higher 00H register Lower 00H Next storage Higher 01H register Lower F4H Higher AFH CRC 16 Lower 82H Loop back Test The loop back test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to check the communications between the mast
151. Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card P Always confirm that the input power is removed and the Charge LED is off before removing or mounting the terminal card IMPORTANT opecifications This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter Specifications by RAUM aioisqie ten pu qe di Quiere i ni 9 2 BN yo PRENNENT Inn SE 9 6 AC Reactors for EN 12015 Compatibility 9 8 EN 954 1 ENG 1 1 GertfiCSles io iei noni tnr r tait vRS 9 9 Inverter Specifications The Inverter specifications are listed in the following tables Specifications by Model Specifications are given by model in the following tables m200V Class Table 9 1 200 V Class Inverters Model Number CIMR L7Z L1 Max applicable motor out 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 put kW Rated output capacity KVA 7 10 14 20 27 33 40 54 67 76 93 on E H ouput cument 17 5 25 33 49 64 80 96 130 160 183 224 e4 amp Max output voltage 3 phase 200 208 220 230 or 240 VAC V Proportional to input voltage Max output frequency Hz Up to 120Hz available by programing Rated voltage V 3 phase 200 208 220 230 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Rated frequency Hz Rated input current A 21 25 40 52 68 96 115 156 176 220 269 Allowable voltage fluc 1096 15
152. Setting uning Vif Loop Loop Len i Operation T N Vector e MEN L8 12 Ambient Temperature 45 C No A A A A At high ambient temperatures an output current derating has to be considered The derating depends on the ambient temperature The derating curve is shown in Fig 6 20 To ensure a safe inverter protection at high ambient temperatures always set parameter L8 15 to the actual ambient temperature 100 o So 80 23 60 o E 9 os 40 LY 5 g 5 20 Oo a eg A a a E E a 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Temperature C Fig 6 20 Ambient Temperature Derating Curve 6 49 M Input Terminal Functions The digital multifunction inputs can be set to several functions using the H1 01 to H1 05 parameters terminal S3 to S7 function selection The following section describes the input functions not mentioned in any other section Related Parameters Control Methods Parameter Factory Open Close Closed No Setting Loop dLoop Eo Vector Vector Vector PM H1 01 Terminal S3 function selection 80 A A A H1 02 Terminal S4 function selection 84 H1 03 Terminal S5 function selection 81 H1 04 Terminal S6 function selection 83 A A A A A A A A A A A A H1 05 Terminal S7 function selection F Disable the Inverter Output Baseblock Using a baseblock command the inverter output can be cut immediat
153. Start Up Sequence Magor Up Before Power Up The following points should be checked carefully before the power is switched on The power supply must meet the inverter specification refer to page 9 2 Specifications by Model The power supply cables must be tightly connected to the right terminals L1 L2 L3 The motor cables must be tightly connected to the right terminals on the inverter side U V W as well as on the motor side The braking unit braking resistor must be connected correctly The Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device must be wired correctly All Inverter control circuit terminals should be switched OFF When a PG card is used the PG must be wired correctly Display after Power Up After normal power up without any problems the operator display shows the following messages Display for normal operation The Baseblock message blinks Base Block When a fault has occurred or an alarm is active a fault or alarm message will appear In this case refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting DRIVE UV Main Power Loss A fault or alarm message is shown on the display The example shows a low voltage alarm Display for fault operation Control Mode Selection As the first thing after power up one of the four control modes must be selected depending on the machine type Table 4 1 Control Mode Selection Machine Type Control Mode
154. Supply Low power UPS or Light Load detection not Contactor C Example 3 Two Batteries Main battery voltage lower than 280 VDC Wiring Inverter Contactor Sequence cap penal uei ILU ee V I ContactorB 1 DE Contactor A I i e n Contactor C Zt 2 i 4 i 81 L um i Main power i Pad i SES RIL1 3 e Sx Rescue Operation Enable Input b sc L Main L1 4 E VIT2 Battery T 1 S2 s L2 A c b wits T i T L3 j A2 iL i I 5 l Power Supply Control H C PO Lg i Controller EN i Supply Battery I NO i i l Y i The contactors must be operated so that contactor B is always opened before A and C are closed Contactor C can be closed after A but not before When the rescue operation is disabled the contactors A and C must be opened before B is closed Example 4 Main battery voltage higher than 280 VDC Wiring Contactor Sequence Inverter UNSER Rie ae E ae EC E VR oF EE i B2 i Contactor B AETA m i A B1 i Contactor A i VS i i i perd A b i i I H G I 4 um i Main power Ies Sd Main L
155. Time See L6 01 to L6 03 for a descrip tion Name Display Forward drive torque limit Torq Limit Fwd Reverse drive torque limit Torq Limit Rev Forward regener ative torque limit Torq Lmt Fwd Rgn Reverse regener ative torque limit Torq Lmt Rev Rgn i Torque Limits L7 Description Sets the torque limit value as a per centage of the motor rated torque Four individual regions can be set Output torque Positive torque Fac tory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Torque limit integral time constant Torque Limit Time Sets the torque limit integration time constant 200 ms Torque limit integral opera tion selection during accel decel Torque Limit Sel Sets the torque limit operation during acceleration and deceleration 0 P control I control is added at con stant speed operation 1 I control Normally changing this setting is not necessary Ifthe torque limitation accuracy dur ing accel decel has preference I con trol should be selected This may result in an increased accel decel time and speed deviations from the reference value 5 41 5 42 Hardware Protection L8 Name Display Overheat pre alarm level OH Pre Alarm Lvl De
156. W T3 NO PO 72 B1 B2 1 2 to 1 5 6to 10 10 to 6 L7Z4011 R LI S L2 T L3 1 42 B1 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 NO PO 6 to 10 10 to 6 Power cables e g 600 V vinyl power cables Inverter Tightening Possible Recom A Terminal Wire Si mended ire Sizes Model Terminal Symbol Se Torque Wire Size SANS Nem mm AWG mm AWG Wire Type R L1 S L2 T L3 41 42 B1 B2 25 10 U TI V T2 W T3 NO PO 8 to 6 2 5 6to 10 4 0 to 5 0 10 to 6 L7Z4015 R LI S L2 T L3 1 42 U TI V T2 40 to 5 0 10 to 35 W T3 NO 8 to 2 10 8 10 to 25 8 to 4 L7Z4018 BI B2 PO 2 5 4 0 to 5 0 R LI S L2 T L3 1 43 U TI V T2 16 4 0 to 5 0 W T3 R1 L11 SI L21 TI L31 NO PO 6 to 4 16 to 35 6 to 2 L7Z4022 9 0 to 10 0 R LI S L2 T L3 41 43 U TI V T2 25 T3 R1 O PO ee 4 L7z4030 W T3 RULI1 S1 L21 T1 L31 NO P 9 0 to 10 0 230009 Power cables Gr e g 600 V vinyl R LI S L2 T L3 41 U TI V T2 W T3 25 to 50 power cables 9 0 to 10 0 RI L11 SI L21 TI L31 NO 4 to 1 0 L724007 10 to 16 43 PO 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 4 25 to 35 9 0 to 10 0 4 to 2 R L1 S L2 T L3 41 U T1 V T2 W T3 9 0 to 10 0 35 to 50 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 NO 2 to 1 0 L7Z4045 3 PO 4 0 to 5 0 k 25 to 35 9 0 to 10 0 4 to 2 R LI S L
157. a and the INFO Prohibiting Overwriting of Parameters If A1 01 is set to 0 all parameters except A1 01 and A1 04 are write protected U1 LIL1 U2 LIL and U3 OO will be displayed If A1 01 is set to 1 only the parameters A1 01 A1 04 and A2 LILI can be read or written U1 LIL1 U2 O0 and U3 LILI will be displayed All other parameters will not be displayed If one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection is set to 1B write parameters permitted parameters can be written from the digital operator when the terminal that has been set is ON When the set terminal is OFF writing parameters other than the frequency reference is prohibited However the parameters can be read iRRelated Parameters Control Methods Parameter Factory Open Closed Closed No Setting Loop Loop Loop Vector PM A1 01 Parameter access level A A A Vector Vector Setting a Password When a password is set in A1 05 and if the set values in A1 04 and A1 05 do not match only the settings of parameters A1 01 to A1 03 or A2 01 to A2 32 can be modified The setting of all parameters except A1 00 can be prohibited using the password function in combination with setting parameter A1 01 to 0 Monitor only 6 Related Parameters EET Control Methods Parameter Factory Open Closed No Setting Loop Loop Vector Vector A1 01 Parameter access level A1 0
158. anation Digital Operator Display ADV Main Menu 1 Press the MENU Key and select advanced programming mode Programming ADV Initialization 2 Press the DATA ENTER Key UWj 60 i Select Language ADV 3 Press the Increment and Decrement Key until the parameter 03 01 is displayed Copy Func COPY Function tion Selection 0120 Copy Funtion Sel ADV Copy Function Sel 4 Press the DATA ENTER Key and select the function setting display 5 Change the set value to 3 using the Increment Key OP INV VERIFY ADV VERIFY 6 Set the ch d data using the DATA ENTER Key The VERIFY function starts et the changed data using the ey The nction starts DATA VERIFYING 6 ADV VERIFY 7 Ifthe VERIFY function ends normally End is displayed on the Digital Operator VERIFY COMPLETE ADV Copy Function Sel 8 The display returns to 03 01 when a key is pressed 03 j 0o COPY SELECT If an error is displayed press any key to cancel the error display and return to the 03 01 display Refer to page 7 16 Digital Operator Copy Function Faults for corrective actions E Application Precautions Digital Inverter product and type Software number Inverter capacity and voltage class Control method Q When using the copy function check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter dat
159. ange the Inverter s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency This will help to reduce the amount of transistor switching noise nstall an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter s input power terminals nstall an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter s motor terminals Use shielded motor cables or a conduit Metal shields electrical noise Check the grounding of the Inverter and motor Separate main circuit wires from control circuit wires If the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates When the Inverter is Running The Inverter s output is pulse modulated 1 e the output voltage consists of high frequency pulses PWM This high frequency signal causes a certain amount of leakage current which may cause the earth leakage breaker to operate and cut off the power supply Change to a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level i e a sensitivity current of 200 mA or higher with an operating time of 0 1 s or more and one which incorporates high frequencies countermeasures i e one designed for use with Inverters Lower ing the Inverter s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 can also help since the leakage current increases with the cable length If There is Mechanical Oscillation Use the following information when there 1s mechanical vibration BOscillation and hunting occur with V f control The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine Adjust parame
160. annot Reset Detected after a fault when a RESET command is input while the RUN com mand is still active The RUN command has not been removed and a RESET command is input by digital input or by the RESET button on the digital operator Remove the RUN signal first and reset the error Ext Run Active Cannot Reset An inverter fault can t be reset The fault was tried to be reset when a direction signal Up Down was still active Remove the direction signal and retry to reset the fault If the fault reset is handled by a PLC check the sequence Feed forward motor acceleration time active Motor acceleration time calculation was activated by setting n5 05 1 and enabling the inspection input Perform the complete tuning pro cedure Abort the tuning by setting n5 05 0 7 11 7 12 Operator Programming Errors An Operator Programming Error OPE occurs when two or more parameter related to each other are set inap propriate or an individual parameter setting is incorrect The Inverter does not operate until the parameter set ting is set correctly however no other alarm or fault outputs will occur If an OPE occurs change the related parameter by checking the cause shown in Table 7 4 When an OPE error is displayed press the ENTER key to see U1 34 OPE Detected This monitor displays the parameter that is causing the OPE error Display OPEO1 kVA Selection Table 7 4 O
161. atio Sets the division ratio for the PG speed control card pulse output Division ratio 1 n m n 0 or 1 m 1 to 32 The first digit ofthe value of F1 06 stands for n the second and the third stands for m This parameter is effective only when a PG B2 is used The possible division ratio settings are 1 32 lt F1 06 lt 1 1 to 132 Name Display Overspeed detection level PG Overspd Level Overspeed detection delay time PG Overspd Time Description Sets the overspeed detection method Motor speeds that continue to exceed the value set in F1 08 set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency for the time set in F1 09 are detected as overspeed faults Setting Range 0 to 120 Factory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Excessive speed deviation detection level PG Deviate Level Excessive speed deviation detection delay time PG Deviate Time Sets the speed deviation detection method Any speed deviation above the F1 10 set level set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency that continues for the time set in F1 11 is detected as a speed devia tion The speed deviation is the differ ence between actual motor speed and the speed reference command Number of PG gear teeth 1 PG Gear Teeth Number o
162. ax 1A f O t i i 30VDC max 1A i T it i Input option cards E i bj Inverter Ready i i n i i ii i li j Optional control power supply input for Rescue Operation Control Power Supply Input Output option cards Main circuit terminals are indicatied with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicatied with a single circles Shielded wires Twisted pair wires only one of the inputs is closed BB will be displayed in the operator panel and the inverter will not start Fig 2 1 Connection Diagram Model CIMR L7Z43P7 Shown Above Circuit Descriptions Refer to the numbers indicated in Fig 2 These circuits are hazardous and are separated from accessible surfaces by protective separation These circuits are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation These circuits may be interconnected with SELV or equivalent or non SELV circuits but not both Inverters supplied by a four wire system source neutral grounded These circuits are SELV circuits and are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation These circuits may only be interconnected with other SELV or equivalent circuits Inverters supplied by a three wire system source ungrounded or corner grounded These circuits are not separated from hazardous
163. ax frequency Hz i E 0 to 10 V possible Output Freq quency P oor 7 A Output current 10 V Inverter rated output U1 03 Monitors the output current CUT 01A A A A A 4H P O to 10 V absolute value Output Current output Control method i U1 04 Displaysithe current control Nis orbe GLAD A A A A 43H Control Method method 0 01 Mot d A A ea a Monitors the detected motor 10 V Max frequency Hz U1 05 n 0 to 10 V possible No 44H Motor Speed iio uot A U1 06 Output voltage Monitors the output voltage 10 V 200 VAC 400 VAC oiv A A A A 45H Output Voltage reference value 0 to 10 V output 1 eee DC bus voltage Monitors the main DC bus 10 V 400 VDC 800 VDC roe X aci DC Bus Voltage voltage 0 to 10 V output Output power 10 V Inverter capacity U1 08 Monitors the output power max applicable motor capac 0 1 A A A A 47H internally detected value ity kW Output kWatts 0 to 10 V possible Torque reference Monitors the internal torque U1 09 Torque reference value for open vec s i rr 0 1 No A A A 48H Reference tor control B P Name Display Input terminal status Input Term Sts Description Shows input ON OFF status UI 1OStiiiiie C1 FWD command S1 is ON REV command S2 is ON Multi input 1 S3 is ON Multi input 2 S4 is ON Multi input 3 S5 is ON Multi input 4 S6 is ON Multi
164. aximum output frequency can be set up to 120Hz Setting the output frequency too high can damage the 1 0 machine So pay attention to the mechanical system and observe required limits for the output frequency EDC Injection Braking If the DC Injection Braking Current or the Braking Time are set too high the motor can overheat what can damage the motor 10 2 BAcceleration Deceleration Times The motor s acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor the load torque and the load s inertial moment GD 4 If the stall prevention functions are activated during accelera tion or deceleration it might be necessary to increase the acceleration or deceleration time To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter Handling Observe the following precautions during wiring or maintenance of an Inverter BWiring Check The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U V or W Check wiring for any mistakes before supplying power Check all wiring and control sequences carefully iaMagnetic Contactor Installation If a magnetic contactor is installed in the power supply line do not exceed one start per hour Switching more often can damage the inrush current prevention circuit iMMaintenance and Inspections After turning OFF the main circuit power supply it can take several minutes before the DC b
165. be correspondent wiht the relevant directives and standards Relevant guidelines like Low Voltage Direc tives Machinery Directives Emc Directives and other s are to be kept The Inverters may be put into operation when the systems and machines in whitch they are inrested to the guidelines and laws correspondent CE marking is carried out to EN 50178 using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appro priate installation instructions B3 Transportation and storage The instructions for transportation storage and proper handling must be followed in accordance with the tech nical data 4 Installation Install and cool the inverters as specified in the documentation The cooling air must flow in the specified direction The inverter may therefore only be operated in the specified position e g upright Maintain the specified clearances Protect the inverters against impermissible loads Components must not be bent nor insu lation clearances changed To avoid damage being caused by static electricity do not touch any electronic components or contacts E5 Electrical Connection Carry out any work on live equipment in compliance with the national safety and accident prevention regula tions Carry out electrical installation in compliance with the relevant regulations In particular follow the installation instructions ensuring electromagnetic compatibility EMC e g shielding grounding filter VIII arran
166. bled and whether the SE1 fault is reset automatically or if has to be reset manually iRelated Parameters Control Methods Change Closed Loo Operation Loop Loop VY Vector Vector PM road during Open Closed Selects how a SEI fault is reset 0 Manual Reset 1 Automatic reset at stop 2 No SEI detection E Multi function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Control Methods Closed Function Open Closed den Loop Loop Vector Vector Vector PM Motor contactor answer back Yes Yes Yes 6 53 SE1 fault SE1 Contactor Feed back Faults There are 3 possible fault conditions Case 1 The motor contactor was closed Contactor feedback input was on before the contactor close command was output Case 2 The motor contactor cannot be closed within the contactor close delay time Case 3 The motor contactor is opened during inverter run Case 4 The contactor confirmation input was enabled before the contactor close output was set DC Injection i Zero Servo Speed Run Delay Up DownSpeed Inverter enable D I Speed Selection Contactor Control D O Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Contactor confirmation D I Changing the PG direction A digital input can be used to change over the PG feedback signal direction Therefore one of the parameters H1 O0 must be set to 89 6 The PG direction is clockwise
167. c tive only if paramter S3 01is set to 2 Advanced short floor opera tion enabled Distance calcu lation accelera tion time gain Tacc Gain Sets the acceleration time gain for the optimal speed calculation of the advanced short floor function Distance calcu lation decelera tion time gain Tdec Gain Sets the deceleration time gain for the optimal speed calculation of the advanced short floor function 150 0 Distance calcu lation decelera tion time gain Sets the deceleration time gain for the optimal speed calculation of the advanced short floor function 150 0 Light Load Direction Search Method LLS method sel Selects the light load direction search method 0 Motor Current comparison 1 Regenerative direction detec tion Motor Autotuning T BT1 Autotuning 1 Name Display Autotuning mode selection Tuning Mode Sel Description Sets the autotuning mode 0 Rotating autotuning 1 Non rotating autotuning 2 Non rotating autotuning for line to line resistance only 4 Encoder offset tuning Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Closed Loop Vector Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Motor output power Mtr Rated Power Sets the output power of the motor in kilowatts Motor rated volt age Rated Voltage Sets the rated vol
168. compensation H3 15 1 one of the input channels Ch2 or Ch3 of an AI 14B option card can be used when the input function for is set to Torque Compensation H3 05 or H3 09 14 The setting of b1 01 has no influence here Brake Sequence The figure below shows the timing chart for this brake sequence 1 Selected Speed 8 i l i i i i Loc i B NE ion 1 04 i i S1 05 iB 3 t KL Zero speed z Torque compensation f Zero servo tz 8 f io z i contrlatstart fade out level 1 29 Leveling Speed control atstop gj G 8j Speed 300 Torque 4 i 1 Torque compensation fade i Comp out using S1 30 when S1 29 ts is reached H S1 07 Brake close delay time Torque comp i level at start i Torque Comp increase time 1 22 RUN Inverter Hardware BB D _ 73 i i i Contactor Control DIO 0 Contactor Confirmation D I Brake Open Command n 2 Bo t4 i t5 4 7 i 19 Fig 6 3 Timing chart of Brake sequence with torque compensation at start 6 6 15 6 16 The timing chart above is divided in time zones The following table explains the sequence in each time zone Timing Description The inverter gets the direction signal UP DOWN The inverter gets the hardware base block signal disable signal Not BB condition The inverter receives the speed reference signal The inverter sets the contactor close signal The inve
169. cription 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 0010 1111 1111 1111 1101 0111 1111 1111 1110 1010 0000 0000 0001 1101 1111 1111 1111 0110 1111 1111 1111 1010 0000 0000 0001 1100 1111 1111 1110 01100111 1111 1111 0011 0011 1111 1111 1010 0000 0000 0001 1001 0011 1111 1110 0100 1001 1111 1111 0010 0100 1111 1111 1010 0000 0000 0001 1000 0100 1111 1110 0100 0010 0111 1111 0010 0001 0011 1111 1010 0000 0000 0001 1000 0001 0011 1110 0000 0011 1000 0001 0011 1101 0100 0000 1001 1110 1010 0000 0000 0001 1110 0000 1001 1111 0111 0000 0100 1111 1010 0000 0000 0001 1101 0000 0100 1110 0110 1000 0010 0111 0011 0100 0001 0011 1010 0000 0000 0001 1001 0100 0001 0010 0100 1010 0000 1001 0010 0101 0000 0100 1010 0000 0000 0001 1000 0101 0000 0101 0100 0010 1000 0010 1010 0000 0000 0001 1110 0010 1000 0011 0111 0001 0100 0001 1010 0000 0000 0001 1101 0001 0100 0000 DIH 40H Higher Lower Byte Byte Initial value Address ExOr Result Shift 1 ExOr Result Shift 2 ExOr Result Shift 3 Shift 4 ExOr Result Shift 5 Shift 6 ExOr Result Shift 7 Shift 8 ExOr Result Function Code ExOr Result 6 Shift 1 ExOr Result Shift 2 ExOr Result Shift 3 Shift 4 ExOr Result Shift 5 Shift 6 ExOr Result Shift 7 ExOr Result Shift 8 ExOr Result CRC 16 Result 6 85 6 86 BMEMOBUS Message Example An example of MEMOBUS command response messages is given below
170. ction 0 02 06 Operation selection when digital operator LED monitor is disconnected 0 02 07 Cumulative operation time setting 0 hr 02 08 Cumulative operation time selection 0 02 09 Initialize Mode 2 02 10 Fan operation time setting 0 hr 02 12 Fault trace initialize 0 02 15 No of Travels monitor initialize 0 03 01 Copy function selection 0 03 02 Read permission selection 0 S1 01 Zero speed level at stop 0 5 Hz 81 02 DC injection braking current at start 50 S1 03 DC injection braking current at stop 50 S1 04 DC injection braking time at start 0 40 sec 1 05 DC injection braking time at stop 0 60 S1 06 Brake release delay time 0 20 S1 07 Brake close delay time 0 10 S1 14 SE2 detection delay time 200 msec S1 15 SE3 detection delay time 200 msec S1 16 Run delay time 0 10 sec S1 17 DC injection current gain at regenerative operation 100 S1 18 DC injection current gain at motoring operation 20 S1 19 Output contactor open delay time 0 10 sec S1 20 Zero servo gain 5 81 21 Zero servo completion width 10 81 22 Starting torque compensation increase time 500 msec 81 23 Torque compensation gain during lowering 1 000 1 24 Torque compensation bias during raising 0 0 1 25 Torque compensation bias during lowering 0 0 S1 26 Dwell speed at start reference 0 0 Hz S1 27 Door zone speed level 0 0 Hz 1 28 SEI detection selection 0 1 29 Torque compensation fade out level 0 0 Hz S1 30 Torque compensation fade out ti
171. cuit a magnetic contactor can be used The following things should be considered The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor may cause an Inverter fault Do not exceed one power up per hour When the Inverter is operated using the Digital Operator automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block The input power supply can be connected in any sequence to the terminals R S or T on the terminal block the input phase sequence is irrelevant to the output phase sequence Installing an Input AC Reactor If the Inverter is connected to a large capacity power transformer 600 kW or more or a phase advancing capacitor is switched nearby an excessive peak current could flow through the input power circuit causing an inverter damage As a countermeasure an optional AC Reactor the inverter input or a DC reactor at the DC reactor connection terminals can be installed In order to fulfill the EN12015 an AC reactor has to be installed Refer to Chapter 9 AC Reactors for EN 12015 Compatibility for the available reactors The AC reactor has to be installed between the power supply and the EMC filter like shown in Fig 2 5 Power AC Supply Reactor L1 TY Y Inverter L3 fy yyy Fig 2 5 AC reactor installation
172. d see the fig below The inverter stops when the leveling signal or the Up Down signal is removed DC Injection zero servo DC Injection zero servo Speed Hardware BB Up Donw G Leveling speed No effect Selected speed Input is set The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs Terminal function Nominal Intermed Speed Speed 1 d1 09 d1 10 Intermed Intermed Speed 2 d1 11 Speed 3 d1 12 Relevel Leveling Speed Speed d1 13 d1 17 Nominal Speed command H1 L1L1 80 1 0 1 0 0 0 Intermediate speed command H1 LIL1 81 Releveling speed command H1 LI1L1 82 0 0 Leveling speed command H1 L1L1 83 0 disabled 1 enabled X no meaning 0 0 X Higher Speed Priority is Selected and a Leveling Speed Input is Not Selected H1 O0 83 When the leveling speed command is not selected for any digital input the inverter decelerates to the leveling speed d1 17 when the selected speed signal is removed Inspection Speed can not be selected as travel speed To select the leveling speed as travel speed the frequency reference loss detection must be disabled S3 09 0 The inverter stops when the direction signal Up Down is removed When no speed selection input is set t
173. d DATA signal wiring Switch off the power supply Check if the correct PG constant F1 01 and Does a OPEO2 fault absolute encoder resolution F1 21 has been set occur Refer to page 7 12 Operator Programming Errors and eliminate the fault source Set mechanical constants S3 13 Traction sheave diameter S3 15 Gear ratio 3 14 Roping Open the brake close the motor contactor turn the motor slowly in Forward direction and check monitor U1 05 Does PGO no Check the wiring encoder feedback Check readjust the encoder occur power supply Is the sign of the Check the encoder wiring U1 05 value positive Change parameter F1 05 not Set the autotuning parameters T1 01 0 Rotational Tuning T2 04 Motor rated current T2 01 Motor rated power T2 05 Motor pole number T2 02 Motor base frequency T2 09 Encoder resolution T2 03 Motor rated voltage T2 10 Motor voltage constant Press the UP button until the Tuning Ready display appears Refer to page 7 14 Auto tuning Faults Close the motor contactor s and press the RUN button dd Wait until tuning is finsihed and eliminate the fault source No Fault code is displayed Forward direction means The direction the motor turns with an UP command at terminal S1 i e with a clockwise rotating 3 phase supply and U U V V W W wiring between inverter and motor Usually the direction is clockwise seen from the motor
174. d check the speed again Always make sure that the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency does not exceed the tolerance of the machine The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant torque range and fixed output range Slip compensation limit E1 04 E1 06 x C3 03 C3 03 Output frequency EE E1 04 E1 06 Base frequency E1 04 Maximum output frequency Fig 6 9 Slip Compensation Limit iEnable the Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration C3 04 Enables or disables the slip compensation function during regenerative operation The factory setting 1s enabled BOperation Selection when the Output Voltage is Saturated C3 05 Generally the Inverter cannot output a voltage that is higher than the input voltage If in the high speed range the output voltage reference for the motor monitor parameter U1 06 exceeds the input voltage the output voltage becomes saturated and inverter cannot respond to speed or load changes This function automatically reduces the output voltage to avoid voltage saturation Thereby the speed control accuracy can be maintained even at high speeds around the rated speed of the motor By the lowered voltage the current can be around 10 higher compared to the operation without volt age limiter Torque Compensation Function Adjustments The torque compensation function detects a rising motor load and increases the output torque
175. dedicated speed inputs the value of parameter d1 09 is taken as nomi nal speed The set value of S3 05 has no meaning The nominal leveling speed detection must not be used iAdvanced Short Floor Operation Setup The advanced short floor operation can be activated by setting parameter S3 01 to 2 f parameter d1 18 is set to 0 or 3 multispeed input the speed reference value which was selected at the start is taken as nominal speed for the speed pattern calculation Parameter S3 04 is used for the leveling speed detection refer to page 6 f parameter d1 18 is set to 1 or 2 dedicated speed input the value of parameter d1 09 is taken as nominal speed for the speed pattern calculation Setup the Acceleration and Deceleration Gain S3 21 S3 22 These parameters are used for the optimal speed calculation to compensate the S curves S curves are not con sidered in the optimal speed calculation ncrease the gains S3 21 and S3 22 if the leveling time is too short or the calculated optimal speed is too high e Decreases the gains S3 21 and S3 22 if the leveling time is too short of the calculated optimal speed is too low gt 1 S Curves are not considered in the optimal speed calculation and have to be compensated by the P 4 gains S3 21 and S3 22 A 2 A too low gain setting can result in a too high optimal speed and too short leveling time Very low ah OPE settings can lead to an overrun Do not set the values lower tha
176. diameter Sheave diameter Sets the diameter of the traction sheave 5 51 5 52 Name Display Roping Roping Ratio Description Sets the roping ratio of the eleva tor 1 1 1 2 1 2 Factory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Gear Ratio Gear Ratio Sets the mechanical gear ratio Over accelera tion detection level Over Acc Det Lvl Sets the maximum car accelera tion value Ifthe acceleration rate is higher that this value the inverter trips with an over acceleration fault DV6 Over accelera tion decelera tion time constant Over Acc Det Fil Sets the time for which an over acceleration must be detected before the inverter stops with an over acceleration fault DV6 Over accelera tion detection method selec tion Over Acc Det Sel Selects wether the over accelera tion detection is always active or during run only 0 Detection during power on 1 Detection during run only Inspection speed upper limit Inspection UpLmt Sets the upper frequency limit for the inspection speed detection if multi speed operation is selected d1 18 0 or 3 Short floor min imum constant speed time ShortF2 MinTime Sets the minimal constant speed time for the advanced short floor function The parameter is effe
177. e Display iTorque Detection L6 Description Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Torque detection selec tion 1 Torq Det 1 Sel 0 Torque detection disabled 1 Car stuck detection only with speed agreement operation continues warning is output 2 Car stuck detected continu ously during operation opera tion continues warning is output 3 Car stuck detection only with speed agreement output stopped upon detection 4 Car stuck detected continu ously during operation output stopped upon detection 5 Undertorque detection only with speed agreement opera tion continues warning is out put 6 Undertorque detected continu ously during operation opera tion continues warning is output 7 Undertorque detection only with speed agreement output stopped upon detection 8 Undertorque detected continu ously during operation output stopped upon detection Torque detection level 1 Torq Det 1 Lvl Vector control Motor rated torque is set as 100 V f control Inverter rated current is set as 100 Torque detection time 1 Torq Det 1 Time Sets the overtorque undertorque detection time Torque detection selection 2 Torq Det 2 Sel Torque detection level 2 Torq Det 2 Lvl Torque detection time 2 Torq Det 2
178. e 1 1 50sec Main Menu Quick Setting Fig 3 7 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode iSetting Parameters Here the procedure to change C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 from 1 5 s to 2 5 s is shown Table 3 3 Setting Parameters in Advanced Programming Mode Digital Operator Display DRIVE Frequency Ref y U1 i9j 50 00Hz 02 50 00Hz 03 10 05A Description Power supply turned ON DRIVE Main Menu Operation 3 QUICK Main Menu Quick Setting ADV Main Menu Press the MENU key 3 times to enter the advanced programming mode Press the DATA ENTER to access the monitor display 1 50sec Accel Time 1 Press the Increment or Decrement key to display the parameter C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 ADV Accel Time 1 C1 01 g01 50sec Press the DATA ENTER key to access the setting display The cur rent setting value of C1 01 is displayed ADV Accel Time 1 Press the Shift RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right Press the Increment key to change set value to 2 50 s ADV Accel Time 1 C1 01 004 50sec 0 00 600 0 1 50sec Press the DATA ENTER key to save the set data ADV Entry Accepted Entry Accepted is displayed for 1 sec after pressing the DATA ENTER key ADV Accel Time 1 C1 0 00 1 5 3 10 The display returns to the monitor display for C1 0
179. e a staring jerk caused by high static friction After a start command the output frequency is increased up to the Dwell speed set in parameter S1 26 using the acceleration time C1 07 As soon as the motor starts turning and the motor speed PG feedback reaches the acceleration time switching level C1 11 the acceleration is continued using the selected acceleration time starting with the S curve set in parameter C2 01 Fig 6 5 Dwell at start function Note When C1 11 is set much higher than 1 26 the motor speed cannot reach C1 11 and the motor can not accelerate to the selected speed Therefore always set C1 11 equal or lower than S1 26 6 21 Acceleration and S curve Settings Five different S curve times are used to reduce the jerk when the speed changes iRRelated Parameters Control Methods Parameter Factory Open Closed No Setting Loop Loop Vector Vector C2 01 S curve characteristic time at acceleration start 0 5s Q Q C2 02 S curve characteristic time at acceleration end 0 5 s C2 04 S curve characteristic time at deceleration end 0 55 Q Q C2 03 S curve characteristic time at deceleration start 0 55 Q Q Q Q Q Q C2 05 S curve characteristic time below leveling 0 55 Fig 6 6 shows the influence of the different S curve times Leveling Speed 6 Fig 6 6 S curve settings Output Speed Hold Dwell Function The dwell function holds the speed tempo
180. e characteristic time at acceleration start 0 5 sec C2 02 S curve characteristic time at acceleration end 0 5 sec C2 03 S curve characteristic time at deceleration start 0 5 sec C2 04 S curve characteristic time at deceleration end 0 5 sec C2 05 S curve Characteristic time below leveling speed 0 50 sec C3 01 Slip compensation gain 1 0 C3 02 Slip compensation delay time 2000 msec C3 03 Slip compensation limit 200 1 0 C3 04 Slip compensation selection during regeneration 1 C3 05 Output voltage limit operation selection 1 eS C4 01 Torque compensation gain 1 00 C4 02 Torque compensation delay time constant 200 msec C4 03 Starting torque compensation FWD 0 0 C4 04 Starting torque compensation REV 0 0 C4 05 Starting torque compensation time constant 10 msec 10 5 10 6 Factory No Name Setting Setting C5 01 ASR proportional P gain 1 40 C5 02 ASR integral I time 1 0 51 C5 03 ASR proportional P gain 2 20 C5 04 ASR integral I time 2 0 51 C5 06 ASR delay time 0 004 msec C5 07 ASR switching frequency 0 0 Hz C5 08 ASR integral T limit 400 C5 09 ASR proportional P gain 3 40 00 C5 10 ASR integral 1 time 3 0 500 sec C5 15 ASR gain P during encoder offset tuning 5 00 C6 02 Carrier frequency selection 1 C6 06 PWM
181. e checksum is calculated in the following way 1 The starting value of the 16 Bit data word that is used for the calculation has to be set to FFFFH 2 An Exclusive OR operation has to be performed with the starting value and the slave address 3 The result has to be shifted to the right until the overflow bit becomes 1 4 When this bit becomes 1 an Exclusive OR operation with the result of step 3 and the fix value A001H has to be performed 5 After 8 shift operations every time when the overflow bit becomes 1 an Exclusive OR like in step 4 has to be done perform an Exclusive OR operation with the result of the former operations and the next data package 8 bit function code Again the result of this operation has to be shifted 8 times and if needed it has to be interconnected with the fix value A001H using an Exclusive OR operation 6 The same steps have to be performed with the data first with the higher byte and then with the lower byte until all data are proceeded 7 The result of these operations is the checksum It consists of a high and a low byte The following example clarifies the calculation method It shows the calculation of a CRC 16 code with the slave address 02H 0000 0010 and the function code 03H 0000 0011 The resulting CRC 16 code is DIH for the lower and 40H for the higher byte The example calculation in this example is not done completely normally data would follow the function code Calculations Des
182. e display unit and the setting range for the times can be selected between 0 0 sec or 0 00 sec Related Parameters Control Methods Closed Loop Vector PM Q Parameter Factory Open Closed No Setting E S Loop Loop Vector Vector Acceleration time 1 Deceleration time 1 Acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2 Acceleration time 3 Deceleration time 3 Acceleration time 4 Deceleration time 4 oQ o0 0 0 0000 PL P gt gt gt gt elo Acceleration deceleration time setting unit O gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Ol O gt gt gt gt gt gt gt O O gt gt gt gt gt gt gt O 6 Deceleration time switching frequency Dwell at start speed reference Multi function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Control Methods Open Closed Closed Loop Loop Loop Wenn Vector Vector PM Function Acceleration Deceleration switch over 1 Acceleration Deceleration switch over 2 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units Set the acceleration deceleration time number od decimals using C1 10 The factory setting is 1 Set value Details 0 The acceleration deceleration time setting range is 0 00 to 6000 0 in units of 0 01 s 1 The acceleration deceleration time setting rang
183. e for the tuning e 3 After the run in both directions is finished parameter n5 05 is automatically set back to 0 IMPORTANT 4 The autotuning will be performed only if the inspection speed input is set 5 Do not change the mechanical constants load inertia between the runs Automatic Current Regulator ACR Tuning The ACR controller consists of two PI control loops one for the d axis and one for the q axis current The ACR parameters can be accessed in the Closed Loop Vector control for PM mode only Related Parameters Change Open Closed Closed Loop during Loop Loop Wein Parameter Factory No setting operation Vector Vector PM ACR q axis proportional gain 1000 rad s ACR q axis integral time 10 0 ms ACR d axis proportional gain 1000 rad s ACR d axis integral time 10 0 ms E Adjustments Normally there is no need to change these values However if short cycle vibrations occur which can t be eliminated by the ASR controller setup it might help to adjust ACR values like follows 6 36 fthe motor generates very strange high frequency noise not carrier frequency related reduce both ACR gains n8 29 and n8 32 for the same value If the gain 1s reduced too much the performance will be reduced f vibrations occur reduce both integral times n9 30 and n9 33 for the same value AID Conversion Delay Time Tuning The A D conversion delay time
184. e has priority 3 Use multi speed reference With no speed selected the up down signal is switched off selection SpeedPriority Sel Second motor speed Sets the speed reference if motor Spd Door 2 is selected Motor The unit is set in 01 03 frequency units of reference setting and monitor default 0 01 Hz If the display unit is changed the setting range values also change 2 The maximum setting value depends on the setting of the maximum output frequency E1 04 5 19 5 20 Field Forcing d6 Name Display Field forc ing function selection Field Force Sel Description Enables or disables field forcing func tion 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Setting Range Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Field forc ing function Limit FieldForce Limit Sets the upper limit for the excitation current applied by the field forcing function A setting of 100 is equal to the motor no load current Field forcing is active during all types of operation except DC Injection Name Display Input voltage setting Input Voltage Motor Parameters E B V f Pattern 1 E1 Description Sets the Inverter input voltage This setting is used as a reference value for protection functions Fac tory Setting Cont
185. e is 0 00 to 600 00 in units of 0 1 s 6 20 iSwitching Over the Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi Function Input Commands When two digital input terminals are set to Accel Decel time switch over 1 and 2 H1 LI1L1 7 and 1A the acceleration deceleration times can be switched over even during operation by a binary combination of the inputs The following table shows the acceleration deceleration time switching combinations Acceleration Deceleration Acceleration Deceleration Time Selection 1 Terminal Time Selection 2 Terminal OFF OFF C1 01 C1 02 ON OFF C1 03 C1 04 OFF ON C1 05 C1 06 ON ON C1 07 C1 08 Acceleration Time Deceleration Time E Automatic Deceleration Time Switch Over Using a Speed Level The deceleration times C1 02 and C1 08 can be switched over automatically at a certain speed which can be set in parameter C1 11 Fig 6 4 shows the working principle of the function Set C1 11 to a value other than 0 0 Hz If C1 11 is set to 0 0 Hz the function will be disabled Output Frequency Decel time Switching Freq a A ree b C1 11 o ely gt C1 01 C1 02 C1 08 6 When output frequency 2 C1 11the deceleration time 1 C1 02 is used When output frequency C1 11the deceleration time 4 C1 08 is used Fig 6 4 Acceleration deceleration Time Switching Frequency BDwell at Start Function Closed Loop Vector only The Dwell function can be used to reduc
186. e is insufficient If the parameters are correct and there is no fault but the torque is insufficient consider increasing the motor and inverter capacity The torque limit has been reached When a torque limit is reached L7 01 to L7 04 the motor torque will be limited This can lengthen the decel eration time Check the L7 OO parameters to be sure that the torque limit values are suitable If the Motor Overheats The following causes are possible The load is too large If the motor load is too large and the torque exceeds the motor s rated torque the motor may overheat Either reduce the load or increase the acceleration deceleration times Also consider increasing the motor size BThe ambient temperature is too high The motor rating 1s determined by a particular ambient operating temperature range The motor will overheat if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment where the maximum ambient operating tempera ture is exceeded Lower the motor s ambient temperature to an acceptable value BAuto tuning has not been performed for vector control The Vector control performance may not be optimal if auto tuning has not been performed Perform auto tun ing or set the motor parameters manually For induction motors alternatively the V f control mode can be used 7 20 _ If Peripheral Devices are Influenced by the Starting or Running Inverter The following solutions are possible Ch
187. e maximum frequency Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM ASR delay time ASR Delay Time Sets the filter time constant the time from the speed loop to the torque com mand output Usually changing this set ting is not necessary ASR switching fre quency ASR Gain SW Freq Sets the frequency for switching between Proportion Gain 1 2 3 and Integral Time 1 2 3 ASR proportional P gain 3 ASR P Gain 3 ASR integral I time 3 ASR I Time 3 Set the proportional gain 3 and the inte gral time 3 of the speed control loop ASR for the minimum frequency The settings becomes active for deceler ation only Nominal speed ref erence Nomin Speed vn Sets the frequency reference when the nominal speed is selected by a digital input Inspection speed reference Inspect Speed vi Sets the frequency reference when the inspection speed is selected by a digital input Leveling speed ref erence Level Speed v1 Sets the frequency reference when the leveling speed is selected by a digital input Input voltage set ting Input Voltage Sets the inverter input voltage This set value will be the basis for the protection functions 5 6 Name Display Max output fre quency FM
188. e set value should be calcu late the motor test report line to line resistance value and the following formula E type insulation Line to line resistance Q at 75 C of test report x 0 92 Q B type insulation Line to line resistance Q at 75 C of test report x 0 92 Q F type insulation Line to line resistance Q at 115 C of test report x 0 87 Q Motor Leak Inductance Setting E2 06 E4 06 Set the amount of voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance in E2 06 as a percentage of the motor rated voltage If the inductance is not written on the motor nameplate consult the motor manufacturer Motor Iron Saturation Coefficients 1 and 2 Settings E2 07 08 E2 07 and E2 08 are set automatically during rotating autotuning Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Setting E2 10 E2 10 is displayed only in V f control method and can be set to increase the torque compensation accuracy Motor Setting 1 2 Switch Over Refer to page 6 55 Motor 2 Selection Setting Motor Parameters for PM Motors The autotuning with rotating motor can be used to let the inverter measure the voltage constant the line to line resistance and the q and d axis inductances and the encoder offset refer to page 4 7 Autotuning Procedure with PM Motors It can be performed only if the motor can rotate freely removed ropes and open brake If the autotuning can not be performed for any reason the following motor parameters must be set manually
189. e terminal cover mount the Digital Operator LED Monitor onto the Inverter using the fol lowing procedure 1 Hook the Digital Operator LED Monitor at A two locations on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration 2 Press the Digital Operator LED Monitor in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B two loca tions Fig 1 15 Mounting the Digital Operator LED Monitor 1 14 gt 1 Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator LED Monitor or mount or remove the front cover using meth p a ods other than those described above otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect i contact MS Hes 2 Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator LED Monitor attached to the front cover Imperfect contact can result Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first and then attach the Digital Operator LED Moni tor to the front cover Inverters of 22 kW or More For inverters with an output of 22 kW or more remove the terminal cover and then use the following proce dures to remove the Digital Operator LED Monitor and front cover iRemoving the Digital Operator LED Monitor Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18 5 kW or less iRemoving the Front Cover Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2 Fig 1 16 Removing the Fron
190. e these parameters in the param eter data area an ENTER command must be used There are two types of ENTER commands ENTER commands that enable parameter data in RAM only changes will be lost after power loss ENTER commands that write data into the EEPROM non volatile memory of the Inverter and enable the data in RAM at the same time Register Address Contents 0900H Write parameter data to EEPROM RAM is refreshed 0910H Parameter data are not written to EEPROM but refreshed in RAM only An ENTER command is performed by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0910H R p I IMPORTANT The EEPROM can be written up to 100 000 times only Do not frequently execute ENTER commands 0900H which write into the EEPROM The ENTER command registers are write only registers Consequently if these registers are read out error code 02H is returned An ENTER command is not required if reference or broadcast data are sent to the inverter Communication Error Codes The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes Error Code Contents Function code error 01H A function code other than 03H 08H or 10H has been set by the PLC Invalid register number error The specified register address does not exist With broadcast sending a start address other than 0001H or 0002H has been set Invalid quantity error The number of data packets register content being read or writte
191. eady Setting 6 If a multifunction output is set to this function the output is switched ON when the initialisation of the inverter at startup has been finished without any faults iDuring DC Bus Undervoltage Setting 7 Ifa multifunction output is set to this function the output is switched ON as long as a DC bus under voltage is detected iDuring Baseblock Setting 8 Ifa multifunction output is set to this function the output is switched ON as long as the inverter output is base blocked iFrequency Reference Source Selection Setting 9 If a multifunction output is set to this function the output is ON when the digital operator is selected as fre quency reference source If any other frequency reference is selected the output is switched OFF ERun Command Selection Status Setting A If a multifunction output is set to this function the output is switched ON when the digital operator is selected as RUN command source If any other RUN command source is selected the output is switched OFF BFault Output Setting E If a multifunction output is set to this function the output 1s switched ON when any fault different from CPFO00 and CPFO1 occurs The output is also not switched at minor faults Refer to page 7 2 Fault Detection pp for a fault list iMinor Fault Output Setting 10 6 If a multifunction output is set to this function the output is switched ON when a minor fault occurs refer to fF page 7 9 Alarm
192. ecel Time 2 C1 02 8 02 0sec 0 00 600 0 1 50sec E1 01 E90VAC 310 510 380VAC 0 80 16 00 7 00 3 11 Autotuning Mode Autotuning automatically measures and sets the required motor data in order to achieve the maximum perfor mance Always perform autotuning before starting operation when using the vector control modes When V f control has been selected stationary autotuning for line to line resistance can be selected only When the motor cannot be operated e g if the ropes cannot be removed from the traction sheave and Open Loop or Closed Loop Vector Control shall be used perform stationary autotuning iExample of Operation for V f control The tuning method for V f control is fixed to the measurement of the terminal resistance T1 01 1 Input the the rated output power and the rated current specified on the nameplate of the motor and then press the RUN 3 key The motor data are measured automatically Always set the above items Otherwise autotuning cannot be started e g it cannot be started from the motor 5 rated voltage input display A parameter can be changed from the setting displays using the Increment Decrement and Shift RESET keys The parameter is saved when the DATA ENTER key is pressed The following flowchart shows a V f control Autotuning example Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display Modified Consts MENU Main Menu Auto Tun
193. econdary cur rent of motor 10 V to 10 V Slip compensa tion value Slip comp value Monitors the slip compensation value 100 is displayed for rated slip 10 V Rated slip of motor 10 V to 10 V Max Current during accelera tion MaxCur rent Acc Monitors the maximum current during acceleration 10 V Rated current of motor 0 V to 10 V Max Current during decelera tion MaxCur rent Dec Monitors the maximum current during deceleration 10 V Rated current of motor 0 V to 10 V Max Current during Top speed MaxCur retn Run Monitors the maximum current at top speed 10 V Rated current of motor 0 V to 10 V Max Current during leveling speed Max Amp at Vl sped Monitors the maximum current at VI speed 10 V Rated current of motor 0 V to 10 V Number of trav els No of travels Monitors the lift operation counter Using parameter O2 15 the counter can be cleared Cannot be output AI 14B channel 1 input level AI 14 Chl InpLvl Monitors the input level of ana log input 1 on a AI 14B option board A value of 100 is equal to 10V input 10 V 100 10 to 10 V Car acceleration rate Cage accel Shows the elevator car acceler ation rate value 10V 9 8 m s 10V to 10 V q axis motor current refer ence Iq Reference Monitors the q axis current ref erence 10 V Motor
194. ecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling Always remove the cover from the Inverter after the completion of the installation Otherwise ventilation will be reduced causing the Inverter to overheat 1 10 Installation Orientation and Space Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect When installing the Inverter always pro vide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation 1 s e IMPORTANT il f 120 mm min Horizontal Space Vertical Space hee oe wee oe ee ee Selene 200V class inverter 3 7 to 55 kW 50 120 400V class inverter 3 7 to 55 kW ici Zn Fig 1 10 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space 1 The same space is required horizontally and vertically for IP00 IP20 and NEMA 1 Inverters 2 Always remove the top protection cover after installing an Inverter with an output of 18 5 kW or less in a panel Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing an Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel MEY Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals Y a Z Before opening the terminal cover switch off the power supply and wait at least 5 min to make sure that e the DC bus is dischar
195. ection 4 i Setting Precautions With L4 01 an absolute speed agreement level is set i e a speed agreement is detected in both directions Up and Down e With L4 03 a signed speed agreement level is set i e a speed agreement is detected only in the set direc tion positive level Up direction negative level gt Down direction 6 26 i Time Charts The following table shows the time charts for each of the speed agreement functions Related parameter L4 01 Speed Agree Level L4 02 Speed Agree Width L4 03 Speed Agree Level L4 04 Speed Agree Width fret fout Agree fref fout Agree 1 Frequency reference pennan Y Output frequency or motor speed L4 02 freffout Agree 1 or o Multi function output setting 2 fref four Agree 2 Frequency reference Output frequency or motor speed L4 04 fretlfout Agree2 OFF oN Multi function output setting 13 fout feet Agree 1 ON at the following conditions during frequency agree L4 02 Output fre quency or motor speed oFF On fout fset Agree 1 Multi function output setting 3 f out If set Agree 2 ON at the following conditions during frequency agree L4 04 Output fre quency or motor speed OFF ov ON fou fse Agree 2 Multi function output setting 14 Frequency Detection Frequency FOUT Detection 1 L4 01 gt Output frequency
196. ects the heatsink temperature When the overheat temperature level is reached the inverter output is switched off To prevent a sudden and unexpected stop of the inverter due to an over temperature an overheat pre alarm can be output The temperature level for that pre alarm can be set in parameter L8 02 Using parameter L8 03 the inverter operation when an over temperature occurs can be selected If a multifunction output is set to this function the output is switched ON when the heatsink temperature exceeds the overheat pre alarm level set in L8 02 iRelated Parameters Control Methods Change during Operation Parameter Factory No Setting Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Overheat pre alarm level 95 C 1 A A Inverter overheat OH pre alarm operation selection 3 A A The factory setting depends on the inverter capacity Multifunction Outputs H2 01 to H2 03 Control Methods Open Closed Closed Loop Loop Loop Weiter Vector Vector PM Set Value Function Inverter overheat OH Yes Yes Yes Input Open Phase Protection This function detects an open input phase by observing the DC bus voltage ripple level iRelated Parameters Control Methods Closed Loop Vector PM L8 05 Input open phase protection selection No A A A Change Parameter i during No Setting o Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector peration
197. ecviexinenesavasansexene 5 18 Motor Parameters E Liegen ee e E ern NE meen 5 21 Option Parameters Bao tene f UA Godin E bipoEUP QU 5 26 Terminal Function Parameters H 5 32 Protection Function Parameters L 5 37 Special Adjustments n2 15 eerie ttti 5 43 PM Motor Adjustments n8 n9 sssssssssss 5 44 Lift Function Parameters S aac icnsionsnerssasnctraaronndseinreteanauns 5 47 Motor Autotuning T ersin 5 53 Monitor Parameters U cis nridicnaenanemianaremnnineeans 5 55 Settings which change with the Control Mode A1 02 5 61 Factory Settings Changing with Inverter Capacity 02 04 5 63 User Parameter Descriptions Description of User Parameter Tables User parameter tables are structured as shown below Here b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection is used as an example Name Display Reference selection Description Sets the frequency reference input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal analog input 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option Card Parameter Number Name Display Description Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Operation Control Methods MEMOBUS Register Page Control Methods MEMO Factory Open Closed on BUS i vel er Reiter PM The number of the
198. ed f L5 05 0 the UV1 fault is treated like set in parameter L5 01 i e the inverter tries to reset UV1 for the number of times set in L5 01 like described above f L5 05 1 the UV1 fault is always automatically reset regardless to the L5 01 setting 6 82 Memobus Communications MEMOBUS Communications Configuration The serial communication can be performed between one PC and one inverter in order to read write parame ters or monitor the drive The inverter can not be controlled by Memobus communications To use the communications port the operator panel must be removed from the inverter The operator panel connector on the inverter side has to be connected to the serial RS 232 port of the PC PLC Communications Specifications The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table Item Specifications Interface RS 232 not isolated Baud rate 9 600 bps ee Data length 8 bits fixed Communications Parameters Parity none Stop bits 1 bit fixed Communications Protocol MEMOBUS Number of Connectable Units 1 iMemobus Operations MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations Monitoring operation status of the inverter Setting and reading parameters for the parameter register numbers refer to the L7Z manual Message Content iaMessage Format In MEMOBUS communications the master sends commands to the slave and the sla
199. eeeees 7 20 Motor torque is insUfficlent s 3t ete rcu Dee Dette ds 7 20 if the Motor Overtisats cene ette tede 7 20 if Peripheral Devices are Influenced by the Starting or Running Inverter 7 21 if the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates When the Inverter is Running 7 21 If There is Mechanical Oscillation e 7 21 8 Maintenance and Inspection 8 1 Maintenance and Inspection ssssssssssssssssssssseeee nere 8 2 4p Periodic Inspection cene subacta ace us tenete born a ah inet eh 8 2 Periodic Maintenance of Parts cccccssecsesecsssecsesecsesecsesecsssecsssecessecssseseesecsesesesescens 8 3 Cooling Fan Replacement ss us cenis Baci es escis diio qd s detis 8 4 Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card c cccccscscssessesessesessesessestssesesssecssesceeeeeees 8 6 9 Specifications Pn 9 1 Inverter Specifications eni cete Re e Tee od e etie s 9 2 9 Specifications by Models iter Dette atenta eR e etatteteneletu at edente 9 2 9 Common Spscificatlans iicet ee tales idit ee 9 4 Derating aces P Avent A aE Ae a an EAE ia evden han encuentra dicen teense 9 6 Ambient Temperature Derating cccccccscessscseecsesecessececseesssecsesecssseceesecneneceesesseses 9 6 9 Carrier Frequency Derating 23 2224 224or tenn eae eee eile tt 9 6 Altit de Darat
200. eeneeeees 6 83 Message Content ccf sien bet ne suh coU ete dad deer e ecu eee oM UE 6 83 inverter Error Codes cr sie iro ne e io te deor tubo tie retten 6 92 V9 ENTER ComMMand coast testa eh te er ME IM E DAE 6 92 Communication Error Codes sy eoe oerte eod e Le o d 6 93 Troubleshooting viscosities iin 7 1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions ccccteceeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeneneeeeeeee 7 2 Fault BISCO oe ecce rate Cnm enda teen nti an Ne stis eae p D end 7 2 9 AjuriDelBclion estes cuee tropic ie MILL IE PLU M ID Ce tae 7 9 Operator Programming Errors fecal c uer M ELE 7 12 De Autodaning Faults en a toe each bl telaio Solos oh cba loro bone 7 14 Digital Operator Copy Function Faults ccccccccccsssssssssescesessessesesteccseeesseeeeseseeeteceeeees 7 16 Machine Data Copy Function Faults ccccccscssssssstssssnsscstsssssesesssssecessscsecseseceteeseeees 7 17 TROUDISSNOQUIAG 2 m 7 18 if A Parameter Cannot Be Sel o aoe ha ae raat be dantes 7 18 If the Motor Does Not Operate Properly ccscccsssssssssssssessessssesssssscarsscssesesneeeescaens 7 19 If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed ccsccscsssssssseescesteeeseseesteeesteneeeens 7 19 If the Motor Stalls or Acceleration is Slow ccscscsssssssssssscssessessesesessesteceseseeseseeseeeeeeee 7 19 if Motor Deceleration is Slow cccccccccscescsssssssessssessasessesesesseseasesestsseeteeseeseseeeeseee
201. eeth has been set the number of motor rotations within the Inverter is calculated MIN using the following formula No of motor rotations r min No of input pulses from PG x 60 F1 01 x F1 13 No of gear teeth on PG side F1 12 No of gear teeth on motor side Setting the Absolute Encoder Resolution F1 21 Ifa Hiperface encoder is used the serial line resolution must be selected by parameter F1 21 according to the encoder data sheet The possible resolution setting depends on the encoder selection n8 35 5 Hiperface B 0 1 or 2 16384 32768 8192 EnDat 2 fixed to 8192 Setting the Magnet Position Offset F1 22 Parameter F1 22 can be used to set the offset between the magnet and the encoder zero position The value is automatically set during the PM motor autotuning or encoder offset auto tuning refer to page 4 8 PM Motor Encoder Offset Tuning e 73 6 74 Fault Detection iRelated Parameters Control Methods Parameter Factory Open Closed No Setting Loop Loop Closed Loop Vector Vector Vector PM F1 02 Operation selection at PG open circuit PGO A A F1 03 Operation selection at overspeed OS F1 04 Operation selection at deviation DEV F1 08 Overspeed detection level F1 09 Overspeed detection time F1 10 Speed deviation detection level F1 11 Speed deviation detection time F1 14 PG open circuit detection delay time F1 18 DV3
202. el autotuning press the STOP key on the Digital Operator DOOM bo e Precautions for rotating and encoder offset autotuning 1 The load should be disconnected which means that the ropes have to be removed and the brake must be open 2 If the load can t be removed the tuning can be done with a balanced car The tuning result accuracy will be lower which can result in a performance loss 3 Make sure that the brake is open during autotuning During autotuning the motor can be started and stopped repeatedly When the tuning is finished END will be displayed in the operator panel Do not touch the motor until this display 1s shown and the motor has completely stopped R Autotuning Procedure with Induction Motors Fig 4 2 shows the autotuning procedure for an induction motor with or without encoder in V f Open loop vector and Closed loop vector control START Set the Base Block Inputs BB and BB1 No A1 02 2 3 Yes ropes removed Can the motor rotate freely V f Control A1 02 0 Enter auto tuning mode and Enter auto tuning mode and Enter auto tuning mode and set parameter T1 01 2 set parameter T1 01 1 set parameter T1 01 0 Set Set T1 02 Motor rated power T1 02 Motor rated power Set T1 03 Motor rated voltage T1 03 Motor rated voltage T1 02 Motor rated power T1 04 Motor rated current T1 04 Motor rated current T1 04 Motor rated current T1 0
203. election Observe the following precautions when selecting an Inverter Binstalling Reactors A large peak current can flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large capacity power transformer 600 kVA or higher or when switching a phase shifting capacitor Excessive peak current can destroy the converter section To prevent this install a DC or AC reactor to improve the power supply power factor If a thyristor converter such as a DC drive is connected in the same power supply system connect a DC or AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram 4000 DC or AC reactor Power supply ired kVA require 600 DC or AC react r not required o 60 400 Inverter capacity kVA Installation Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter iinstallation in Enclosures Install the Inverter in a clean location where it is not subjected to oil mist dust and other contaminants or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not exceed the allowable temperature Do not install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials Binstallation Direction Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other vertical surface Settings Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter BUpper Limits The m
204. elines Standard Replacement Period Replacement Method Cooling fan s 2 to 3 years 20 000 hours Replace with new part Replace with new part DC bus capacitor 5 years Determine need by inspection Soft charge contactor Determine need by inspection DC bus fuse Control power fuse 10 years Replace with new part Replace with new board PCB capacitors 5 years Determine need by inspection Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions Ambient temperature Yearly average of 30 C 86 F Load factor 8096 Operating rate 12 hours per day 8 4 Cooling Fan Replacement 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18 5 kW or Less A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel If the Inverter is mounted with the heatsink external to the enclosure the cooling fan can only be replaced by removing the Inverter from the enclosure Removing the Cooling Fan 1 Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan 2 Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and when pull the fan out in the direction of arrow 2 3 Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the power
205. ely There are two baseblock functions available a hardware baseblock and a software baseblock Related Parameters Control Methods Parameter Open Close pass No Loop dLoop P Vector 6 Vector Vector Pm S3 12 Baseblock restart selection A A A mu El iMultifunction Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Control Methods Function Open Loop ae Ta Vector Vector Vector PM External baseblock NO NO contact Baseblock at ON External baseblock NC NC contact Baseblock at OFF iHardware Baseblock When hardware baseblock is activated the power supply of the IGBT driver circuit is cut off and the motor starts to coast To use this baseblock function the digital input S8 must be used The input is a NC input i e if terminal S8 is open the inverter is base block condition ilSoftware Baseblock When software baseblock is used the inverter output is cut by a software function To use this baseblock func tion one of the digital inputs must be set to baseblock i e one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection must be set to 8 or 9 Baseblock command NO NC The input can be used with a NC as well as with a NO contact iBaseblock Restart Behavior If baseblock is activated the inverter output is immediately stopped Using parameter S1 12 it can be selected whether the Up Down command input has to be cycled to restart when the baseblock is d
206. er and slave The following table shows a message example for performing a loop back test with the slave no 1 Response Message Response Message Command Message During Normal Operation During Error Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 89H Higher 00H Higher 00H Error Code 01H Test Code Test Code Lower 00H Lower 00H Higher 86H CRC 16 Higher ASH Higher ASH Lower 50H Data Data Lower 37H Lower 37H Higher DAH Higher DAH CRC 16 CRC 16 Lower 8DH Lower 8DH Writing to Multiple Inverter Memory Registers The writing of inverter memory registers works similar to the reading process i e the address of the first reg Ister that has to be written and the number of registers must be set in the command message The data registers which shall be written must be consecutive starting from the specified address in the com mand message The data order must be higher 8 bits then lower 8 bits The data must be in memory register address order The following table shows an example of a message where a forward operation has been set with a frequency reference of 60 0 Hz for the inverter with the slave address 01H Response Message Response Message Command Messagg During Normal Operation During Error S
207. eration when the Inverter is controlled by the RUN Key Digital Operator Stops Inverter operation STOP Key This key can be enabled or disabled using parameter 02 02 when operating from a source different than the operator Note Except in diagrams Keys are referred to the key names listed in the above table There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP keys on the Digital Operator These indicators light or flash to indicate the inverter operation status The RUN key indicator flashes and the STOP key indicator lights during initial excitation or DC braking The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP keys and the Inverter status is shown in Fig 3 3 FWD V4 Inverter omamaey J RUN STOP STOP LL a Frequency reference T RUN X x x STOP xx e xc x xx Light up XX Blink e Off Fig 3 3 RUN and STOP Indicators Inverter Modes The Inverter s parameters and monitoring functions are organized in five groups which make it easy to read and adjust parameters The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Modes Mode Primary function s Drive mode Use this mode to start stop the inverter to monitor values such as the frequency ref erence or output current and to read out fault informations or the fault history Quick programming mode se this mode t
208. erminal A1 Bias This parameter is available only if an analog input option board AI 14B is installed H3 05 H3 09 Settings Control Methods Open Closed Setting i Closed Waite Function Contents 100 Vit Loop Mens Loop Page Vec Vector Vector 5 tor PM Auxiliary frequency reference is used as 2 k Maximum output frequency AI 14B use only Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 6 mm multi speed reference 2 Auxiliary frequency reference is used as 3 Maximum output frequency AI 14B use only Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 6 multi speed reference 3 14 Torque compensation Motor s rated torque Yes Yes 6 13 5 36 Protection Function Parameters L iMMotor Overload L1 Para meter Num ber Name Display Description Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Control Methods Vit Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Page L1 01 Motor pro tection selec tion MOL Fault Select Sets whether the motor thermal over load protection function is enabled or disabled 0 Disabled 1 General purpose motor protection fan cooled motor 2 Inverter motor protection exter nally cooled motor 3 Vector motor protection When the Inverter power supply is turned off the thermal value is reset so even if this parameter is set to 1 protect
209. erter Software Version The inverter software version can be read out from the monitor parameter U1 14 The parameter shows the last for digits of the software number e g display is 2031 for the software version VSL702031 Y P This manual describes the functionality of the inverter software version VSL702031 e Older software versions may not support all described functions Check the software version IMPORTANT before start working with this manual a Component Names B Inverters of 18 5 kW or Less The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 4 The Inverter with the ter minal cover removed is shown in Fig 1 5 Mounting holes Front cover Heatsink Digital Operator Nameplate Terminal cover RN 7 LEN Bottom Protective Cover Fig 1 4 Inverter Appearance 18 5 kW or Less Control circuit terminals Main circuit terminals Charge indicator Ground terminal Fig 1 5 Terminal Arrangement 18 5 kW or Less 1 6 B Inverters of 22 kW or More The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 6 The Inverter with the ter minal cover removed is shown in Fig 7 Inveter cover Mounting holes Front cover Cooling fan Digital Operator Nameplate Terminal cover Fig 1 6 Inverter Appearance 22
210. ervo completion width Zero Servo Count Sets the bandwidth of the Zero Servo completion output Enabled when the zero servo completion end is set for a multi function output The zero servo completion signal is ON when the current position is within the range the zero servo position Zero servo completion width Set S1 21 to 4 times of the allow able displacement pulse amount at the PG Starting torque compensation increase time Torque incr T Sets the increase time for the ana log input torque compensation sig nal Sets the time the torque reference needs to reach 300 torque reference Torque com pensation gain during lowering TorqComp gain low Sets the torque compensation gain at lowering when the torque com pensation at start function is used Torque com pensation bias during raising TorqComp Bias ri Sets the torque compensation bias at raising when the torque compen sation at start function is used Torque com pensation bias during lowering TorqComp Bias red Sets the torque compensation bias at lowering when the torque com pensation at start function is used Dwell speed reference DWELL speed Hold speed reference when the load is heavy The frequency refer ence follows the C1 07 accelera tion 4 setting time Acceleration time will be changed when the motor speed exceeds the C1 11 setting frequency Door zone speed leve
211. ete eoa eta escena en Gules 3 9 Verify Mode o LEE PE e Abe RES 3 11 9 Autotuning MB sert e eem vett eat ea tema ec Eee 3 12 Start UD Procedure 2 oiii oca Favcee cop eins 4 1 General Start Up Routine sssssssss HH 4 2 4 SIaibljp C exem stint etel e e Se LN oM E 4 2 Power UD pn 4 3 Before Power Up ut e E t SL e e Ve e ES 4 3 9 Display after Power Upon taut lane ee ee ales UN 4 3 Control Mode Selection tenete trenes 4 3 AUNO pere Er ETC 4 4 3 Autotuning Mode Selection pae qot EE ed qp o D do DR ee e ing 4 4 Auto Tuning Precautions ccccccccccssescssescssescssesceceseseeseseesestesessseseeseseesesesecseseeneesene 4 5 Autotuning Procedure with Induction Motors cc ccccscsscsssscssesceseseeeseeeseseeeeteseeeeeeeees 4 6 Autotuning Procedure with PM Motors cccccscsscsssscssssessescesesesseseesesesesestesesteseateeeaees 4 7 PM Motor Encoder Offset Tuning 2 tet tee te t ee d E 4 8 Precautions for Induction Motor Autotuning ssssseteeenes 4 9 Autotuning Alarms and Faults x eec ceec actin teet ttes 4 10 Performance Optimization essssssssssssssseeeeee nene 4 11 User Paranieters aen eee a RED EE 5 1 User Parameter Descriptions ssssssssssssssssssssseeeee rennen 5 2 Description of User Parameter Tables ccccsccssscsessssessssesessessssesscsesecseseeseesesessene 5 2 Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
212. etection DV6 Fault Detection Using this function an over acceleration of the car caused by too high load or wrong settings can be detected The function works in Closed Loop Vector for PM motors only A1 02 6 If an over acceleration is detected the inverter stops and a DV6 fault is displayed Related Parameters Control Methods Parameter Factory chan on Open Closed Chesed Name during Loop No Setting gt Vif Loop Loop Operation Vect Vect Vector ector ector PM S3 16 Over acceleration detection level 1 5 m s No A S3 17 Over acceleration time constant 0 05 sec No A S3 18 Over acceleration detection method 0 No A E Adjusting the Over Acceleration Detection Over acceleration is detected when the acceleration of the car exceeds the value set in S3 16 for longer than the time set in S3 17 The setting of parameter S3 18 decides the over acceleration is always activate if the power supply is on S3 16 0 or only during run S3 16 1 Setting parameter S3 16 to 0 0 m s disables the over acceleration detection Y la P It is imperative to set up the parameters S3 13 S3 14 and S3 15 traction sheave diameter roping and e gear ratio in order to make this function working properly IMPORTANT e 46 Inverter Protection Inverter Overheat Protection The Inverter is protected against overheating using a thermistor that det
213. eters o Factory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Monitor selection User Monitor Sel Set the number of the 4rd moni tor item to be displayed in the Drive Mode U1 LIL1 On LED operator JVOP 161 only A A Monitor selection after power up Power On Moni tor Sets the monitor item to be dis played when the power is turned on 1 Frequency reference 2 Output frequency 3 Output current 4 The monitor item set for o1 01 Frequency units of reference set ting and monitor Display Scaling Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the frequency ref erence and frequency monitor 0 0 0 01 Hz units 1 0 01 units Maximum out put frequency is 100 2 min 2 poles 3 0 000 m s 4 to 39 rpm units Set the motor poles 40 to 39999 User desired dis play Set the desired values for setting and display for the max output frequency A Sets the value that is to be displayed at 100 excluding the decimal point Sets the number of decimal places Example When the max output frequency value is 200 0 set 12000 Setting unit for V f characteris tics parameters Display Units Set the setting unit for V f pat tern related parameters 0 Hz l rpm LCD Display contrast adjustment LCD Contrast
214. ets the rated current of the motor Number of motor poles Number of Poles Sets the number of motor poles 4 poles Motor voltage constant ke Voltage constant Sets the motor voltage constant if T2 99 was set to 0 before Otherwise this parameter is not displayed 239 3 mVsec rad Number of PG pulses PG Pulses Rev Sets the number of PG pulses per revolution Motor voltage constant calcula tion selection VoltConst CalcSel Selects if the voltage constant is calculated during auto tuning or if it has to input manually 0 Manual input in parameter T2 08 1 Automatic calculation The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 3 7 kW is given 2 Can be set only if HIPEFACE is selected as encoder type 5 54 Monitor Parameters U B Status Monitor Parameters U1 Control Methods Name Output Signal Level at Multi Closed MEMO Description Function Analog Output AO Open Closed Loop BUS Display option card TER Loop Vector Register ector Vector PM Frequency reference oo A A A Ul 01 Monitors sets the frequency 10 V Max frequency Hz as reference value 0 to 10 V possible 0 01 Frequency Ref A 0 01 Output fi A A A U02 tiput ireguency Monitors the output fre 10 V M
215. ever a fault occurs the inverter output 1s cut and the brake is closed A fault is output When the auto matic fault reset is enabled the fault is reset 2 seconds after the Up Down signal has been removed The inverter can be restarted This can be repeated for the number of times set in L5 02 The restart counter 1s reset when the power supply is switched off Fault 6 DC Injection Zero servo Speed Up Down pco Brake Open Command I Fault Output I Auto Reset a The fault is reset 2 sec After the Up Down signal has been removed Fig 6 27 Automatic Fault Reset Sequence iFault Relay Operation Parameter L5 02 can be used to enable or disable the fault relay terminal MA MB MC during the fault retry Even if the fault relay is deactivated during the retries L5 02 0 it is operated after the number of retries set in L5 01 has been reached L5 02 1 enabled the fault relay L5 02 0 disables the fault relay 6 81 mFault Restart Indication When the fault retry function is used the inverter tries to reset the fault every 5 ms If a digital output 1s pro grammed for the Restart enable function H2 LILI 1E the output is set as long as the inverter tries to reset the fault After a successful fault reset the output is cleared BUV1 Fault Restart Selection Using parameter L5 05 the auto reset method for a UV1 DC bus under voltage fault can be select
216. f PG gear teeth 2 PG Gear Teeth2 Sets the number of teeth on the gears if there are gears between the PG and the motor PG Input Pulses x 60 x Fl 13 F1 01 F1 12 A gear ratio of 1 will be used if one of these parameters is set to 0 PG open cir cuit detection delay time PGO Detect Time Used to set the PG disconnection detection time PGO will be detected if the detection time exceeds the set time DV3 fault detection selec tion DV3 detect sel Sets the number of scans 5ms until a DV3 fault wrong direction is detected 0 No DV3 detection n A DV3 fault is detected after n x 5msec DVA fault detection selec tion DVA detect sel Sets the number of pulses until a DV4 fault wrong direction is detected 0 No DV4 detection n A DV3 fault is detected after n pulses Absolute encoder resolu tion PG F2 Resolu tion Sets the serial line resolution for absolute encoders Hiperface or EnDat 0 16384 1 32768 2 8192 if EnDat is selected n8 35 5 F1 21 is fixed to 2 5 21 5 28 Name Display Magnet posi tion offset Mag Theta Comp Description Sets the Offset between the rotor magnet and encoder zero position Setting Range 0 to 360 Factory Setting Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Encode
217. f hunting occurs or the speed is over compensated Decrease the setting if the compensation is too slow Normally there is no need to change this setting Inertia Compensation Closed Loop Vector Only Feed Forward Control is used to eliminate the speed overshoot or undershoot by compensating inertia effects The function can be enabled using parameter n5 01 iRelated Parameters Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Change during operation Parameter Factory No setting 1 0 Feed forward control selection Motor acceleration time kVA dependent Feed forward proportional gain 1 0 Motor acceleration time auto tuning 0 E Adjustments Motor acceleration time n5 02 The motor acceleration time n5 02 is the time which is needed to accelerate the to the rated speed with the rated torque of the motor The time can be estimated like follows Make the general setup V f pattern Motor Setup etc Balance the elevator car in middle position Car weight Counter weight Set the torque limits to 100 using the L7 OO parameters Set the acceleration time very short the inverter must reach the torque limit very fast Start in any direction and measure the time from zero speed to top speed Set this time in n5 02 Feed Forward Gain n5 03 This value usually has not to be changed ncrease the gain to improve the responsiveness to the
218. f the inrush current pre vention circuit was opened The control power supply voltage was below the CUV level UV Alarm is detected only when the drive is in stop condition For the probable reasons please have a look at UV1 UV2 and UV3 in table 7 1 For the corrective actions please have a look at UV1 UV2 and UV3 in table 7 1 OV DC Bus Overvolt flashing DC Bus Overvoltage The DC bus voltage exceeded the over voltage detection level 200 V class 410 VDC 400 V class 820 VDC An OV Alarm is detected only when the drive is in stop condition The power supply voltage is too high Check the power supply and decrease the voltage to meet the Inverter s specifications OH Heatsnk Overtmp flashing Heatsink Overheat The temperature of the Inverter s cool ing fin exceeded the temperature pro grammed in L8 02 Enabled when L8 03 3 The ambient temperature is too high Check for dirt build up on the fans or heatsink There is a heat source nearby Reduce the ambient temperature around the Inverter The Inverter cooling fan s has stopped Replace the cooling fan s OL3 Car Stuck flashing Overtorque Detection 1 The Inverter s output current V f con trol or the output torque Vector con trol exceeded L6 02 for longer than the time set in L6 03 and L6 01is set to lor 2 Motor was overloaded Ensure the values in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropriate Chec
219. f the possible types of installation This manual therefore has to be limited to general guidelines All electrical equipment produces radio and line borne interference at various frequencies The cables pass this on to the environment like an aerial Connecting an item of electrical equipment e g drive to a supply without a line filter can therefore allow HF or LF interference to get into the mains The basic countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components proper grounding and shielding of cables A large contact area is necessary for low impedance grounding of HF interference The use of grounding straps instead of cables is therefore definitely advisable Moreover cable shields must be connected with purpose made ground clips B3 Laying Cables Measures Against Line Borne Interference Line filter and frequency inverter must be mounted on the same metal plate Mount the two components as close to each other as possible with cables kept as short as possible Use a power cable with well grounded shield Use a shielded motor cable not exceeding 20 meters in length Arrange all grounds so as to maximize the area of the end of the lead in contact with the ground terminal e g metal plate Shielded Cable Use a cable with braided shield Ground the maximum possible area of the shield It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the cable to the ground plate with metal clips see following f
220. ference The reference torque when the last fault occurred The motor rated torque corresponds to 100 Input terminal status at fault Input Term Sts The input terminal status when the last fault occurred The format is the same as for U1 10 Output terminal sta tus at fault Output Term Sts The output terminal status when the last fault occurred The for mat is the same as for U1 11 Operation status at fault Inverter Status The operating status when the last fault occurred The format is the same as for U1 12 Cannot be output A A A 80H Cumulative opera tion time at fault Elapsed Time The operating time when the last fault occurred Cannot be output e The following errors are not recorded in the error log CPF00 01 02 03 UV1 and UV2 IMPORTANT 5 59 5 60 Fault History U3 Param A MEMO eter Name Description nid A Level Duite Min Unit BUS Number ulti Function Analog Output Reaister Display g Last fault U3 01 The error content of 1st last fault 90H Last Fault Second last fault U3 02 The error content of 2nd last fault 91H Fault Message 2 Third last fault U3 03 The error content of 3rd last fault 92H Fault Message 3 Fourth last fault U3 04 The error content of
221. four quadrants The torque limit can be set as a fixed value using parameters or as a variable value using an analog input The torque limit function can be used with Open Loop Vector and Closed Loop Vector control only iRRelated Parameters Control Methods Parameter No Factory Set ting Change dur ing Opera tion Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM Forward drive torque limit 300 A A A Reverse drive torque limit 300 Forward regenerative torque limit 300 Reverse regenerative torque limit 300 A A A Torque limit integral time constant 200 ms A A A A Torque limit integral operation during accel decel selection A setting value of 100 is equal to the motor rated torque Multi function Output H2 01 to H2 03 Function A Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM During torque limit Yes Yes Yes 6 Using L7 01 to L7 04 four torque limits in the following directions can be set individually Forward drive reverse drive forward regenerative and reverse regenerative see Fig 6 18 iSetting the Torque Limit Using Parameters Output Torque L7 01 L7 04 Z g uuf 5 r Reverse Regenerative LLALL Forward Drive M f Reverse v Ri bh 4 Drive Wa egenerative A Output Speed L7 03 L7 02
222. frequency reference value when 10 V is input as a per centage of the maximum output frequency set in E1 04 100 0 AI 14B Channel 1 AI 14 CHI Bias Sets the frequency reference value when 0 V is input as a per centage of the maximum output frequency set in E1 04 AI 14B Channel 3 signal level selection AI 14 CH3 LvISel Selects the input signal level of Channel 3 if an AI 14B option card is installed 0 0 to 10V 1 10 to 10V AI 14B Channel 3 function selection AI 14 CH3FuncSel Selects the function for the chan nel 3 input if an AI 14B option card is installed See the table below for the available functions AI 14B Channel3 gain AI 14 CH3 Gain Sets the input level according to the 100 value of the function set in parameter H3 05 when the voltage at channel 3 of the AI 14B option card is 10 V 100 0 AI 14B Channel 3 Bias AI 14 CH3 Bias Sets the input level according to the 0 value of the function set in parameter H3 05 when the voltage at channel 3 of the AI 14B option card is 0 V AI 14B Channel 2 signal level selection AI 14 CH2 LvISel Selects the input signal level of Channel 2 if an AI 14B option card is installed 0 0 to 10V 1 10 to 10V 2 4 to 20 mA If current input is selected chan nel 2 must be set to current input by hardware as well Refer to the AI 14B manual AI 14B Channel 2 function selection AI 14 CH
223. fter initialization or no faults During DC bus undervoltage UV detection During baseblock ON during baseblock Frequency reference source selection ON Frequency reference from Operator Run command source selection status ON Run command from Operator Car stuck undertorque detection 1 NO NO contact ON Overtorque undertorque detection Fault ON Digital Operator Monitor communications error or fault other than CPF00 and CPFO1 has occurred Not used Set when the terminal is not used Minor fault ON Alarm displayed Fault reset command active 5 33 5 34 Setting Value Function Timer function output Control Methods Open loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM free feet agree 2 detection width L4 04 is used fep f agree 2 ON Output frequency L4 03 with detection width L4 04 is used and dur ing frequency agree Frequency detection 3 ON Output frequency lt L4 03 detection width L4 04 is used Frequency detection 4 ON Output frequency 2 L4 03 detection width L4 04 is used Car stuck undertorque detection 1 NC NC Contact OFF Torque detection Car stuck undertorque detection 2 NO NO Contact ON Torque detection Car stuck undertorque detection 2 NC NC Contact OFF Torque detection During reverse run ON During reverse run During baseblock 2 OFF During basebloc
224. fter speed agree for the time S3 07 Internal Fwd Run Internal Rev Run Car evacuation in reverse direction OFF Light load detection in progress D O Light Load Status ON Light load detection done i F i OFF Reverse direction selected D O Light Load Direction Fig 6 26 Light Load Direction Sequence REV is Light Direction ELight Load Direction Detection Method If parameter S3 24 is set to 0 the motor current values in Up and Down direction are compared The direc tion with the lower current will be taken as light load direction If parameter S3 24 is set to 1 in Open Loop Vector the motor speed values and V f control the excitation currents value in both directions are compared Automatic Fault Reset The inverter can reset faults automatically The maximum number of resets can be selected as well as the oper ation mode of the fault relay Auto resetable Fault codes are UV1 GF OC OV OL2 OL3 OL4 UL3 UL4 PF LF SEI SE2 SE3 iRRelated Constants Control Methods Change during operation Parameter Factory No setting Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Number of restarts Restart operation selection UVI auto reset selection Multi function Digital Outputs H2 01 to H2 03 Control Methods Open Closed Closed Loop Loop Loop Vec Setting Function name Vector Vector tor PM iWorking Principle When
225. ged 1 IMPORTANT Removing the Terminal Cover B Inverters of 18 5 kW or Less Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the direc tions of arrows 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2 Fig 1 11 Removing the Terminal Cover Model CIMR L7Z43P7 Shown Above B Inverters of 22 kW or More Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover pull out the terminal cover in the direc tion of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2 Fig 1 12 Removing the Terminal Cover Model CIMR L7Z4022 Shown Above 1 11 Attaching the Terminal Cover When the terminal block wiring has been completed attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal proce dure 1 For Inverters with an output of 18 5 kW or less insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place 1 12 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator LED Monitor and Front Cover Inverters of 18 5 kW or Less To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector remove the Digital Operator LED Monitor and 1 front cover in addition to the terminal cover Always remove the Digital Operator LED Monitor from the front cover before re
226. ged or removed Live and hot inverter components may be accessible during operation Removal of housing components the digital operator or terminal covers runs the risk of serious injuries or damage in the event of incorrect installa tion or operation The fact that frequency inverters control rotating mechanical machine components can give rise to other dangers The instructions in this manual must be followed Installation operation and maintenance may only be carried out by qualified personnel For the purposes of the safety precautions qualified personnel are defined as indi viduals who are familiar with the installation starting operation and maintenance of frequency inverters and have the proper qualifications for this work Safe operation of these units is only possible if they are used properly for their intended purpose The DC bus capacitors can remain live for about 5 minutes after the inverter is disconnected from the power It Is therefore necessary to wait for this time before opening its covers All ofthe main circuit terminals may still carry dangerous voltages Children and other unauthorized persons must not be allowed access to these inverters Keep these Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use readily accessible and supply them to all persons with any form of access to the inverters B2 Intended Use Frequency inverters are intended for installation in electrical systems or machines The systems and machines must
227. gement and laying of cables This also applies to equipment with the CE mark It is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the system or machine to ensure conformity with EMC limits Contact your supplier or Omron Yaskawa Motion Control representative when using leakage current circuit breaker in conjunction with frequency inverters In certain systems it may be necessary to use additional monitoring and safety devices in compliance with the relevant safety and accident prevention regulations The frequency inverter hardware must not be modified CAUTION Ifa PM motor is turned by any external force high voltage is generated in the windings During wiring maintenance or inspection make sure that the motor is stopped and can not turn If the inverter is turned off and the motor must be turned make sure that motor and inverter output are electrically disconnected B6 Inverter Setup This L7 inverter can drive induction motors as well as permanent magnet motors Always select the appropriate control mode For induction motors use V f Open Loop Vector or Closed Loop Vector control A1 01 0 2 or 3 For permanent magnet motors use no other control mode than Closed Loop Vector for PM A1 01 6 A wrong control mode selection can damage the inverter and motor If a motor is exchanged or operated the first time always set up the motor control relevant parameters using the nameplate data or perform autotuning Do not
228. gt i d yiodey 3ueuissessy Bugey e2uj2e 3 rj m aS PNPOId m ans NAL e gt 9 40 z abed 62 Xe3 8 27 16 8 680 uojejo 9002 Ainr 9z ueuouniw 6EE08 A qyoiqeH 89 egensio piy O L uoisi ay 8 LSPOOSLLL Haws Hey GNS ANL SuoppuoD 8 yjnsed Z uoneuiuexe JO eoueuuoJed 9 se diuug Dunse c uejs s ay Jo uonduoseg p Sjueunoogise Bunse joedoog z Jejeueo yeuul 9 40 aed 6Z Xe3 8 27 164G 680 uojojo L 9002 Ainr oz ueyouNW 6 08 A ayoigeH 69 egenssa piy O L woisinay LSPOOSLLZ Haw Hey ans ANL o00z 9061 900 ZZZ 90 90 OLZ ON eJZ 90029010 yeg jenuew dais Z71 eye UOISJOA zT Ssjueunoog1s9J LZ Jeydeuo L L8 N3 Butpjoooe jiun Jemod e jo UMOP JNYS OY 104 e qeins OIE g 71 INIO PUE 241 HIWIO SJeueAuoo Jewod orejs eui Jeu1euM pexoeuo eq o seu 1i uoreuruexe OU uM Bunsel jo edoos Zz uoneuiuexe Je91u429j Ajayes eui jo sijnseJ jenpiupur y pue uonnoexe y sjuesaJdeJ puey uo Yodel eu n BL TYNI PUP Z T MINIO JeueAuoo Jemod onejs eui jo Hulse Ajejes Jeuonoun eui YIM HGW Ley GAS ANL Peuoissiuuoo pzgs9 q z Buen JeBiequosy wy HWH adong ewexseA jesouay V L8N3 6ulpsoooe yrun 4amod e jo uwop inus eu JO JOYOAU OV 8 1 HINIO PU Z7 1 MINIO 16119Au02 JaMod onejs Jo Bus Ajejeg eu jo Yodey jusuissessy lt o gt 9 40 G aBed 62 Xe3 8 2
229. has no effect to the normal operation Light Load Direction Detection If the light load detection function is enabled S3 06 is set to 1 the inverter can detect the light load direction for rescue operation Therefore the elevator is driven with the light load detection speed S3 10 sequentially in forward and reverse direction for the time set in parameter S3 07 The current torque is measured in each direction and the values are compared to each other fthe detected light direction is forward the inverter stops and restarts in the forward direction with the set rescue operation speed At the restart the light load detection status output H2 L1L1 45 and the light load direction output H2 L1L1 44 are set DI Rescue operation External Controller Fwd Torque is measured or Rev Run after speed agree for the time S3 07 Internal Fwd Run Car evacuation in forward direction Internal Rev Run OFF Light load detection in progress D O Light Load Status ON Light load detection done D O Light Load Direction ON Forward direction selected Fig 6 25 Light Load Direction Sequence FWD is Light Direction If the detected light load direction is reverse the inverter continues the operation with the set rescue oper ation speed The light load detection status output H1 L1L1 45 is set the direction output is not changed DI Rescue operation External Controller Fwd Torque is measured or Rev Run a
230. he Inverter UV2 CTL PS Undervolt Control Power Supply Undervoltage Undervoltage of the control circuit while the Inverter was running External load was pulling down the Inverter s power supplies or there was an internal short in the power gate drive board Remove all connection to the con trol terminals and cycle the power to the Inverter Replace the Inverter UV3 MC Answerback Inrush Current Prevention Circuit Fault An overheating of the charging resistor for the DC bus capacitors occurred The MC of the charging circuit did not respond 10 sec after the MC ON signal has been output Applicable Inverter Capacities 200 V class 37 to 55 kW The contactor of the inrush current pre vention circuit is defective Cycle the power to the Inverter Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur PF Input Phase Loss Main Circuit Voltage Fault An unusual big ripple on the DC bus voltage has been detected Only detected when L8 05 1 enabled The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose Tighten the input terminal screws A phase loss occurred in the input power supply A momentary power loss occurred The voltage fluctuation of the input power supply is too high The voltage balance between the input phases is bad Check the power supply voltage LF Output Phase Loss Output Open phase An open phase occurred at the Inverter outp
231. he inverter continues the zero speed operation until the time 1 06 S1 07 has elapsed After that the inverter output is shut down and the hardware base block signal must be set After the output contactor open delay time S1 19 has elapsed the output contactor close signal is removed Torque Limit Fade Out Function Closed Loop Vector for PM The torque limit fade out function smoothly reduced the torque limit to 0 after the zero speed time at stop has elapsed It thereby can help to prevent shocks or vibrations when the motor stops and the brake is closed The used time constant can be set in parameter S1 31 The function can be used in Closed Loop Vector control for PM motors only A1 02 6 WZero Speed Control Zero Servo position lock In Closed Loop Vector control the inverter uses zero speed or zero servo control during the brake open or close procedure Zero Speed Control The inverter keeps the motor speed at zero a roll back is not compensated This method is used for the start with a torque compensation value by analog input The strength of the control can be tuned using the ASR parameters C5 LILI Refer to page 6 32 Automatic Speed Regulator ASR Closed Loop Vector only for tun ing details Zero Servo Control The inverter tries to keep the rotor position i e a roll back is compensated This method is used for the start when no torque compensation is used and always for during stop without and with t
232. he leveling speed is taken as the speed reference DC Injection Zero servo Speed DC Injection Zero servo Hardware BB Up Down Selected speed The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs Terminal function Nominal Speed d1 09 Intermed Speed 1 d1 10 Intermed Speed 2 d1 11 Intermed Relevel Speed 3 Speed d1 12 d1 13 Leveling Speed d1 17 Nominal Speed command H1 LI1L1 80 Intermediate speed command H1 LIL1 81 Releveling speed command H1 LI1L1 82 Leveling speed command H1 L1L1 83 0 disabled 1 enabled N A not available The inverter stops when the direction signal UP or DOWN signal is removed Y P With this configuration the drive stops with a FRL frequency reference loss fault when no speed e reference input is selected during the start IMPORTANT To disable the FRL detection set parameter S3 09 to 0 i Separate Speed Selection Inputs Leveling Speed Has Priority d1 18 2 The related parameters and the digital input pre settings are the same as for the High Speed Priority setting d1 18 1 Leveling Speed has Priority and a Leveling Speed Input is Selected H1 L1L1283 If d1 18 is set to 2 and one multi function digital input is set to leveling speed H1 L1L1 83 the inverter decelerates to the leveling speed d1 17 when the le
233. hen the Operator was write protected 03 02 0 Corrective Actions Set 03 02 to enable writing parameters into the Operator s memory IFE READ DATA ERROR The data file read from the Inverter was of the wrong size indicating corrupted data Retry the READ command 03 01 1 Check the Digital Operator s cable Replace the Digital Operator RDE DATA ERROR An attempted writing of the Inverter data to the Digital Operator s EEPROM failed A low Inverter voltage has been detected Retry the READ command 03 01 1 Replace the Digital Operator COPY Function CPE ID UNMATCHED The Inverter type or software number was different from the stored data in the digital operator Use stored data of the same product L7 and soft ware number U1 14 only VAE INV KVA UNMATCH The capacity of the Inverter and the capacity of the stored data in the Digital Operator are different Use stored data for the same Inverter capacity only 02 04 CRE CONTROL UNMATCHED The control method of the Inverter and the control method of the stored data in the Digital Operator are different Use stored data for the same control method A1 02 CYE COPY ERROR A parameter setting written to the Inverter was dif ferent from the setting stored in the Digital Opera tor Retry the COPY function 03 01 2 CSE SUM CHECK ERROR Upon completion of the COPY function the Inverte
234. hods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Parameter access level Access Level Used to set the parameter access level set read 0 Monitoring only Monitoring drive mode and setting A1 01 and A1 04 1 Used to select user parameters Only parameters set in A2 01 to A2 32 can be read and set 2 Advanced Parameters can be read and set in both quick programming mode Q and advanced pro gramming mode A Control method selection Control Method Used to select the control method for the Inverter 0 V f control 2 Open loop vector m 3 Closed Loop Vector 6 Closed Loop Vector for PM motors This parameter is not changed by the initialize operation Initialize Init Parameters Used to initialize the parameters using the specified method 0 No initializing 1110 Initializes using the user parameters 2220 Initializes using a two wire sequence Initializes to the factory setting Password Enter Password Password input when a password has been set in A1 05 This function write protects some parameters of the initialize mode 71 If the password is changed A1 01 to A1 03 and A2 01 to A2 32 parameters can no longer be changed Programming mode parameters can be changed Name Display Password set ting Select Pass word Description
235. i Cooling Fan Operation Time 02 10 This function counts the operating time of the inverter mounted fan cumulatively Using parameter 02 10 the counter can be reset e g when the fan has been replaced BFault Trace Initialize 02 12 6 This function can be used to initialize the fault trace by setting parameter 02 12 to 1 EEG i Number of Travels counter Initialize 02 15 Using this parameter the lift operation counter monitor U1 55 can be initialized Copying Parameters JVOP 160 OY only The following three digital operator functions can be used in order to copy verify parameter settings Store Inverter parameter set values in the Digital Operator by setting 03 01 to 1 READ Write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter by setting 03 01 to 2 COPY Compare parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter parameters settings by setting 03 01 to 3 VERIFY The data saved in the operator can be protected from overwriting by setting parameter 03 02 to 0 In this case a READ command can not be executed If it is nevertheless still done PrE will be displayed at the operator iRRelated Parameters Control Methods Closed Loop Vector Parameter Open Closed No Loop Loop Vector Vector PM 03 01 Copy function selection A 03 02 Read permitted selection A iStoring Inverter set values in the Digital Operator READ To store Inve
236. ignals are disregarded when leveling speed is selected The inverter can be stopped by removing the leveling speed signal or the Up Down command CAUTION This sequence can be risky if e g the speed selection doesn t work for any reason broken wire etc 6 DC Injection cei Zero servo DC Injection Zero servo Speed Hardware BB Up Down Leveling speed The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs Nominal Intermed Intermed Intermed Relevel Leveling Terminal function Speed Speed 1 Speed2 Speed 3 Speed Speed d1 09 d1 10 d1 11 d1 12 d1 13 d1 17 Nominal Speed command H1 LI1L1 80 N A N A N A N A N A Intermediate speed command H1 L1L1 81 Releveling speed command H1 L1L1 82 Leveling speed command H1 L1L1 83 0 disabled 1 enabled N A not available X no meaning The intermediate speed 2 can not be selected using this configuration 6 10 Emergency Stop If a digital input terminal H1 LI1L1 is set to 15 or 17 emergency stop this input can be used to fast stop the inverter in the case of emergency In this case the emergency stop deceleration time set in C1 09 is used If the emergency stop is input with an NO contact set the multi function input terminal H1 O1D to 15 if the emer gency stop is input with an NC contact set the multi function input term
237. igure ad Ground clip Ground plate The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal Remove any coats of varnish and paint Ground the cable shields at both ends Ground the motor of the machine Binstallation inverters and EMC filters For an EMC rules compliant installation consider PE L2 the following points L L3 Ground Bonds Remove any paint Use a line filter Use shielded motor cables Mount the inverter and filter on a grounded con ductive plate PE Remove any paint or dirt before mounting the parts in order to reach the lowest possible Line grounding impedance Inverter Filter Load E UO GND L1 L3 U W GND Cable Lenght as short as possible Grounded Metal Plate Screened Motor cable Ground Bonds Remove any paint Line Filters iRecommended Line Filters for Varispeed L7 XII Inverter Model Line Filter Current Weight Dimensions Varispeed L7 Model A kg WxDxH CIMR L7Z43P77 CIMR L7Z44P07 3G3RV PFI3018 SE 18 1 3 141 x 46 x 330 CIMR L7Z45P57 CIMR L7Z47P57 3G3RV PFI3035 SE 35 2 1 206 x 50 x 355 CIMR L7Z40117 CIMR L7Z40157 3G3RV PFI3060 SE 60 4 0 236 x 65 x 408 CIMR L7Z40187 CIMR L7Z40227 3G3RV PFI3070 SE 70 3 4 80 x 185 x 329 CIMR L7Z40307 CIMR L7Z40377 CIMR L7Z40457 3G
238. ill be output SE3 detection delay time SE3 det T Used to set the delay time for the detection of a SE3 fault At the time S1 15 after the fwd rev command was given the inverter starts to observe the output current continuously If it falls below 25 of the no load current E2 03 set ting a SE3 will be output RUN delay time Run Delay T Sets the delay time from the Run signal input to the internal run enable 0 10sec DC injection current gain at regenerative operation DC Inj gain gen Used to set the DC injection gain when inverter is in the regenerative mode DC injection current gain at motoring oper ation DC Inj gain mot Used to set the DC injection gain when inverter is in the motoring mode Output contac tor open delay time Cont open delay Sets the contactor control output delay time after stop 0 10sec Name Display Zero servo gain Zero Servo Gain Description Adjust the strength of the zero servo lock When Closed Loop Vector control is selected a position control loop is created at start and stop Increas ing the zero servo gain increases the strength of the lock Increasing it too much can cause oscillation Setting Range 0 to 100 Factory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Zero s
239. ime 0 0 sec Inspection speed detection upper level 0 00 Hz E Multi function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Control Methods Set F ncton Open Closed Closed Value Vif Loop Loop oe ector Vector Vector PM 84 Inspection Run Selection Yes Yes Yes Yes Binspection Run Selection by Digital Input 6 The inspection run digital input must be set before the Up Down signal is set During the start of the inspec Dr 3 tion RUN the normal brake sequence is used and the inverter accelerates to the inspection speed d1 14 The stop method depends on the setting of parameter S3 03 Binspection Speed Selection by Comparison Value Using this function the inverter can detect the inspection speed by the selected speed reference The speed must be selected before the Up Down signal is set If S3 04 lt selected speed S3 19 the selected speed is regarded as inspection speed The normal start sequence is used the stop method depends on the setting of parameter S3 03 Binspection Run Stop Behavior S3 03 0 0 sec Stop without deceleration ramp The inverter stops when the Inspection Speed command or the Up Down command is removed In this case The inverter output is cut by baseblock immediately The brake open signal is removed immediately The contactor control output is removed immediately 6 11 BEEN Internal RUN j Internal RUN The falling edge of the Inspection Speed command
240. ime longer than the setting of F1 09 Overshooting undershooting occurs Adjust the ASR settings in the C5 parameter group The reference was too high Check the reference circuit and ref erence gain The settings in F1 08 and F1 09 are not appropriate Check the settings in F1 08 and F1 09 PGO PG Open flashing PG Disconnection Detected when F1 02 is set to 3 and A1 02 is set to 1 or 3 Detected when no PG encoder pulses are received for a time longer than the setting of F1 14 The PG wiring is broken Fix the broken disconnected wir ing The PG is wired incorrectly Check the wiring Power is not supplied to the PG Supply the correct power to the PG DEV Speed Deviation flashing Excessive Speed Deviation Detected when F1 04 is set to 3 and A1 02 is set to 1 or 3 The speed deviation is higher than the setting of F1 10 for longer than the set ting of F1 11 The load is too large Reduce the load The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time The load is locked Check the mechanical system The settings in F1 10 and F1 11 are not appropriate Check the settings in F1 10 and F1 11 An over acceleration of the car was detected A 1 02 6 only The load is too large Reduce the load Magnet position offset is wrong Check the PG direction check F1 22 and perf
241. imer function output iRelated Parameters s oom Name No iMulti function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Control Methods Closed Loop Vector Change during Operation Factory O Setting PS Loop Vector Control Methods Closed Loop Vector PM Closed Loop Vector Open Loop Vector Function Yes Yes Yes Timer function input iMultifunction Outputs H2 01 to H2 03 Control Methods Closed Loop Vector PM Closed Loop Vector Open Loop Vector Function Yes Yes Yes Timer function output 6 52 li Setting Example When the timer function input is ON for longer than b4 01 the timer output function is turned ON When the timer function input is OFF for longer than b4 02 the timer output function is turned OFF An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram Timer function input ow B oon a E t t Fig 6 21 Timer Function Operation Example Motor Contactor Answer Back Detection The motor contactors can be observed using the motor contactor answer back function Therefore an auxiliary contact of the motor contactors must be connected to a digital input which is set to for this function H1 L1L1 86 If the contactor close command is set and no answer back signal comes from the contactor the inverter detects a SE1 fault see below Parameter S1 28 selects if the detection is enabled or disa
242. improve reliability B Ferrules for Signal Lines Models and sizes of ferrules with plastic sleeves for the signal lines are shown in the following table Wire Size mm AWG 0 25 24 Table 2 8 Ferrule Sizes AI 0 25 8YE Manufacturer 0 5 20 AI 0 5 8WH 0 75 18 AI 0 75 8GY Phoenix Contact 1 5 16 AI 1 5 8BK 214 AI 2 5 8BU TT di 8 mm A gu Fig 2 10 Ferrule Sizes Control Circuit Terminal Functions The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2 9 Use the appropriate terminals for the cor rect purposes Table 2 9 Control Circuit Terminals with default settings Signal Name Function Signal Level Forward run stop command Forward run when ON stopped when OFF Reverse run stop command Reverse run when ON stopped when OFF 2 Nominal speed Nominal speed when ON Inspection Run Inspection RUN when ON 24 VDC 8 mA AE Intermediate speed when Fimictionsare Photo coupler Intermediate speed selected by setting 2 H1 01 to H1 05 Leveling speed Leveling speed when ON Not used Hardware baseblock Hardware baseblock 1 Digital input common 15V Max current 20 mA Frequency reference 0 to 10 V 100 0 to 10 V 20 kQ 15 V power supply 15 V power supply for analog references Analog reference neutral T Shield wire optional ground line connection poi
243. inal H1 LILI to 17 After the emergency stop command has been input the operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has stopped To cancel the emergency stop turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command Related parameters Parameter No Change during peration Setting o Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector C1 09 Emergency stop time E Multi function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Function No A A Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM Emergency Stop NO contact Yes Emergency Stop NC contact Yes Inspection RUN The inspection run can be activated in two ways 1 A digital input can be used if parameter d1 18 1 or 2 Therefore a inspection speed must be set and any of the digital inputs must be set to Inspection Run Selection H1 LIL1 84 see below 2 A speed reference comparison value parameter S3 19 decides if inspection run is activated or not This function work only if parameter d1 18 0 or 3 and if the inspection speed command is not assigned to any digital input H1 O0 84 Related parameters Control Methods Open Closed Closed Loop Loop Loop Vector Change during Operation Parameter Factory No Setting Vector Vector pm 25 00 Hz A Inspection Speed No 50 00 Inspection Deceleration t
244. ing MENU 11 02 904 00kW 0 0 400 0 4 00kW DRIVE Main Menu de Operation A TUNE A TUNE J MENU M I Rated Current L amp I Rated Current _ une Proceeding __ T1 7 00 11 04 807 00A 40 0Hz 10 5A 0 80 16 00A 0 80 16 00A 7 00A 7 00A START gt gt gt gt gt gt GOAL QUICK Lan Main Menu Ee El Quick Setting v A TUNE Rdy RUN A IUNE ATUNE Ns Auto Tuning ______ gt EO o M M SS ia 0 OFIZ 0 04 40 0Hz 10 5A Press RUN Rey START GOAL Tune Successful ADN ade STOP es Main Menu The display will i i a A TUNE Programming automat ally A Tune Aborted Tune Successful change depending on the status of autotuning Fig 3 9 Operation in Autotuning Mode STOP key If a fault occurs during autotuning refer to page 7 14 Auto tuning Faults 3 12 otart Up Procedure This chapter describes the basic setup procedure the motor data autotuning for each control mode and gives advices 1f problems occur General Start Up PROULIB aera ires erret onere raro uh nate po ker 4 2 xli d PR EE E 4 3 PAIN as soni E RE HR eL DR OUS M RUMBO DN EM MER AMEN MM 4 4 Auto Tuning PEECOBUDONIE sceso 4 5 Autotuning Procedure with
245. initi ceto Rete cet ret i R ea sls 9 7 AC Reactors for EN 12015 Compatibility eseseeeeeeeseeees 9 8 EN 954 1 EN81 1 Certificates eeieessessssseseseseseeeseeeee nennen 9 9 T0 ADDODODC Jio euer oe Ere R eade eoi cea Mi EIN Shore Ye cenis annaia En 10 1 Inverter Application Precautions ssseesseesssseseesseeseeeeeeeeeeees 10 2 DSN Sea Seres itt deett eed rede td dot odi tM sd rait Ga dde 10 2 instalo cocta ence I SR tos fo Db E tue 10 2 e CON dE ceu ceu c sudare rM MU E cM UE 10 2 Handing Do fete a ausente dun iocis Loa a cal ts DOR ole a fe 10 3 Motor Application Precautions sssessssssssssssssseeeeeeenee 10 4 Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor ssssss 10 4 Using the Inverter for Special Motors 10 4 User Gonslallls iurata niei aiuti d idasuteto id ee STR PUE em e LIE 10 5 Y arnings Cables must not be connected or disconnected nor signal tests carried out while the power is switched on The Varispeed L7 DC bus capacitor remains charged even after the power has been switched off To avoid an electric shock hazard disconnect the frequency inverter from the mains before carrying out maintenance Then wait for at least 5 minutes after all LEDs have gone out Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the inverter It contains semiconductors which are not designed for such
246. ion Motor Contactor Answer Back Signal High Speed Limit Switch UP 5 32 Closed Loop Vector PM E Function oan Vector Control Methods Page High Speed Limit Switch Down PG direction change over 0 Clockwise 1 Counterclockwise B Multi function Contact Outputs H2 Control Methods Name MEMO Setting Factory V f Open Closed BUS Displa Sdn Range Setting with Loop Loop ik PG Vector Vector Register Terminal MI M2 function Multi function contact selection output 1 Term M1 M2 Sel Terminal M3 M4 function Multi function contact selection output 2 Term M3 M4 Sel Terminal M5 M6 function Multi function contact selection output 3 Term M5 M6 Sel Multi function Contact Output Functions Control Methods Closed Loop Vector PM pd Function mu ee Vector Vector During run ON run command is ON or voltage is being output Zero speed free fout agree 1 detection width L4 02 is used fref f agree 1 ON Output frequency L4 01 with detection width L4 02 used and dur ing frequency agree Frequency detection 1 ON L4 01 output frequency L4 01 with detection width L4 02 used Frequency detection 2 ON Output frequency L4 01 or output frequency lt L4 01 with detection width L4 02 used Inverter operation ready READY A
247. ion may not be effective Permanent magnet constant torque motor protection Un 0 to 3 Oor5 480H L1 02 Motor pro tection time constant MOL Time Const Sets the electric thermal detection time in seconds units Usually changing this setting is not necessary The factory setting is 150 overload for one minute When the motor s overload capabil ity is known also set the overload resistance protection time for when the motor is hot started 0 1 to 5 0 1 0 min A 481H mPower Loss Settings L2 Control Methods Para Name Change a MEMO meter Description Setting Factory during Open Closed MM BUS Page Num ED Range Setting Opera V f Loop Loop ae Register ber STEM tion Vector Vector PM Undervoltage detection level Sets the DC bus undervoltage 150 to 190 VDC L2 05 UV detection level DC bus 210 No A A A A 489H I PUV Det Level voltage Rescue Opera tion DC bus ts the DC b Itage dur 0 to L2 11 Voltage Sets the DC bus voltage during 0VDC No A A A A 4CBH 6 77 rescue operation 400 Volt batterydr These are values for a 200 V class Inverter The value for a 400 V class Inverter is the double 5 3 5 38 iStall Prevention L3
248. ion selection after communications error 1 F6 02 Input level of external error from Communications Option Card 0 F6 03 Stopping method for external error from Communications Option Card 1 F6 04 Trace sampling from Communications Option Card 0 F6 05 Current monitor unit selection 0 F6 06 _ Torque reference torque limit selection from communications option card 0 H1 01 Terminal S3 function selection 80 H1 02 Terminal S4 function selection 84 H1 03 Terminal S5 function selection 81 H1 04 Terminal S6 function selection 83 H1 05 Terminal S7 function selection F H2 01 Terminal M1 M2 function selection 40 H2 02 Terminal M3 M4 function selection 41 H2 03 Terminal M5 M6 function selection 6 H3 01 Frequency reference AI 14B CH signal level selection 0 H3 02 Frequency reference AI 14B CHI input gain 100 0 H3 03 Frequency referenceAI 14B CH1 input bias 0 0 H3 04 AI 14B CH3 signal level selection 0 H3 05 AI 14B CH3 function selection 2 H3 06 AI 14B CH3 input gain 100 0 H3 07 AI 14B CH3 input bias 0 0 H3 08 AI 14B CH2 signal level selection 0 H3 09 AI 14B CH2 function selection 3 H3 10 AI 14B CH2 input gain 100 0 H3 11 AI 14B CH2 input bias 0 0 H3 12 Analog input filter time constant for the AI 14B 0 03 sec H3 15 Terminal A1 function selection 0 H3 16 Terminal A1 input gain 100 0 H3 17 Terminal AI input bias 0 0 L1 01 Motor protection selection 1 Factory
249. irection check F1 22 and perform an encoder offset tuning Sheave diameter gear ratio or roping setting incorrect Verify the settings of S3 13 S3 14 and S3 15 Too short acceleration or deceleration time Adjust the acceleration and deceler ation times SVE Zero Servo Fault Zero Servo Fault The motor position moved during Zero Servo Operation The torque limit is too small Increase the torque limit The load torque is too large Decrease the load torque Check for signal noise 7 6 Display CF Out of Control Table 7 1 Resetable Faults Meaning Control Fault A torque limit was reached continu ously for 3 seconds or longer during a deceleration stop in Open Loop Vector control Probable Causes Motor parameters were not set prop erly Corrective Actions Check the motor parameters EFO Opt External Flt External fault input from Communica tions Option Card An external fault condition was present input from a communication option card Check for an external fault condi tion Verify the parameters Verify communication signals EF3 Ext Fault S3 External fault at terminal S3 EF4 Ext Fault S4 External fault at terminal S4 EF5 Ext Fault S5 External fault at terminal S5 EF6 Ext Fault S6 External fault at terminal S6 EF 7 Ext Fault S7 External fault at terminal S7 An external fault wa
250. isabled or not 6 50 f S1 12 0 the Up Down command has to be cycled Up Down OFF ON Baseblock ON OFF l 151 16 51 04 Output frequency During Run 1 Output orl ON m i OFF During Run 2 Output ON f S1 12 1 the Up Down command must not be cycled The inverter automatically restarts when base block is deactivated and the Up Down command is still active Up Down _ OFF ON k Baseblock ON OFF Ist 16 1 04 Output frequency l During Run 1 Output orl ON i OFF During Run 2 Output ON Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors External Fault Function The external fault function activates the fault contact output and stops the Inverter operation Using this func 6 tion the inverter operation can be stopped by the break down of peripheral devices or other external errors The digital operator will display EFx External fault input terminal Sx The x in EFx shows the number of the as terminal at which the external fault signal is input For example if an external fault signal is input to terminal S3 EF3 will be displayed To use the external fault function set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 dig ital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection Select the set value for H1 01 to H1 05 by a combination of any of the following three conditions Signal input level from peripheral devices External fault detec
251. ision rate PG pulse monitor Absolute encoder resolution Magnet position offset BUsing PG Speed Control Card There are three types of PG Speed Control Card that can be used in Closed Loop Vector control 6 PG B2 A B phase pulse input compatible with open collector outputs zu PG X2 A B Z phase pulse input compatible with line drivers RS 422 e PG F2 Hiperface EnDat encoder feedback For the mounting instructions specifications and connection diagrams refer to page 2 24 Installing and Wir ing Option Cards Y gt 4 If Open Loop Vector control for IM is used and a PG B2 X2 card is installed the speed detected by the P PG card is displayed in the monitor parameter U 1 05 Therefore the PG constant has to be set in parame mo ter F1 01 The direction of the speed detection can be changed by parameter F1 05 To change the U1 05 value to the internally calculated speed value remove the PG card iSetting Number of PG Pulses F1 01 Set the number of PG Pulse Generator Encoder pulses in pulses per revolution If a PG F2 card is installed the encoder type must be set in parameter n8 35 before the PG constant 1s set The possible set values for F1 01 depend on the n8 35 setting The following resolutions can be set for Hiperface 1024 for EnDat 512 1024 2048 6 72 iSuit the PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction F1 05 Parameter F
252. ith Inverter Capacity 02 04 to see parameters that depend on this setting Normally it is not necessary to change this setting unless the control card has been changed 6 65 i Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the Enter Key 02 05 This function is active when frequency references are input from the Digital Operator When 02 05 is set to 1 the selected frequency reference can be incremented and decremented the UP and DOWN keys without using the Enter key The function work only if parameter b1 01 is set to O BOperation Selection when the Digital Operator LED Monitor is Disconnected 02 06 This function selects the operation when the digital operator LED Monitor gets disconnected when a RUN command is active If 02 06 is set to 0 the operation is continued If 02 06 is set to 1 the output is switched off and the motor coasts to stop The fault contact is operated When the operator is reconnected an OPR Operator disconnected is shown ilCumulative Operation Time 02 07 and 02 08 The inverter has a function that counts the operation time of the inverter cumulatively Using parameter 02 07 the accumulated operation time can be changed e g after a replacement of the control board If parameter 02 08 is set to 0 the inverter accumulates the time whenever the power supply is switched ON If 02 08 is set to 1 the time when a RUN command is active is counted only The factory setting is 0
253. k Motor 2 selected ON Motor 2 E3 LIL1 and E4 LI1L1 is selected During regenerative operation Restart enabled ON Automatic fault restart enabled Motor overload OL1 including OH3 pre alarm ON 90 or more of the detection level Inverter overheat OH pre alarm ON Temperature exceeds L8 02 setting During torque limit current limit ON During torque limit Zero servo end ON Zero Servo completed During run 2 ON Frequency output OFF Base block DC injection braking initial excita tion operation stop Cooling fan running Brake Release Command Output Contactor Close Command Speed detection at deceleration Door zone Not Zero Speed Light load direction output ON Forward OFF Reverse Light load detection status ON Ready for light load test OFF Light load test in progress Hardware base block monitor 1 ON terminal BB and BB1 closed Hardware base block monitor 2 ON terminal BB or BB1 off BAnalog Inputs H3 Con stant Number Name Display AI 14B Channel 1 signal level selection AI 14 CH1 LvlSel Description Selects the input signal level of Channel 1 if an AI 14B option card is installed 0 0 to 10V 1 10 to 10V Factory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM AI 14B Channel 1 gain AI 14 CHI Gain Sets the
254. k application machine status to eliminate fault OL4 Car Stuck flashing Overtorque Detection 1 The Inverter s output current V f con trol or the output torque Vector con trol exceeded L6 02 for longer than the time set in L6 03 and L6 01 is set to lor2 Motor was overloaded Ensure the values in L6 05 and L6 06 are appropriate Check application machine status to eliminate fault Display UL3 Undertorque Det 1 flashing Table 7 3 Meaning Undertorque Detection 1 The Inverter s output current V f con trol or the output torque Vector con trol fell below L6 02 for longer than the time set in L6 03 and L6 01 is set to 5 or 6 Alarm Detection Probable causes Motor was underloaded Corrective Actions Ensure the values in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropriate Check application machine status to eliminate fault ULA Undertorque Det 2 flashing Undertorque Detection 2 The Inverter s output current V f con trol or the output torque Vector con trol fell below L6 05 for longer than the time set in L6 06 and L6 04 is set to 5 or 6 Motor was underloaded Ensure the values in L6 05 and L6 06 are appropriate Check application machine status to eliminate fault OS Overspeed Det flashing Overspeed Alarm Detected when A1 02 is set to 1 or 3 and F1 03 is set to 3 The motor speed feedback U1 05 exceeded the value set in F1 08 fora t
255. kW or More Control circuit deu E 9 terminals p SEHE n 6 Charge indicator T RAV XUL T E E qmm REC SVC2I THT Co tor no 63 ql o Rat S12 TL3 Lo v2 WT3 o b SSCS on T lel Main circuit eel eee 9 terminals P T ejiejle Selle Ground terminals T a Fig 1 7 Terminal Arrangement 22 kW or More Exterior and Mounting Dimensions IP00 Inverters Exterior diagrams of the IPOO Inverters are shown below w1 4 d H1 H 00000 e K 3 D e gt 200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 55 kW 200 V 400 V Class Inverters of 3 7 to 18 5 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW Fig 1 8 Exterior Diagrams of IPOO Inverters IP20 NEMA 1 Inverters Exterior diagrams of the IP20 NEMAI Inverters are shown below
256. l Door Zone Level Sets the door zone speed level If the motor speed in CLV and OLV or the output frequency in V f control falls below S1 27 and a multifunction output is set for the Door zone signal H2 LILI 42 this output will be closed SEI detection Selection SEI Selection Sets how a SEI fault is reset 0 Manual Reset 1 Automatic reset at stop 2 No SEI detection 5 49 5 50 Name Display Torque com pensation fade out level Torq Fadeout Freq Description Sets the frequency level at which the torque compensation value is started to fade out to zero Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector MEMO BUS Register Torque com pensation fade out time Torq Fadeout Time Sets the time constant which is used to fade out the torque com pensation value The set value is the time used to decrease the compensation value from 300 to 0 0 5000 Torque limit time at stop TrqLimit T Stop Name Display Motor rated speed Rated rpm Sets the time which is used to reduce the torque limit to 0 after zero speed ESlip Compensation S2 Description Sets the motor rated speed Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM
257. l circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPF20 Option A D Error Communication Option Card A D Con verter Error Option board connection is not correct Turn off the power and re install the option board again Remove all inputs to the option board Option card A D converter is faulty Perform an initialization to factory defaults Cycle the Inverter power supply Replace the option board Replace the inverter CPF21 Option CPU Down Self diagnosis Fault of Option Board Noise or spike was on the communica tion line and or defective option board Perform an initialization to factory defaults Cycle the Inverter power supply Replace the option board Replace the Inverter 7 8 CPF22 Option Type Err Table 7 2 Not Resetable Faults Option Board Code Number Fault An unrecognizable option board is con nected to the control board Remove any option boards Perform an initialization to factory defaults Cycle the Inverter power supply Replace the option board Replace the Inverter CPF23 Option DPRAM Err Option Board Interconnection Fault An option board was not correctly con nected to the control board or an option board which is not made for the Inverter has been attached to the con trol board Turn off the power and reinstall the option board again Perform an initialization to factory defaults C
258. l operator when overtorque or undertorque is detected and the set values in L6 01 and L6 04 is shown in the following table Operator Display Function Overtorque Undertorque Detection 1 Overtorque Undertorque Detection 2 Overtorque undertorque detection disabled Overtorque Car stuck detection only with speed agree operation continues warning is output OL3 flashes OLA flashes Overtorque Car stuck detected continuously during operation operation continues warning is output OL3 flashes OLA flashes Overtorque Car stuck detection only with speed agree output is stopped upon detec tion OL3 lights up OLA lights up Overtorque Car stuck detected continuously during operation output is stopped upon detection OL3 lights up OLA lights up Undertorque detection only with speed agree operation continues warning is output UL3 flashes ULA flashes Undertorque detected continuously during operation operation continues warning is output UL3 flashes ULA flashes Undertorque detection only with speed matching output is stopped upon detection UL3 lights up ULA lights up Undertorque detected continuously during operation output is stopped upon detection UL3 lights up ULA lights up 6 41 BTiming Charts Fig 6 15 and Fig 6 16 show the timing charts for over torque and under torque detection Motor current output t
259. lave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Function Code 10H Function Code 10H Function Code 90H Higher 00H Higher 00H Error code 02H Start Address Start Address Lower 01H Lower 01H Higher CDH CRC 16 Q Higher 00H Q Higher 00H Lower CIH uantit uanti y Lower 02H m Lower 02H No of data 04H Higher 10H CRC 16 Higher 00H Lower 08H Lead data Lower 01H Higher 02H Next data f Lower 58H No of data 2 x quantity Higher 63H CRC 16 Lower 39H R p e For the number of data value in the command message the double value of the data quantity must be IMPORTANT 6 6 87 Monitor Data The following table shows the monitor data Monitor data can only be read Register Address Contents Inverter status signal During run Zero speed During reverse operation Reset signal active During speed agree Inverter ready Minor fault Major fault Bits 8toD Not used Bit E ComRef status BitF ComCtrl status Operator status it 0 During OPE alarm it 1 During fault it 2 Operator in programming mode it 3 0 Digital operator attached 1 PC connected Bit 4 to F Not used OPE Fault Number Not used Fault Content 1 it 0 PUF DC bus fuse blown UVI UV2 UV3 Not used GF Ground fault OC Over current OV DC bus over voltage o Ny otn B uw N OH Inverter heatsink overheat pre alarm it9 O
260. lay turning OFF the cooling fan after the inverter STOP com mand is given Valid only if L8 10 0 0 to 300 Ambient temperature Ambient Temp Sets the ambient temperature 45 to 60 Soft CLA selection Soft CLA Sel 0 Disable 1 Enable ial Output phase loss detection time Pha loss det T Sets the detection time of out put phase loss detection LF The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 3 7 kW is given Special Adjustments n2 n5 iAutomatic Frequency Regulator n2 Name Control Methods T4 TT Closed MEMO Setting Factory Open Closed es BUS Range Setting Loop Loop Gent Redister Vector Vector PM Description Display Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain Normally there is no need to change this setting If necessary adjust this parame ter as follows If hunting occurs increase the set value Ifresponse is low decrease the set value Adjust the setting by 0 05 at a time while checking the response Speed feedback detection control AFR gain AFR Gain Speed feedback detection control Set the time constant 1 to decide AFR time con the rate of change in the speed stant feedback detection control AFR Time Speed feedback detection control AFR time con stant 2 AFR Time 2
261. le Causes Motor was underloaded Corrective Actions Ensure the values in L6 05 and L6 06 are appropriate Check application machine status to eliminate fault OS Overspeed Det Motor Overspeed Detected when F1 03 is set to 0 1 or 2 and A1 02 is set to 3 The motor speed feedback U1 05 exceeded the setting in F1 08 for a time longer than the setting of F1 09 Overshooting Undershooting occurs Adjust the ASR settings in the C5 parameter group The reference was too high Check the reference circuit and ref erence gain The settings in F1 08 and F1 09 are not appropriate Check the settings in F1 08 and F1 09 PG Disconnection Detected when F1 02 is set to 0 1 or 2 and A1 02 is set to 3 or 6 Detected when no PG encoder pulses are received for a time longer than the setting of F1 14 The PG wiring is broken Fix the broken disconnected wir ing The PG is wired incorrectly Fix the wiring Power is not supplied to the PG Supply power to the PG properly Wrong brake control sequence The motor runs against the closed brake Check the sequence and ifthe brake is opened when the inverter starts to increase the speed DEV Speed Deviation Excessive Speed Deviation Detected when F1 04 is set to 0 1 or 2 and A1 02 is set to 3 or 6 The speed deviation is higher than the setting of F1 10 for a time longer than the setting of F1 11 The load i
262. le motor output is given for a standard 4 pole Yaskawa standard motor When selecting the actual motor and Inverter be sure that the Inverter s rated current is higher than the motor s rated current 2 A transformer with dual star delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12 pulse rectification Common Specifications The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V class Inverters Table 9 3 Common Specifications Model Number CIMR L7Z O Specification Sine wave PVM Ma Closed Loop Vector control for IM and PM motors Open Loop Vector control V f control 8 kHz Carrier Frequency higher carrier frequency possible with current derating refer to page 9 6 Carrier Frequency Derating 1 40 V f control Speed control range 1 100 Open Loop Vector control 1 1000 Closed Loop Vector control x 3 V f control 0 2 Open Loop Vector control 0 02 Closed Loop Vector control 25 C 10 C Speed control accuracy 5 Hz control without PG Speed control response 30 Hz control with PG Torque limits Provided 4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant settings Vector control Torque accuracy 5 Frequency range 0 01 to 120 Hz Frequency accuracy Digital references 0 01 10 C to 40 C temperature character istics Analog references 0 1 25 C 10 C Control Characteristics Digital references 0 01 Hz
263. level ing speed Scurve leveling 5 13 iMMotor Slip Compensation C3 Name Display Description Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector MEMO BUS Register Slip compen sation gain Slip Comp Gain Used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a load Usually changing this setting is not necessary Adjust this parameter under the fol lowing circumstances When motor speed is lower than the frequency reference increase the set value When motor speed is higher than the frequency reference decrease the set value In Closed Loop Vector control this value is the gain for compensating the slip caused by temperature varia tion Slip compen sation delay time Slip Comp Time Sets the Slip Compensation delay time Usually changing this setting is not necessary Adjust this parameter under the fol lowing circumstances Reduce the setting when Slip Compensation responsiveness is low When speed is not stable increase the setting Slip compen sation limit Slip Comp Limit Sets the slip compensation limit as a percentage of motor rated slip Slip compen sation selec tion during regeneration Slip Comp Regen 0 Disable 1 Enabled When the slip compensation during regeneration function has been acti vated and regeneration capacity increases momentarily it might be
264. m autotuning if the motor speed rated frequency and pole pair number do not correspond Base Frequency 60 Motor Speed i aa 2 Motor pole the rated current does not correspond to the rated power value The inverter calculates the motor power using the input current value and data from the internal motor data table The calculated value must be between 50 and 150 of the input value for the rated power BOther Alarms and Faults During Autotuning For an overview of possible autotuning alarms or faults and corrective actions refer to page 7 14 Auto tuning Faults 4 10 M Performance Optimization The following table gives adjustment advice for performance improvement after the basic setup has been done Problem Rollback at start V f and OLV Table 4 3 Performance Optimization Possible Reason Too less torque when the brake opens Countermeasure Increase the DC injection current at start in parameter S1 02 Set the DC injection time at start S1 04 as short as possible but make sure that brake opens completely before the motor starts to turn Increase the minmum E1 10 and medium E1 08 V f pattern voltages Make sure that the starting and level ing current does not rise too high Too slow ASR response when the brake opens Increase the ASR gain at start C5 03 and decrease the ASR I time at start C5 04 If vibrations occur set the values back in small steps
265. m the Digital Inputs b1 01 0 When b1 01 is set to 0 the speed reference can be selected from preset speeds using the digital inputs of the inverter Refer to page 6 5 Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs for details Input the Speed Reference Using a Voltage Signal b1 01 1 When b1 01 is set to 1 the speed reference can be input at terminal Al as a 0 to 10V signal If an analog option card AI 14B is installed the A1 signal is replaced by the Channel 1 input of the AI card The analog reference signal can also be used as Ist speed if multispeed operation is selected d1 18 0 refer to page 6 5 Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs for details If parameter d1 18 is set to 0 and b1 01 is set to 1 the analog input value replaces any speed selected by the digital inputs except the service speed Input the Speed Reference Using an Input Option Card b1 01 3 When b1 01 is set to 2 the speed reference can be input using an input option card for example a field bus communications card 6 4 Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs If the digital inputs are used for speed selection the speed selection method and the speed priority depends on the setting of parameter d1 18 Control Methods Change during Operation Parameter Factory No Setting Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector d1 18 Speed Priority Selection No Q Q iMulti Step Speed Operation 1 2 Binary Input d
266. mber of the multi func tion output to be output Channel 5 output selection DO Ch Select Effective when a DO 08 Digital Output Card is used Set the number of the multi func tion output to be output Channel 6 output selection DO Ch6 Select Effective when a DO 08 Digital Output Card is used Set the number of the multi func tion output to be output Channel 7 output selection DO Ch7 Select Effective when a DO 08 Digital Output Card is used Set the number of the multi func tion output to be output Channel 8 output selection DO Ch8 Select Effective when a DO 08 Digital Output Card is used Set the number of the multi func tion output to be output DO 08 output mode selection DO 08 Selection Effective when a DO 08 Digital Output Card is used Set the output mode 0 8 channel individual outputs 1 Binary code output 2 Output according to F5 01 to F5 08 settings Name Display Operation selection after communica tions error Comm Bus Fault Sel ESerial Communications Settings F6 Description Sets the stopping method for communications errors 0 Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation Fac tory Setting Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Lo
267. me 1000 msec 81 31 Torque limit time at stop 0 msec 82 01 Motor rated speed 1380 rpm 82 02 Slip compensation gain in motoring mode 0 7 82 03 Slip compensation gain in regenerative mode 1 0 82 05 Slip compensation torque detection delay time 1 0 sec No Name Bru Setting S2 06 Slip compensation torque detection time 0 5 sec S2 07 Slip compensation delay time 200 msec S3 01 Short floor operation selection 0 3 03 Inspection deceleration ramp time 0 0 sec S3 04 Nominal Leveling speed detection level 0 0 Hz S3 05 Nominal speed for short floor calculation 0 0 Hz S3 06 Light load direction search for rescue operation 0 S3 07 Light load search time 1 0 sec S3 08 Output phase order 0 S3 09 Frequency reference missing FRL fault detection 1 S3 10 Light load search frequency 3 00 Hz S3 11 Rescue operation torque limit 100 S3 12 Base block restart selection 0 S3 13 Traction sheave diameter 400 mm S3 14 Roping 2 S3 15 Gear Ratio 1 000 S3 16 Over acceleration detection level 1 5 m s S3 17 Over acceleration deceleration time constant 0 05 sec S3 18 Over acceleration detection method selection 0 S3 19 Inspection speed upper limit 25 0 Hz S3 20 Short floor minimum constant speed time 0 0 sec 83 21 Distance calculation acceleration time gain 150 0 S3 22 Distance calculation decelera
268. me at start DC Inj T start Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at start in units of 1 second Used to stop coasting motor and restart it When the set value is 0 DC injection braking at start is not performed 5 47 5 48 Name Display DC injection braking Zero speed time at stop DC Inj T stop Description Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at stop in units of 1 second Used to prevent coasting after the stop command is input When the set value is 0 00 DC injection braking at stop is not performed Factory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector MEMO BUS Register Brake release delay time Brake open delay Sets the time delay from the brake open command to the start of acceleration This timer can be used to avoid running against the closed brake at start Brake close delay time Brake CloseDe lay Sets the time delay from the inter nal brake close command until the brake control output is switched This timer can be used to avoid closing the brake when the motor is still turning SE2 detection delay time SE2 det T Used to set the delay time for the detection of a SE2 fault At the time 1 06 S1 14 after the Fwd Rev command was given the output current is measured If it is below 25 of the no load current E2 03 setting a SE2 fault w
269. med for this function the output is switched if both base block inputs BB and BB1 are enabled e 58 M X Q Motor and V f Pattern Setup The L7 inverter supports 2 motor settings main motor and door motor E2 E4 OO parameters for V f con trol Open Loop Vector and Closed Loop Vector for IM The active motor setup can be selected by a digital input Closed Loop Vector Control for PM supports 1 motor setting main motor E5 L1L1 parameters only Setting Motor Parameters for Induction Motors Motor 1 and 2 In order to achieve the maximum performance the V f pattern and the motor data must be set correctly The number of motor parameters which can be set depend on the selected control mode In the vector control methods the motor parameters can be set automatically by using the autotuning function Up Down command Base Block Input l l Term BB amp BB1 BB Monitor 1 TT LT LT BB Monitor 2 l l l refer to page 4 4 Autotuning However if autotuning does not complete normally the parameters must be set manually like described below iRelated Parameters Control Methods Parameter N Factory CU Open Closed Closed Set by 6 No ET Setting dud Vif Loo Loo ECC PE Aue d Operation p p Vector tuning Vector Vector for PM d1 19 Motor 2 speed reference 0 00 Hz No A A A No E1 01 Input voltage setting 400 v No Q Q Q
270. minal Functions 3 1 tree tes p ones 2 18 Control Circuit Terminal Connections eese teet tens 2 20 EN81 1 Conform Wiring with One Motor Contactor sssse 2 21 Control Circuit Wiring Precautions cccccccesssscsssssssescesessessseesestessseseseeeeseeeeeseeeeseeees 2 22 WV IPI CNG CK aig ces he edieen teen ceaceana Sede dactiann ceetuerse gue snubae ha veertetnd a mactuueudevehees 2 23 der m H 2 23 Installing and Wiring Option Cards sseeemRm 2 24 Option Card Models and Specifications 2 24 auc i he Ee ia aa A lI al deca IO oh 2 24 PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications ssssssssss 2 25 Wiring the Terminal Blocks ssssssseseeetettntette enne 2 31 LED Monitor Digital Operator and Modes 3 1 LED Monitor JVOP 163 eite ti Ie ede RE an ERA ERU Nen REA ERR ERR ERR 3 2 LED Uso NET 3 2 OED Display Examples assente mattisa tete ee tent ott subi te UA d 3 2 Digital Operator JVOP 160 OY 5 iecit itte inc 3 3 Digital Operator Display 12 34 21 oe in RR LA ID EAE EI RA E d 3 3 Digital Operator Keys iuuat ree o eR Tb o Uo lue a 3 3 9 inverter MOdSS 71 eue eet et nr desidia tue eae aes 3 5 Switching Oo CS 3 6 Drive Mode uae Lc Ma ME MM CC E 3 7 Quick Programming Mode ase asser ctos ce een LA cn tA i eed 3 8 9 Advanced Programming Made 2 toe b
271. minal S3 Sel Terminal S7 func tion selection Multi function input 5 Terminal S3 Sel 5 Multi function Digital Input Functions Control Methods Open Closed Setting Value Function Loop eon Loop oop Vec Vector Vector tor PM Multi step speed reference 1 Multi step speed reference 2 Multi step speed reference 3 Jog frequency command higher priority than multi step speed reference Accel decel time 1 switch over External baseblock NO NO contact Baseblock at ON External baseblock NC NC contact Baseblock at OFF mi Sj l ui oala AJo Not used Set when a terminal is not used Fault reset Reset when turned ON Emergency stop NO Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1 09 when ON Motor 2 selection NO Motor 2 3 O00 and 4 O00 is selected when ON Emergency stop NC Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1 09 when OFF Timer function input the times are set in b4 01 and b4 02 and the timer function output is set in H2 LILI Accel decel time switch over 2 External fault Input mode NO contact NC contact Detection mode Normal during operation Nominal Speed Selection d1 09 Intermediate Speed Selection d1 10 Releveling Speed Selection d1 13 Leveling Speed Selection d1 17 Inspection Run Selection d1 14 Rescue Operation Select
272. moving the front cover a The removal and attachment procedures are described below Removing the Digital Operator LED Monitor Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator LED Monitor in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Dig ital Operator LED Monitor and lift the Digital Operator LED Monitor in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator LED Monitor as shown in the following illustration Fig 1 13 Removing the Digital Operator LED Monitor Model CIMR L7Z43P7 Shown Above iRemoving the Front Cover Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration Fig 1 14 Removing the Front Cover Model CIMR L7Z43P7 Shown Above iMounting the Front Cover After wiring the terminals mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing the steps to remove the front cover in reverse order 1 Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator LED Monitor attached to the front cover other wise Digital Operator LED Monitor may malfunction due to imperfect contact 2 Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut iMounting the Digital Operator LED Monitor After attaching th
273. mples Normal operation The figure below shows the LED display when the drive is ready and no FWD REV signal is active RUN DS1 DS2 POWER 9 VV v e e po Alarm The figure below shows an example of the LED display when a minor fault occurs Refer to Chapter 6 and take appropriate countermeasures RUN DS1 DS2 POWER 9 Nl VV Q e AX Fault The figure below shows an example of the LED display when an OV or UV fault has occurred RUN DS2 POWER Nl ZTN sss Y a aa Digital Operator JVOP 160 OY Digital Operator Display The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below REMOTE Li LI i E i FWD REV SEQ REF ALARM LOCAL REMOTE Drive Status Indicators FWD Lights up when a forward run command is input REV Lights up when a reverse run command is input SEQ Lights up when any other run command source than the digital operator is selected REF Lights up when any other frequency reference source than the digital operator is selected ALARM Lights up when an error or alarm has occurred Data Display 3 Displays monitor data parameter numbers and param eter settings Mode Display displayed at the upper left of data display DRIVE Lights up in Drive Mode QUICK Lights up in Quick Programming Mode ADV Lights up in Advanced Programming Mode VERIFY Lights
274. n A1 03 7 13 Auto tuning Faults Auto tuning faults are shown below When the following faults are detected the fault is displayed on the digi tal operator and the motor coasts to stop No fault or alarm outputs will be operated Display Table 7 5 Auto tuning Faults Meaning Motor data fault Probable causes There is an error in the data input for autotuning Corrective Actions Check the input data There is an error in the relationship between the motor output and the motor rated current Check the Inverter and motor capacity There is an error between the no load current setting and the input motor rated current when auto tuning for line to line resistance is performed for vector control Check the motor rated current and no load current Minor Fault An alarm is detected during auto tun ing Check the input data Check wiring and the machine Check the load STOP key STOP key input The STOP key was pressed to cancel autotuning Resistance Line to Line Resistance Fault No Load Current No Load Current Fault Rated slip Rated Slip Fault Autotuning was not completed in the specified time The auto tuning result is outside the parameter setting range Check the input data Check the motor wiring If the motor is connected to the machine disconnect it If the setting of T1 03 is higher than the Inverter input power suppl
275. n 100 100 means that the S curve is not compensated 3 If parameter d1 18 is set to 0 or 3 and the leveling speed input is released during short floor oper ation the inverter accelerates or decelerates to the selected reference speed 4 If the Dwell function b6 LIL1 parameters is activated the dwell function is performed during short floor operation but it is not considered in the optimal speed calculation The influence of the Dwell function must be compensated using the gains S3 21 and S3 22 5 The advanced short floor function does not work during rescue operation and inspection run 6 If the speed reference is input using an analog input the advanced short floor function should not be used 7 If the advanced short floor function is used the following parameter settings should be in given range 9 6 Hz E1 04 lt 100 Hz 4 8 Hz d1 08 100Hz 0 1 sec C1 O0 50 sec 6 19 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times The acceleration time indicates the time to increase the speed from 096 to 10096 of the maximum speed set in E1 04 The deceleration time indicates the time to decrease the speed from 100 to 0 of E1 04 Four separate acceleration and deceleration times can be set They can be switched over between using digital input signals the automatic accel decel time switch over function with a changeable switching speed level Th
276. n assembly screws and pull out the fan assembly from the Inverter 6 Remove the cooling fan s from the fan assembly Mounting the Cooling Fan After attaching the new cooling fan s reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket be sure that the air flow direction faces the top of the Inverter Air flow direction Control card bracket x P 2d e ZA FF Fan Assembly Control card Connector Fig 8 2 Cooling Fan Replacement Inverters of 22 kW or More Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card The Terminal Card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the control wiring iRemoving the Terminal Card 1 Remove the terminal cover Digital Operator LED Monitor and front cover 2 Remove the wires connected to FE and or NC on the terminal card 3 Loosen the mounting screws on the left and right sides of the terminal card 1 until they are free It is not necessary to remove these screws completely They are captive and self rising 4 Pull the terminal card out in the direction of the block arrow 2 iMounting the Terminal Card Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card Confirm that the terminal card and the control PCB properly meet at connector CN8 before insertion The connector pins may be damaged if the terminal card is forced into place possibly preventing correct Inverter operation Fig 8 3
277. n explained P above If so check the motor data settings E2 O0 and the V f pattern E1 LILI Ifthe current still runs into the limit it might be necessary to install a one size bigger inverter IMPORTANT For selecting an inverter please consider the low frequency current limit as described above and select an inverter with an appropriate current margin MY Control Brake Sequence Up and Down Commands i Travel start in Up or Down direction UP and Down commands are the travel direction information To start in the elevator in Up or Down direction the following conditions have to be fulfilled At least one speed reference must be selected if digital inputs are used for speed reference selection The hardware base block signal must be set not base block condition When a digital input is set as contactor confirmation input the contactor confirmation signal must be present before the travel starts To start in the Up direction the Up signal must be set To start in the Down direction the Down signal must be set i Travel stop The inverter can be stopped as follows The direction command UP or Down signal is removed The speed reference selection signal is removed if digital inputs are used for speed reference selection e f d1 18 is set to 3 and all speed inputs are removed BUp Down Command Source Selection The input source for the Up and Down signal can be selected in parameter b
278. n is outside the range of 1 to 16 n write mode the number of data bytes in the message is not No of packets x 2 Data setting error A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters When writing parameters the parameter setting is invalid Write mode error Attempting to write parameters to the inverter during operation Attempting to write via ENTER commands during operation Attempting to write parameters other than A1 00 to A1 05 E1 03 or 02 04 when warning alarm CPF03 defec tive EEPROM has occurred Attempting to write read only data Writing during DC bus undervoltage UV error Writing parameters to the inverter during UV DC bus undervoltage alarm Writing via ENTER commands during UV DC bus undervoltage alarm Writing error during parameters processing Attempting to write parameters while processing parameters in the Inverter i Slave Not Responding 6 In the following cases the slave ignores the write function rem When a communications error overrun framing parity or CRC 16 is detected in the command message When the gap between two blocks 8 bit of a message exceeds 24 bits When the command message data length is invalid 6 93 e 94 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasures for Inverter and motor problems Protective and Diagnostic Functions
279. ncoder do not fit to the L7Z data format ECS SUM CHECK ERROR The check sum of the data which were writ ten into the inverter is wrong Retry the COPY command VERFIY EVE VERIFY ERROR The data in the encoder and inverter data do not match 7 17 Troubleshooting Due to parameter setting errors faulty wiring etc the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started If that occurs use this section as a reference and perform the appropriate countermea sures If a fault code is displayed refer to page 7 2 Protective and Diagnostic Functions If A Parameter Cannot Be Set Use the following information if a parameter cannot be set BThe display does not change when the Increment and Decrement keys are pressed The following causes are possible The Inverter is operating drive mode There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation Turn off the RUN command and then set the parameters Passwords do not match Only when a password is set If the parameter A1 04 Password and A1 05 Password Setting settings are different the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed Enter the correct password in A1 04 If the password got lost check parameter A1 05 Password Setting by pressing the Shift RESET key and the MENU key simultaneously in the A1 04 display Read the password and set it in parameter A 1 04
280. nd Modes The Varispeed L7 is equipped with the LED Monitor JVOP 163 which shows the drive status The optional Digi tal Operator JVOP 160 OY can be used to adjust parameters as required This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions and provides an overview of operating modes and switching between modes LED gn gei lA uisu Mee 3 2 Digital Operator JVOP 160 OY a aee rro noo sand rein 3 3 Y B ro Monitor JVOP 163 LED Monitor The LED monitor indicates the operation status by combinations of the LED display Lights up Blink and Off at RUN DSI and DS2 The LED pattern is as follows at each mode RUN DSI DS2 POWER Operation Mode Indicators e e e e zi RUN Lights up during inverter run Off if the inverter is stopped DS1 Drive Status 1 DS2 Drive Status 2 The combination of the three LEDs Run DS1 and DS2 indicates the drive status LED MONITOR JVOP 163 POWER STATUS X READY X RUN Drive Status Indications e e oc ee N ALARM RUN Base Block External Fault Sequence Error e 6 Alarm Indications ee j Oe e Bey le OtherFaut OV UV OH OL OC GF SC PGO CPF PUF Fault Indications e eee e e eje jexesee i LIGHT BLINK LIGHT OFF Fig 3 1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions LED Display Exa
281. ndertorque is detected by observing the output current in V f control the inverter rated output current is equal to 100 observing the torque reference value in Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control the motor rated torque is equal to 100 6 40 Related Parameter No Parameters Control Methods Change during Operation Factory Setting Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Torque detection selection 1 A A Torque detection level 1 Torque detection time 1 Torque detection selection 2 Torque detection level 2 Torque detection time 2 Multi function Output H2 01 to H2 03 Function Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM Overtorque undertorque detection 1 NO NO contact Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON Yes Overtorque undertorque detection 1 NC NC contact Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF Yes Overtorque undertorque detection 2 NO NO contact Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON Overtorque undertorque detection 2 NC NC contact Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF BL6 01 and L6 04 Set Values and Operator Display JVOP 160 OY only The relationship between alarms displayed on the digita
282. ng Digital Operator LED Monitor Functions iRRelated Parameters Control Methods Closed Loop Vector Parameter Factory Open Close No Setting Loop dLoop Vector Vector PM ol 01 Monitor selection A o1 02 Monitor selection after power up Frequency units of reference setting and monitor Setting unit for frequency reference related parameters LCD Display contrast STOP key during control circuit terminal operation User parameter initial value Inverter kVA selection gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Frequency reference setting method selection Operation selection when digital operator LED Monitor is dis connected Cumulative operation time setting Cumulative operation time selection Initialize Mode i Fan operation time setting Fault trace initialize Number of Travels monitor initialize Traction sheave diameter Roping ratio gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Gear ratio Depends on the inverter capacity iMonitor Selection 01 01 Using parameter 01 01 the third monitor item that is displayed in drive mode can
283. nt Brake command INO contact Brake command when ON Contactor Control Multi function con Contactor Control when ON INO contact tact outputs Relay contacts Contact capacity 1 A max at 250 VAC 1 A max at 30 VDC nverter Ready NO contact Inverter Ready when ON ault output signal SPDT Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC Change over contact Fault when OPEN across MB and MC This terminal is available on inverters with hardware SPEC B only page 1 4 Inverter Specifications describes how to find out the inverter hardware version 2 Do not use this power supply for supplying any external equipment 3 When driving a reactive load such as a relay coil with DC power supply always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2 11 Fig 2 11 Flywheel Diode Connection Flywheel diode l oN d i The rating of the flywheel diode must be at least as high as the circuit volt age External power 30 Coil VDC max I 1A max appo Pd t 2 18 B Sinking Sourcing Mode NPN PNP Selection The input terminal logic can be switched over between sinking mode 0 V common NPN and sourcing mode 24V common PNP by using the jumper CNS An external power supply is also supported providing more freedom in signal input methods Table 2 10 Sinking Sourcing Mode and Input Signals Internal Power Supply Sinking Mode NPN Y 3n PEK 182 BS
284. ntered Motor d and q Axis Inductance E5 06 E5 07 Set the q axis and d axis inductance value in mH as written on the nameplate or the motor data sheet Motor Voltage Constant E5 09 Set the motor voltage constant k is set in mV as written on the nameplate or the motor data sheet Motor Rotation Direction Change If the motor operates in the wrong direction with an Up or Down command the direction can be changed by parameter 83 08 iRelated Parameters Control Methods Change during Operation Open Closed Closed Loop Loop Loop Vector Vector Vector PM Parameter Factory No Setting F1 05 Encoder direction change No No Q Q S3 08 Output phase order No A A A EChange Motor Direction in V f or Open Loop Vector Control To change the motor rotation direction without changing the wiring parameter S3 08 can be changed f S3 08 0 the output phase order will be U V W f S3 08 1 the output phase order will be U W V ilChange Motor Direction in Closed Loop Vector Control If Closed Loop Vector Control for IM or PM is used besides changing parameter S3 08 the encoder direction has to be changed by setting F1 05 Y A P If Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors is used always perform an encoder offset tuning e after parameter S3 08 of F1 05 has been changed IMPORTANT 6 63 Mn a Digital Operator LED Monitor Functions Setti
285. o read and set the basic parameters Advanced programming mode Verify mode U Use this mode to read and set all parameters U se this mode to read and set parameters that have been changed from their factory set values Autotuning mode Use this mode when using a motor with unknown motor data in the vector control modes The motor data are measured calculated and set automatically This mode can also be used to measure the motor line to line resistance only Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating in the vector control modes Switching Modes The mode selection display appears when the MENU key is pressed Press the MENU key from the mode selection display to switch through the modes in sequence Press the DATA ENTER key to enter a mode and to switch from a monitor display to the setting display Mode Selection Display MENU ne Monitor Displa i i play Setting Display DRIVE Main Menu Operation DRIVE Rdy Monitor 01 50 00Hz U1 02 50 00Hz U1 03 10 05A 2 DifYequency Rel U1 F 50 00Hz U1 02 50 00Hz U1 03 10 05A Control Method A1 0220 0 Vif Gentrol ESC ESC Main Menu Quick Setting A ADV ADV ser ADV Main Menu Initialization E a ie Eum PETS UUUE T O60z6 771 A1 0 0 Programming English English 0
286. om pensation Countermeasure Increase the torque compensation delay time C4 02 Increase the slip compensation delay time C3 02 Too soft or too hard ASR controller set tings Readjust the ASR P gain C5 01 and the ASR integral time C5 02 Wrong motor data Readjust the motor data E2 OD especially the slip E2 02 and no load current values E2 03 or per form an autotuning Common Too hard acceleration change Increase the S curve at acceleration end C2 02 Motor stops shortly when the leveling speed is reached undershooting Too low torque at low speed Increase the minmum E1 10 and medium E1 08 V f pattern voltages Make sure that the starting and level ing current does not rise too high Too low torque at low speed Increase the minmum E1 10 and medium E1 08 V f pattern voltages Make sure that the starting and level ing current does not rise too high Wrong motor data Slip overcompensation Readjust the motor data E2 OD especially the slip E2 02 and no load current values E2 03 or per form an autotuning Wrong motor data Readjust the motor data E2 OD especially the slip E2 02 and no load current values E2 03 or per form an autotuning Too slow ASR controller Increase the ASR P gain C5 09 and decrease the ASR integral time C5 10 Common Too fast deceleration rate change Increase the S curve at deceleration end C2 04
287. on selection 1 L8 10 Cooling fan control selection 0 L8 11 Cooling fan control delay time 60 sec L8 12 Ambient temperature 45 C L8 18 Soft CLA selection 1 L8 20 LF detection time 0 2 sec n2 01 Speed feedback detection control AFR gain 1 00 n2 02 Speed feedback detection control AFR time constant 50 msec n5 01 Feed forward control selection 1 n5 02 Motor Accel Time 0 178 sec n5 03 Feed forward proportional gain 1 00 n5 05 Motor acceleration time tuning 0 n8 29 Current regulator q axis P gain 1000 rad sec n8 30 Current regulator q axis I time 10 0 ms n8 32 Current regulator d axis P gain 1000 rad sec n8 33 Current regulator d axis I gain 10 0 ms n8 35 Magnet position detection method 5 n8 46 Inductance measurement current level 10 0 n9 60 A D converter start delay time 0 0 psec 10 9 Factory No Name Setting Setting ol 01 Monitor selection 6 01 02 Monitor selection after power up 1 01 03 Frequency units of reference setting and monitor 0 01 04 Setting unit for frequency parameters related to V f characteristics 0 01 05 LCD Display contrast adjustment 3 02 01 LOCAL REMOTE key enable disable 0 02 02 STOP key during control circuit terminal operation 0 02 03 User parameter initial value 0 02 04 kVA selection 0 02 05 Frequency reference setting method sele
288. onform Wiring with One Motor Contac tor In order to use the L7Z with one motor contactor instead of two while keeping compliance to the EN81 1 1998 the following rules have to be followed The hardware base block function using the terminals BB and BB1 must be used to enable disable the drive The input logic must be PNP fthe elevator safety chain is opened the inverter output must be cut This means that the base block sig nals at the terminals BB and BB1 must be opened e g via an interposing relay The base block monitor function must be programmed for one of the multi function outputs H2 LILI 46 47 The regarding digital output contact must be implemented in the contactor supervision circuit of the controller in order to prevent a restart in case of an inverter base block or motor contactor malfunction All contactors must be conform to the EN81 1 1998 paragraph 13 2 i Fig 2 13 shows an EN81 1 1998 wiring example Fig 2 13 EN81 1 Conform Wiring with One Motor Contactor Example Safety Chain Circuit Elevator Controller E Contactor Close Contactor Check EN Command Restart Permission N ee eee 7 24VDC 1 f i i i i H i i i i i i I viy BB BB1 Up Down Speed selection BB Monitor NC Yaskawa CIMR L7xxxx The wiring rules and the wiring example are appr
289. ontact 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output Capacity CDBR Braking Unit Braking Resistor Inverter Thermal overload relay contact Thermal overload relay contact Fig 2 7 Connecting the Braking Resistor and Braking Unit 2 15 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel When two or more Braking Units are connected in parallel the wiring and jumper settings must be done like shown in Fig 2 8 There is a jumper for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a master or slave Mas ter must be set for the first Braking Unit only Slave must be set for all other Braking Units i e from the second Unit onwards Thermal overload Thermal overload relay contact Braking Resistor Inverter Braking Unit 1 Thermal overload relay Thermal overload relay Thermal overload relay contact Braking Resistor MASTER Oo SLAVE Braking Unit 2 contact contact Fig 2 8 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel EControl Power Supply Connection relay contact Braking Resistor Thermal overload relay contact The controller of the Varispeed L7 can be supplied by an external voltage source during rescue operation using the twisted wires marked with PO and NO Upon shipment the wires are connected to the main circuit terminal B1 units up to 18 5 kW or terminal 3 units from 22 kW and above and terminal L1
290. op Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Input level of exter nal error from Com munications Option Card EFO Detection 0 Always detect 1 Detect during operation Stopping method for external error from Communica tions Option Card EFO Fault Action 0 Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation Trace Sampling Time Trace Sample Tim Current monitor unit selection Current Unit Sel Sets the unit of current monitor 0 Ampere 1 100 8192 Torque reference torque limit selec tion from communi cations option card Torque Ref Lmt Sel 0 Torque reference torque limit by communications option disabled 1 Torque reference torque limit by communications option enabled 5 31 Terminal Function Parameters H iMulti function Digital Inputs H1 Control Methods Name Closed MEMO Setting Factory Open Closed eae BUS Range Setting Loop Loop Vector Register Vector Vector PM Description Display Terminal S3 func tion selection Multi function input 1 A Terminal S3 Sel Terminal S4 func tion selection Multi function input 2 Terminal S3 Sel Terminal S5 func tion selection Multi function input 3 Terminal S3 Sel Terminal S6 func tion selection Multi function input 4 Ter
291. or Closed Loop Vector H3 01 Frequency reference AI 14B CH signal level selection H3 02 Frequency reference AI 14B CHI input gain H3 03 Frequency reference AI 14B CHI input bias H3 04 AI 14B CH3 signal level selection H3 05 AI 14B CH3 function selection H3 06 AI 14B CH3 input gain H3 07 AI 14B CH3 input bias H3 08 AI 14B CH2 signal level selection H3 09 AI 14B CH2 function selection H3 10 AI 14B CH2 input gain H3 11 AI 14B CH2 input bias H3 12 Analog input filter time constant for the AI 14B gt Pl Sl el Sl el gt el gt gt gt gt Pl gt Sl el gt jl Se ee H3 15 Terminal A1 function selection 0 H3 16 Terminal A1 input gain 100 0 H3 17 Terminal A1 input bias 0 0 Adjusting Analog Input Signals The frequency reference can be input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage The voltage level at terminal A1 is 0 to 10V The analog input channels of the AI 14B option card can be used with 0 to 10V or 10 to 10V The input signal levels can be selected using H3 01 for AI I4B CHI H3 04 for AI 14B CH3 H3 08 for AI I4B CH2 The signals can be adjusted using the parameters H3 02 Gain and H3 03 Bias for Channel 1 of the AI 14B option card H3 06 Gain and H3 07 Bias for Channel 3 of the AI 14B option card H3 10 Gain and H3 11 Bias for Channel 2 of the AI 14B option card H3 16
292. or Programming Errors and eliminate the fault source Open the brake close the motor contactor turn the motor slowly in Forward direction and check monitor U1 05 Does PGO no Check the wiring encoder feedback Check readjust the encoder occur power supply Is the sign of the Check the encoder wiring U1 05 value positive Change parameter F 1 05 not Set T1 01 4 Encoder Offset Tuning Press the UP button until the Tuning Ready display appears Refer to Close the motor contactor s and page 7 14 Auto tuning Faults press the RUN key and eliminate the fault source Wait until the tuning is finished No Fault code is displayed Yes Tuning successful display is shown Forward direction means The direction the motor turns with an UP command at terminal S1 i e with a clockwise rotating 3 phase supply and U U V V W W wiring between inverter and motor Usually the direction is clockwise seen from the motor shaft traction sheave side Refer to the motor instruction manual or consult the manufacturer for details about the rotation direction Open the contactors open the base block inputs and close the brake FINISH Fig 4 4 Encoder Offset Autotuning Precautions for Induction Motor Autotuning If the Motor Rated Voltage is Higher than the Power Supply Voltage If the motor rated voltage is higher than the power supply voltage lower the base voltage val
293. or UP DOWN commands triggers the contactor open com mand the motor brake close command and the base block Inspection RUN Inspection RUN Stop by Up Down signal removal Stop by Inspection Speed signal removal DC Injection DC Injection zero servo zero servo Speed Speed Hardware BB j Hardware BB j Up Down D I Up Down Dil E I L I Inspection Speed Internal RUN MC closed D O Brake opened D O Inspection Speed Internal RUN MC closed D O Brake opened D O S3 03 gt 0 sec Stop with deceleration ramp The inverter stops when the Inspection Speed command or the Up Down command is removed In this case The output frequency is reduced using the deceleration time set in S3 03 When the minimum frequency is reached the brake open signal is removed immediately and the contactor control output is removed immediately The inverter output is cut after the brake open command removal The falling edge of the Inspection Speed command or UPIDOWN commands triggers the deceleration Inspection RUN Inspection RUN Stop by Up Down signal removal Stop by Inspection Speed signal removal DC Injection DC Injection Zero servo Zero servo Speed Speed Hardware BB Hardware BB j Up Down D I Up Down D I Inspection Speed Inspection Speed 1 1
294. or a 400V 3 7kW inverter 2 The value depends on the control mode The given value is valid if V f control is selected 3 All factory set parameters are for a Yaskawa standard 4 pole motor The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity the values shown are for a 400 V Class Inverter for 3 7 kW 4 Rotating tuning only E Multi function Digital Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Control Methods 3 Closed Function Open Closed hose Loop Loop Vector Vector Vector PM Motor 2 selection OFF Motor 1 ON Motor 2 A A E Multi function Digital Outputs H2 01 to H2 03 Control Methods Function Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector iSetting Inverter Input Voltage E1 01 Motor selection OFF Motor 1 ON Motor 2 A A Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1 01 so that it matches the power supply voltage liSetting the V f Pattern If E1 03 is set to F the V f pattern can be set individually using the parameters E1 04 to E1 10 see Fig 6 24 Output voltage V E1205 fre M tees VMAX E13 hee cat ois gu de crc oes ue Bent ee seta uet E VBASE E1 08 VB E1 10 VMIN Frequency Hz E1 09 E1 07 E1 06 E1 04 FMIN FB FA FMAX Fig 6 24 V f pattern setting EN To set the V f characteristics linear set E1 07 and E1 09 to the same value In this case E1 08 will be ignored INFO Setting
295. orm an encoder off set tuning Sheave diameter gear ratio or roping setting incorrect Verify the settings of S3 13 S3 14 and S3 15 Too short acceleration or deceleration time Adjust the acceleration and deceler ation times EFO Opt External Fit flashing 7 10 Communication Option Card External Fault An external fault condition was input from by communication option card Check for an external fault condi tion Verify the parameters Verify communication signals Display EF3 Ext Fault S3 flashing Table 7 3 Alarm Detection Meaning External fault at terminal S3 EF4 Ext Fault S4 flashing External fault at terminal S4 EF5 Ext Fault S5 flashing External fault at terminal S5 EF6 Ext Fault S6 flashing External fault at terminal S6 EF7 Ext Fault S7 flashing External fault at terminal S7 Probable causes An external fault was input by a multi function input terminal S3 to S7 which is programmed for the external fault function alarm output Corrective Actions Eliminate the cause of the external fault condition BUS Option Com Err flashing Option Communications Alarm After initial communication was estab lished the connection was lost Connection is broken and or the master has stopped the communication Check the connections and all user side software configurations Ext Run Active C
296. orque L6 02 or L6 05 Over torque detection 1 NO or over torque detection 2 NO Overtorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10 of the Inverter rated output current or motor rated torque Fig 6 15 Overtorque Detection Motor current output torque L6 02 or L6 05 Under torque detection 1 NO 6 or under torque detection 2 NO EN Undertorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 1096 of the Inverter rated output current or motor rated torque Fig 6 16 Undertorque Detection ilCar Stuck Detection OL3 Using the Overtorque detection The Over torque detection function can be used to detect a stuck car The torque detection function 1 can be used for this Therefore a digital output has to be set to Over torque detection 1 H2 LILI B or 17 Using this with the factory settings a car stuck is detected output is switched when the torque current is higher than 150 for 10 sec The level can be adjusted in L6 02 the time in L6 03 The output is switched of and an OL3 fault will be indicated see Fig 6 7 DC Injection Zero servo speed Inverter enable D I Up Down D l pc Selected Speed D I I Fault Torque is higher than L6 02 detect time L6 03 Fig 6 17 Car Stuck fault detection 6 42 Limiting the Motor Torque Torque Limit Function This function allows limitation of motor shaft torque independently for each of the
297. orque compensation Additionally to the ASR parameters C5 O0 the zero servo control can be tuned using the parameter S1 20 Zero servo gain ncrease S1 20 if there is a rollback when the brake opens Decrease S1 20 if vibrations occur when the zero servo function is active If a digital output is set to Zero Servo End H2 L1L1 33 this output can be used to signalize that the rotor position is within a certain bandwidth around the zero position which can be set in parameter 81 21 the band width is set in PG pulses and must be set 4 times of the allowable actual PG pulses Short Floor Operation The short floor operation is activated 1f the leveling speed command is set before the nominal speed was reached The L7 inverter supports 2 methods of short floor operation Simple short floor operation which can be enabled by setting S3 01 1 When the leveling speed input 1s set and the reached speed is higher than 4096 of the nominal speed the inverter decelerates to 40 and keeps this speed for a calculated time before it decelerates to the leveling speed and finally stops If the reached speed is below 40 of the nominal speed the inverter accelerates to 4096 speed and keeps it for a calculated time before it decelerates to the leveling speed Ifthe leveling input is set during constant speed run and the speed reference is lower than 4096 ofthe nom inal speed the speed is hold for a calculated time in order to minimize the
298. otor rated power F1 01 PG pulse constant E5 03 Motor rated current F1 05 PG rotation direction E5 04 Motor pole number F121 Absolute encoder selection E5 05 Motor line to line resistance F122 Magnet position offset i Saving Parameters Into the Encoder Memory To save parameters in the encoder memory the Encoder write protection must be off F1 26 1 and the parameter F1 25 has to be set to 1 SERED INV gt ENC WRITING is displayed during the save process The display of F1 25 automatically returns to 0 when the operation is finished ERED WRITE COM PLETE is displayed If any fault occurs the fault code will be displayed refer to page 7 17 Machine Data Copy Function Faults Parameters which had been stored in the encoder before will be overwritten iRead Parameters From the Encoder Memory To read parameters form the encoder memory the parameter F1 25 must be set to 2 Before reading the param eters make sure that the correct control mode and encoder type are selected in the parameters A1 02 and n8 35 If parameter n8 35 has to be changed cycle the power supply after changing it and set parameter F1 25 to 2 afterwards ECPY ENC gt INV COPIYING is displayed during the read process The display of F1 25 automatically returns to 0 when the operation is finished ECPY COPY COMPLETE is displayed If any fault occurs the fault code will be displayed refer to page 7 17 Machine Data Copy Function
299. oved by the TUEV Sued Germany For more details please contact your OYMC sales representative 2 21 Control Circuit Wiring Precautions The following precautions for wiring the control circuits must be considered Control circuit and main circuit wiring should be separated terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 B1 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 42 and 43 PO NO and other high power lines The wiring for control circuit terminals MA MB MC M1 M2 M3 M4 MS and M6 contact outputs should be separated from wiring to other control circuit terminals If an optional external power supply is used it should be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply Twisted pair or shielded twisted pair cables should be used for control circuits to prevent operating faults NO The cable shields should be connected to the ground with the maximum contact area Cable shields have to be grounded on both cable ends 2 22 s ua P Wiring Check Checks Check all wiring after wiring has been completed Do not perform continuity check on control circuits Per form the following checks on the wiring s all wiring correct Have no wire clippings screws or other foreign material been left Are all screws tight Are any wire ends contacting other terminals 2 2 23 Installing and Wiring Option Cards Option Card Models and Specifications Up to three option cards can be mounted
300. p sensor REFSIN B SIN B ae Differential inputs A A DATA RS 485 Data channel DATA Terminating resistance 130 Ohm d CLOCK Differential output Clock frequency 100 CLOCK kHz Pulse monitor A Pulse monitor A Open Collector Outputs Pulse monitor B max 24 VDC 30 mA Pulse monitor B Shielded sheath connection terminal Encoder Power Supply Voltage Selection The encoder power supply voltage must be set according to the encoder type using switch S1 on the PG F2 card Using potentiometer RH1 the encoder power supply voltage can be fine adjusted The switch S1 factory setting is OFF EnDat is preselected The encoder power supply is pre adjusted to 5 0 5 25V upon shipment E I 8V Us 7 5 10 5 V for HIPERFACE ore OFF 5V Us 5 V 5 for EnDat factory setting S1 2k 7 5 10 5 V for HIPERFACE E S12 OFF 4 85 6 5 V for EnDat factory setting 5 0 to 5 25V Fig 2 19 PG F2 Encoder Power Supply Voltage Selection 2 29 Wiring the PG F2 Card The following illustration shows PG F2 option card wiring with Hiperface or EnDat 2 1 encoders Three phase 200 VAC 400 VAC HIPERFACE or EnDat Encoder R L1 1 ORLI UTO is S L2 4 Qsti2 vrO PM TA3 _ TL3 ie t PG F2 1 O A Phase Output CN4 Led 4CN TB3 2 O A Phase Output 3 O B Phase Output 4
301. peration Performance 6 29 Pere FUNCIONS Lnasrei xinquptt ep iM T pie brlM Hv V ride puteis 6 40 Inverter FAI bins concerns aqui dco Erbe EMpHEFLI dag qe epE E MbPb Pipe e dadas 6 47 Input Terminal FUNCHOMS usse oda dne aad odere 6 50 Output Terminal FUFTODOTIS iiie ire atacan eo arae br Rasen kahdie 6 56 Motor and vr Pattern Setup sieeqeaiptibrtrpikedi da tdnnen iade 6 59 Digital Operator LED Monitor Functions 6 64 POG c PEE RR 6 72 Resous SS Wi Mee 6 77 Automatic Fault IESIBL ssc cccsccdsadecdenetinisdenvcacenesssencadensdeaees 6 81 Memobus Communications esee 6 83 E Carrier Frequency Derating and Current Limitation Carrier Frequency Setting The carrier frequency selection has a direct influence on the motor noise The higher the carrier frequency the lower is the motor noise On the other hand the overload capability of the inverter is reduced with a higher car rier frequency Both have to be considered when the setting is changed iRRelated Parameters Control Methods Parameter Factory Open Closed Closed No Setting Loop Loop Vector Vector C6 02 Carrier frequency selection Q Q i Carrier Frequency Selection The factory setting is 8 kHz for units from 3 7 to 22 kW and 5 kHz for units from 30 to 55 kW Usually the value has not to be changed However if i
302. perator Programming Errors Meaning Inverter kVA Setting Error Probable Causes The control board was replaced and the kVA parameter 02 04 is incorrect Corrective Actions Enter the correct kVA setting by referring to page 5 63 Factory Set tings Changing with Inverter Capacity 02 04 A not suitable software has beenn installed on the inverter Compare U1 14 and the software number in the nameplate Replace the software if necessary Parameter Setting is out of range Hiperface selected n8 35 4 and F1 01 is different from 512 or 1024 e F1 21 is set to2 EnDat selected n8 35 5 and F1 01 is different from 512 or 2048 F1 21 is setto Oor 1 Parameter setting was outside of the allowable range 83 01 2 Advanced short floor and E1 04 gt 100Hz or E1 04 6Hz or d1 09 gt 100Hz or d1 09 lt 4 8Hz or C1 01 to C1 08 gt 50sec or C1 01 to C1 08 0 1 sec Verify the parameter settings OPE03 Terminal Multi function Input Selection Error One of the following errors has been made in the multi function input H1 01 to H1 05 settings Functions were selected duplicative External Baseblock NO 8 and External Baseblock NC 9 were selected at the same time The Emergency Stop Command NO 15 and NC 17 are set simulta neously Verify the parameter settings in H1 o0 OPE05 Sequence Selection RUN Reference Command Selection Error The Reference Sou
303. r s data checksum was different to the digital operator s data checksum Retry the COPY function 03 01 2 Verify Function 7 16 VYE VERIFY ERROR The set value of the digital operator and the Inverter do not match Retry the Verify function 03 01 3 NL 9 Machine Data Copy Function Faults These faults can occur during the machine data encoder COPY function When a fault occurs the fault con tent is displayed on the operator The fault or alarm contact output is not operated Function WRITE from inverter to encoder Table 7 7 Machine Data Copy Function Faults Digital Operator Display ERE DATA ERROR Probable Causes A write to encoder command could not be performed since the drive is in UV under voltage condition Corrective Actions Make sure that no fault and no alarm is active and retry COPY from Encoder to Inverter EDE WRITE IMPOSSIBLE The write to encoder command is prohibited Set parameter F1 26 to 1 to permit a write to encoder command EIF WRITE DATA ERROR A communication error occurred during the write to encoder process Retry the write to encoder command ECE COPY ERROR A read to encoder command could not be performed since the drive is in UV under voltage condition Make sure that no fault and no alarm is active and retry EPE ID MISMATCH The data in the e
304. r can be operated by wiring only the main circuits DC reactor to improve input power factor optional Braking Resistor unit optional The CN5 factory setting is NPN To enable the inverter both inputs BB and BB1 must be closed If Magnetic Contactor i 2 Q0 Bl L1 A 1 3 phase power 380 to 480V L2 50 60Hz Le id L3 e PE Forward run stop Reverse run stop Nominal Speed e PG X2 i i s q Multi function nspection Run Inputs e Factory setting Optional ntermediate Speed e Leveling Speed e Not used TA3 Hardware Baseblock note 3 TA2 I i i i i i Pulse Monitor Output iB Pulse RS 422 100m or less i i MB Fault contact output Voltage adjust i N Oi 250VAC max 1A 30VDC max 1A i i 1 Factory setting i i i i at 1 ment vof Analog input powet O Analog input 2kOhm A supply 15V 20mAi i Speed reference ro H Mio i JkOhm Oto 10V i Master speed i i m2 ai Command 1 iT fe i reference 0 to 10V LLL MK petonisetung Pod N E i i a 1 a E M3 Fi Multi function By H m i Contactor Control contact output E E C d CE E E M4 o Factory setting 250VAC m
305. r copy selection Enc Copy Sel Used to memorize encoder and motor data in the encoder memory for Hiperface and EnDat encod ers 0 Normal operation 1 WRITE Inverter to encoder 2 COPY Encoder to inverter 3 VERIFY Encoder copy write permis sion selection Write Allow able Sets wether saving parameters in the encoder is permitted or not 0 Write prohibited 1 Write permitted Can be set only if HIPEFACE is selected as encoder type Channel 1 monitor selection AO Chl Select Channel gain AO Chl Gain Channel 2 monitor selection AO Ch Select Channel 2 gain AO Ch2 Gain Channel output monitor bias AO Chl Bias Channel 2 output monitor bias AO Ch Bias BAnalog Monitor Cards F4 Description Using an AO 08 option card the possible outputs signal is 0 to 10V only The setting of F4 07 and F4 08 has no effect Sets the channel 1 item bias to 100 10 V when the analog moni tor card is used This function is enabled when the analog monitor card is used Monitor selection Sets the number of the monitor item to be output Numerical portion OO of U1 00 4 10 11 12 13 14 25 28 34 35 39 and 40 cannot be set Gain Sets the percentage of the monitor item which is equal to 10V output Bias Sets the percentage of the monitor item which is equal to OV output Fac
306. r sets a delay for the current signal A D conversion iRRelated Parameters Change Open Closed Closed Parameter Factory L Name during Loop Loop No setting TEEN Vector Vector PM E Adjustments Normally an adjustment is no need to change this value However if cyclic oscillations like shown in Fig 6 13 occur during constant speed run the A D conversion delay can be increased in order to eliminate the vibra tions Torque Signal Motor Speed Fig 6 13 Oscillations caused by bad A D conversion adjustment Improving the Leveling Accuracy by Leveling Speed Slip Compensation This function can be used in V f and Open Loop Vector control to improve the leveling accuracy by compen sating the motor slip influence at leveling speed The inverter measures the current level or torque reference S2 05 sec after the speed agree condition acceler ation finished for the time set in S2 06 and calculates the average value to estimate the load This value is used for the calculation of slip which is added to the speed reference at leveling speed see Fig 6 14 S2 05 52 06 po Speed reference is increased or decreased depending on measured load Fig 6 14 Slip Compensation Working Principle 6 37 iRelated Parameters Parameter Factory No setting Motor Rated rpm Change during operation Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM Slip Compensation Gain at Motoring
307. rameter during No Setting o peration L8 09 Ground detection selection No A A A iPrecautions tis not recommended to disable this function A Ground Fault can also be detected if the contactors at the inverter output are opened when the output is still active Therefore to prevent false Ground Fault detection check the sequence and make sure that the output is switched of or base blocked before opening the contactors e 48 Cooling Fan Control This function controls the fan which is mounted to the inverters heatsink iRelated Parameters Control Methods Closed Loop Vector PM L8 10 Cooling fan control selection A A A Change during Operation Parameter Factory No Setting Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector L8 11 Cooling fan control delay time A A A iSelecting the Cooling Fan Control Using parameter L8 10 two modes can be selected 0 The fan is ON only when the inverter output is ON i e a voltage is output This is the factory setting The turn OFF delay time for the fan can be set in parameter L8 11 After a stop command the inverter waits for this time before switching OFF the cooling fan The factory setting is 60 sec 1 The fan is ON whenever the inverter power supply is switched ON Setting the Ambient Temperature iRelated Parameters Control Methods Parameter Factory Change Open Closed Closed 6 No Name
308. rarily Related Parameters Control Methods Change during Operation Parameter Factory No Setting Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Dwell frequency at start Dwell time at start Dwell frequency at stop Dwell time at stop 6 22 BApplying an Output Speed Dwell The dwell function at start is applied when the speed level set in parameter b6 01 is reached The dwell speed is kept for the time set in parameter b6 02 The dwell function at stop 1s applied when the speed reaches the level set in parameter b6 03 The dwell speed is kept for the time set in parameter b6 04 The setting is shown in Fig 6 7 Run command ON r OFF Output frequency b6 02 b6 04 Fig 6 7 Output Frequency Dwell Settings Stall Prevention During Acceleration The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if the load is too heavy If L3 01 is set to 1 enabled and the Inverter output current reaches 85 of the set value in L3 02 the accel eration rate will begin to slow down When L3 02 is exceeded the acceleration will stop If L3 01 is set to 2 optimal adjustment the motor accelerates so that the current is held at the level set in L3 02 With this setting the acceleration time setting is ignored iRelated Parameters 6 Control Methods a Parameter Name Factory pn Open Closed 3 No pong Operation n Loop Loop Vector Vector Vector
309. rated current 10 to 10 V d axis motor current refer ence Id Reference Monitors the d axis current ref erence 10 V Motor rated current 10 to 10 V The parameter is displayed only if a AI 14B option board is installed B Fault Trace U2 Name Display Description Output Signal Level Dur ing Multi Function Analog Output Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Current fault Current Fault The content of the current fault Last fault Last Fault The error content of the last fault Reference fre quency at fault Frequency Ref The reference frequency when the last fault occurred Output frequency at fault Output Freq The output frequency when the last fault occurred Output current at fault Output Current The output current when the last fault occurred Motor speed at fault Motor Speed The motor speed when the last fault occurred Output voltage ref erence at fault Output Voltage The output reference voltage when the last fault occurred DC bus voltage at fault DC Bus Voltage The main current DC voltage when the last fault occurred Output power at fault Output kWatts The output power when the last fault occurred Torque reference at fault Torque Re
310. rated in V f mode parameter b1 04 can be used to change the rotation direction If the Motor Stalls or Acceleration is Slow The torque limit has been reached When a torque limit has been set in parameters L7 01 to L7 04 the output torque will be limited according to these settings Therefore the motor may not develop enough torque to accelerate or the acceleration time might be very long The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low If the value set in L3 02 Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration is too low the acceleration time will be increased Check that the set value is suitable and that the load is not too large for the motor The stall prevention level during running is too low If the value set in L3 06 Stall Prevention Level during Running is too low the motor speed and torque will be limited Check that the set value is suitable and that the load is not too large for the motor BAuto tuning has not been performed for vector control Vector control does not work properly if auto tuning has not been performed Perform auto tuning or set the motor parameters manually 7 19 If Motor Deceleration is Slow The following causes are possible B The deceleration time is too long The following causes are possible The deceleration time setting is too long Check the deceleration time setting parameters C1 02 C1 04 C1 06 and C1 08 Motor torqu
311. rce Selection b1 01 and or the RUN Source Selection parameter b1 02 are set to 3 option board but no option board is installed Option board is not installed or is installed incorrectly Verify that the board is installed Remove the power supply and re install the option board again Recheck the setting of b1 01 and b1 02 OPE06 PG Opt Missing Control method selection error One of the control methods needing a PG feedback was selected A 1 02 3 6 but a PG option board is not installed Verify the control method selection in parameter A 1 02 and or the installation of the PG option board OPEO08 Constant Selection Function Selection Error A setting has been made which is not applicable with the current control method Example A function used only with open loop vector control was selected for V f control Verify the control method and the function Display OPEIO V f Ptrn Setting Table 7 4 Operator Programming Errors Meaning V f Parameter Setting Error Probable Causes V f parameter settings were out of range Corrective Actions Check parameters E1 L1L1 A fre quency voltage value may be set higher than the maximum fre quency voltage ERR EEPROM R W Err EEPROM write error The NV RAM data does not match the EEPROM data A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM Cycle power to the Inverter Do a factory initializatio
312. ree phase 200 VAC 400 VAC qu siz ma A A Phase Input A Phase Input B Phase Input B Phase Input Z Phase Input Z Phase Input oo o00 AOU N OOOOOOO0HOOOOOOOOOO Me A Phase Output B Phase Output Z Phase Output NOOR WN Fig 2 17 PG X2 Wiring Using the Option Cards Power Supply PG X2 TA Ae OV 5V P12 1 G 20 oy Pb 3 2 es A 4 PG A 5 De B 6 B 7 Z 8 z 9 G 0 TA3 Fig 2 18 PG X2 Wiring Using a 5 V External Power Supply Precautions The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F1 05 The factory setting is A phase leading in forward direction motor shaft turning counterclockwise seen from motor shaft side Refer to page 2 31 Wiring Precautions for general precautions 2 28 BPG F2 Option Card Supported Encoders The PG F2 option card can be used in combination with the following encoder types e Hiperface SRS60 70 EnDat 2 1 ECN1313 ECN113 ECN413 The maximum encoder speed shall not exceed 1200 min Input Output Specifications Table 2 14 PG F2 I O Specifications Contents Terminal Specifications Hiperface EnDat 5VDC 5 max 250 mA Hiperface 8VDC 45 max 150mA GND OV Uy and OV sensor OV Us 7 12V 5V Up and U
313. rol Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Max output fre quency FMAX Max Frequency Max output voltage VMAX Max Voltage Base frequency FA Base Frequency Mid output fre quency FB Mid Frequency A Mid output fre quency voltage VB Mid Voltage A Min output fre quency FMIN Min Frequency Min output fre quency voltage VMIN Min Voltage Output Voltage V VMAX E1 05 Venen E1 13 FMI FB FA FMAX E1 09 E1 07 Et 06 E1 04 Frequency Hz To set V f characteristics in a straight line set the same values for E1 07 and E1 09 In this case the setting for E1 08 will be disregarded Always ensure that the four frequen cies are set in the following manner E1 04 FMAX 2 E1 06 FA gt E1 07 FB 2 E1 09 FMIN Base voltage VBASE Base Voltage Sets the output voltage of the base fre quency E1 06 The given values are for a 400 V Class Inverter 2 EI 13 is set to the same value as E1 05 by autotuning 5 21 5 22 iMotor 1 Setup E2 Name Display Motor rated current Motor Rated FLA Description Sets the motor rated current This set value will become the refer ence value for motor protection and torque limits This parameter is an input data for autotuning Control Methods
314. rter set values in the Digital Operator use the following method Step No Explanation Digital Operator Display Press the Menu Key and select advanced programming mode ADV Main Menu Programming Press the DATA ENTER Key ADV Initialization Select Language Press the Increment and Decrement Key until parameter 03 01 is displayed Copy Function Selection ADV COPY Function Copy Funtion Sel Press the DATA ENTER Key and select the constants setting display ADV Copy Function Sel COPY SELECT Change the set value to 1 using the Increment Key ADV Copy Function Sel INV OP READ Set the changed data using the DATA ENTER Key The READ function starts ADV READ INV gt OP READING If the READ function ends normally End is displayed on the Digital Operator ADV READ READ COMPLETE The display returns to 03 01 when a key is pressed ADV Copy Function Sel 03 Hj 0 v COPY SELECT If an error is displayed press any key to cancel the error display and return to the 03 01 display Refer to page 7 16 Digital Operator Copy Function Faults for corrective actions iaWriting Parameter Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter COPY To write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter use the following method
315. rter waits for the contactor confirmation signal If no digital input is set to contactor confirmation signal H1 L1L1 86 the sequence is proceeded after exceeding the operation start delay time S1 16 The zero speed control operation is started The analog torque compensation input is latched and the torque compensation value is increased from zero to the latch value using the time constant set in parameter S1 22 After reaching the torque compensation level at start the inverter sets the brake open command The brake opens and the zero speed operation no position lock is continued until 1 04 has elapsed The speed is increased to the selected speed and is kept constant until the leveling speed is selected During acceleration when the torque fade out speed level S1 29 is reached the torque compensation value is fade out to 0 using the time constant set in S1 22 The speed is decreased to the leveling speed and is kept constant until the stop signal is given depending on d1 18 either by removing the direction signal by removing the leveling signal or by deleting the speed inputs see page 6 5 Speed Selection Sequence Using Digital Inputs The speed is decreased to the zero speed level When the Zero Speed Level S1 01 is reached zero servo operation position lock in Closed Loop is applied for the time set in S1 05 When the brake close delay time S1 07 has elapsed the brake open command is removed T
316. s Related Parameters Control Methods Open Closed Closed Loop Loop Loop Vec Vector Vector tor PM Nominal Speed his Yes Q Q 80 100 00 Q 0 00 Hz A A 0 00 0 00 Hz oo 0 00 Hz 0 00 0 00 Hz 0 00 4 00 Hz 8 00 Change during Operation Digital Input Setting H1 01 to H1 05 Parameter Factory No Setting Intermediate Speed 1 Intermediate Speed 2 Intermediate Speed 3 Releveling Speed Leveling Speed Frequency reference loss detection when d1 18 1 and HI1 LILI 83 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This speed can be selected by a combination of two inputs Digital Input Factory Settings 6 Terminal Pereme Set Value Details Su x S3 H1 01 80 Nominal speed selection d1 09 S4 H1 02 84 Inspection speed selection d1 14 S5 H1 03 81 Intermediate speed selection d1 10 S6 H1 04 83 Leveling speed selection d1 17 Higher Speed has Priority and a Leveling Speed Input is Selected H1 L1L1283 If d1 18 is set to 1 and one multi function digital input is set to leveling speed selection H1 L1L1 83 the inverter decelerates to the leveling speed d1 17 when the selected speed signal is removed Inspection Speed can not be selected as travel speed The higher speed has priority over the leveling speed i e as long as a higher speed is selected the leveling signal is disregarde
317. s input from a multi function input terminal S3 to S7 Eliminate the cause of the external fault condition CE Memobus Com Err MEMOBUS Communication Error Detected when control data was not received correctly for two seconds H5 04 is set to 0 1 or 2 and H5 05 is set to 1 Connection is broken and or the master has stopped the communication Check the connections and all PLC side software configurations BUS Option Com Err Option Communication Error After initial communication has been established the connection got lost Connection is broken and or the master has stopped the communication Check the connections and all PLC side software configurations SEI Sequence Error 1 Detected no output contactor answer back for S1 16 time setting The output contactor or auxiliary switch has a malfunction Check the output contactor SE2 Sequence Error 2 The output current at start was below 25 of no load current The output contactor was not closed at start Check the output contactor SE3 Sequence Error 3 The output current during run was below 25 of no load current The output contactor was opened dur ing run Check the output contactor Ref Missing FRL CPF00 COM ERR OP amp INV No speed was selected before the inverter start A start signal was given and no speed was selected when d1 18 1 and H1 00 83 Table 7 2 Not Resetable Faults
318. s too large Reduce the load The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time The load is locked Check the mechanical system The settings of F1 10 and F1 11 are not appropriate Check the settings of F1 10 and F1 11 Wrong brake control sequence The motor runs against the closed brake Check the sequence and if the brake is opened when the inverter starts to increase the speed Wrong rotation direction Detected when the speed deviation is higher than 30 and the torque refer ence and acceleration have opposite signs PG wire broken Check the PG wiring Incorrect PG wiring Correct the wiring Wrong magnet position compensation value F1 22 Verify the PG direction and execute an encoder offset auto tuning The load is too large Reduce the load and check the brake Wrong rotation direction Detected when F1 19 is not 0 the speed reference and motor speed have opposite signs and the detection thresh old set in F1 19 is exceeded The magnet position offset setting in F1 22 is wrong Verify the PG direction and execute an encoder offset auto tuning The load is too large Reduce the load and check the brake DV6 Over Acceleration An over acceleration of the car was detected A1 02 6 only The load is too large Reduce the load Magnet position offset is wrong Check the PG d
319. s too small Check the setting of Motor Rated Current Setting E2 01 OL3 Car Stuck Overtorque Car Stuck Detection 1 The Inverter s output current V f con trol or the output torque Vector Con trol exceeded L6 02 for longer than the time set in L6 03 and L6 01 is set to 3 or 4 Motor was overloaded Ensure the values in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropriate Check application machine status to eliminate fault OL4 Car Stuck Overtorque Car Stuck Detection 2 The Inverter s output current V f con trol or the output torque Vector Con trol exceeded L6 05 for longer than the time set in L6 06 and L6 04 is set to 3 or 4 Motor was overloaded Ensure the values in L6 05 and L6 06 are appropriate Check application machine status to eliminate fault UL3 Undertorq Det 1 Undertorque Detection 1 The Inverter s output current V f con trol or the output torque Vector con trol fell below L6 02 for longer than the time set in L6 03 and L6 01 is set to 7 or 8 Motor was underloaded Ensure the values in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropriate Check application machine status to eliminate fault Display ULA Undertorq Det 2 Table 7 1 Resetable Faults Meaning Undertorque Detection 2 The Inverter s output current V f con trol or the output torque Vector con trol fell below L6 05 for longer than the time set in L6 06 and L6 04 is set to 7 or 8 Probab
320. scription Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detec tion pre alarm in C The pre alarm detects when the cooling fin temperature reaches the set value Setting Range Factory Setting Contro Open Loop Vector Methods Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Operation selec tion after overheat pre alarm OH Pre Alarm Sel Sets the operation when an Inverter overheat pre alarm Occurs 0 Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast stop in fast stop time C1 09 3 Continue operation Monitor display only A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor fault will be given in setting 3 Output open phase detection selection Ph Loss Out Sel 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Phase Observa tion 2 Enabled 2 and 3 Phase Observation An output open phase is detected at less than 5 of Inverter rated current When the applied motor capac ity is small compared to the Inverter capacity the detection may not work properly and should be disabled Ground fault detection selection Ground Fault Sel 0 Disabled Enabled Cooling fan control selection Fan On Off Sel Set the ON OFF control for the cooling fan 0 ON when Inverter is running only 1 ON whenever power is ON Cooling fan con trol delay time Fan Delay Time Set the time in seconds to de
321. sees eene 6 40 Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation ssssssssese 6 40 Motor Torque Detection Car Stuck Detection sessssssseeeees 6 40 Limiting the Motor Torque Torque Limit Function sssssseseee 6 43 Motor Overload Protection ccccccccscseccssscssescssesescosescosesconescessscosescenescesescenescesesceses 6 44 Output Current Observation tenes 6 46 Over Acceleration Detection DV6 Fault Detection sssssssees 6 46 Inverter Prote C O a a ae a i aa a AE e E 6 47 Inverter Overheat Protection cccccccccseccssesessesessesessesesseseseeseseseseeseseetesesseseensseeseses 6 47 9 input Open Phase Protection ait east ind tesserae ham ette bito etes tei acest 6 47 Output Open Phase Detection 6 48 Ground Fault Detection sssssssseseeeeteetntete teen 6 48 9 Cooling Fan CORTO S oe ote E oe EDS LE Nh I iS Mp Me 6 49 Setting the Ambient Temperature sen ns 6 49 Input Terminal Functions uessesssssssseseeeeeeerenne nnne 6 50 Disable the Inverter Output Baseblock ssssssesseeeenene 6 50 Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors External Fault Function 6 51 Using the Timer Function tette tentent 6 52 Motor Contactor Answer Back Detection sssssstttetentene 6 53 changing the PG direction detto reete o D o te a neat 6 54 9 Mblor
322. selection 0 V f control 2 Open Loop Vector control Control Method 3 Closed Loop Vector control for induction motors Max output fre quency FMAX Max Frequency Max output voltage Output Volt V VMAX utput Voltage V VMAX E1 05 Max Voltage BASE 6 13 Base frequency FA Base Frequency Mid output fre quency FB Et 89 et ETEL Mid Frequency Frequency Hz To set V f characteristics in a straight line set the same values for E1 07 and E1 09 In this case the setting for E1 08 will be disregarded Mid Voltage Always ensure that the four frequen Min output fre cies are set in the following manner quency FMIN E1 04 FMAX E1 06 FA gt El 07 FB 2 E1 09 FMIN Mid output fre quency voltage VB Min Frequency Min output fre quency voltage VMIN Min Voltage These are values for a 400 V Class Inverter 5 23 iMotor 2 Setup E4 Name Control Methods L4 TT Closed MEMO Setting Factory Open Closed ors BUS Range Setting Loop Loop Vector Register Vector Vector PM Description Display Sets the motor rated current This set value will become the refer ence value for motor protection and torque limits This parameter is an input data for autotuning Motor rated current Motor Rated FLA Motor rated Sets the motor rated
323. selection at PG open circuit PGO PG Fdbk Loss Sel Sets the PG disconnection stopping method 0 Ramp to stop Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time 1 C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast stop Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation To protect the motor or machinery avoid to use this setting Operation selection at overspeed OS PG Overspeed Sel Sets the stopping method when an overspeed OS fault occurs 0 Ramp to stop Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time 1 C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast stop Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation To protect the motor or machinery avoid to use this setting Operation selection at speed deviation PG Deviation Sel Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation DEV fault occurs 0 Ramp to stop Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time 1 C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast stop Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation DEV is dis played and operation continued PG rotation direction PG Rotation Sel 0 Phase A leads with forward run command Phase B leads with reverse run command Counter Clockwise rotation 1 Phase B leads with forward run command Phase A leads with reverse run command Clock wise rotation PG division rate PG pulse mon itor PG Output R
324. shaft traction sheave side Refer to the motor instruction manual or consult the manufac turer for details about the rotation direction Tuning successful is displayed Open the contactors open the baseblock inputs and close the brake FINISH Fig 4 3 Autotuning for Permanent Magnet Motors 4 8 PM Motor Encoder Offset Tuning Fig 4 4 shows the autotuning procedure for an encoder offset tuning This procedure should be performed if the encoder has been changed or has not been aligned correctly Before tuning make sure that PM losed loop vector conntrol is selected A1 02 6 and that the E1 LIL1 and E5 LI1LI parameters are set up correctly No Is it possible to remove the ropes Remove the ropes Balance the car so that it does not move with open brakes E Note The tuning accuracy will be lower Set the Base Block inputs BB and BB1 in this tuning mode Switch ON the power supply if it is OFF Check parameter F1 01 n8 35 Switch off the power supply and check if PG card is correctly installed Does a OPEO6 fault occur F Check parameter n8 35 Does a CPF24 fault If EnDat Hiperface is used occur check the encoder power supply check the CLOCK and DATA signal wiring Switch off the power supply Check if the correct PG constant F1 01 and Does a OPEO2 fault absolute encoder resolution F1 21 has been set occur Refer to page 7 12 Operat
325. sing dry air at Cooling fins Are the fins dirty or dusty a pressure of 4 x 105 to 6 x 10 Pa 4 to 6 bar 55 to 85 psi Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the a pressure of 4 x 10 to 6 x 10 Pa PCBs 4 to 6 bar 55 to 85 psi Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean All PCBs Input Diodes EN a Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at DU Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the Output Transistors Power modules or components Modules 4 to 6 bar 55 to 85 psi a pressure of 4 x 105 to 6 x 10 Pa Are there any irregularities such as discoloration DC bus capacitors P or odor Replace the capacitor or Inverter the total operating time exceeded 20 000 hours i Cooling Fan s f Replace Cooling Fan Check U1 40 for the elapsed cooling operation time Periodic Maintenance of Parts In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long time and to prevent down time due to an unex pected failure it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service life The data indicated in the following table is to be used as a general guideline only Periodic inspection stan dards vary depending on the Inverter s installation environment conditions and usage The Inverter s sug gested maintenance periods are noted below Table 8 2 Part Replacement Guid
326. speed 2kOhm qo te reference 0 to 10V AC toy 5 MC V Analog input power 30VDC max 1A M1 Q Brake Command M2 Factory setting l M3 Contactor Control M4 Factory setting Multi function contact output 250VAC max 1A 30VDC max 1A M5 Q Inverter Ready m d Factory setting r 0 only one of the inputs is closed BB will be displayed in the operator panel and the inverter will not start a INFO Shielded wires Twisted pair wires Fig 2 12 Control Circuit Terminal Connections The base block circuit is a two channel circuit i e always both channels terminal BB and BB1 have to be enabled to enable the inverter output Generally the terminals BB and BB1 can be linked directly at the terminals However if an EN81 1 con form one motor contactor solution is required the recommended BB and BB1 terminal wiring depends on the installation 1 If the controller and inverter are mounted in the same cabinet the terminals BB and BB1 can be linked directly at the inverter terminal board Only one wire from the controller to the inverter base block input is necessary 2 If the inverter is mounted separated from the controller cabinet two physically separated wires for the BB and BB terminal should be used in order to keep redundancy in case of a fault of one of the signal lines P ENB1 1 C
327. speed reference Decrease the gain if vibrations occur Motor Acceleration Time Auto Tuning n5 05 The motor acceleration time n5 02 can be calculated by an auto tuning function It sets the internal accelera tion time to 0 1 sec disabled the S curve and sets the torque limit to 100 After that a start in each direction must be performed The measured acceleration times are used to calculate the n5 03 value Before the n5 02 auto tuning is performed the motor data autotuning and the general setup should have been finished Do the tuning with the factory settings for the n5 L1L1 parameters 6 6 35 Use the following procedure l 2 3 Set n5 05 to 1 to enable the auto tuning and go back to the speed reference display Set the base block input Enable the inspection speed input FFCAL will blink in the display to signalize that the calculation is active Set an UP command The inverter will accelerate the motor up to the nominal speed Release the UP com mand a few seconds after the top speed has been reached When the motor has stopped apply a DOWN command The inverter will accelerate the motor in the opposite direction to the nominal speed Release the DOWN command a few seconds after the nominal speed has been reached To abort the tuning set parameter n5 05 to 0 Yo 1 The order of giving the UP or DOWN command has no influence P 2 2 n5 01 should not be changed from the factory valu
328. ss of the motor is low decrease the set values Starting torque compensation FWD FTorqCmp Start Sets the torque compensation value at start in FWD direction 0 0 to 200 0 Starting torque compensation REV RTorqCmp Start Sets the torque compensation value at start in REV direction 200 0 to 0 0 Starting torque compensation time constant TorqCmpDelayT Sets starting torque start up time When 0 4 ms is set it is oper ated without filter 0 to 200 5 15 5 16 Name Display ASR propor tional P gain 1 ASR P Gain 1 ASR integral T time 1 ASR I Time 1 ilSpeed Control ASR C5 Description Set the proportional gain 1 and the integral time 1 of the speed control loop ASR for the maximum fre quency Fac tory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register ASR propor tional P gain 2 ASR P Gain 2 ASR integral T time 2 ASR I Time 2 Set the proportional gain 2 and the integral time 2 of the speed control loop ASR for the minimum fre quency The setting is active only for accel eration ASR delay time ASR Gain SW Freq Sets the ASR output delay time ASR switching frequency ASR Gain SW Freq Sets the frequency for switching between Proportion Gain
329. t Cover Model CIMR L7Z4022 Shown Above B Attaching the Front Cover After completing the required work such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it 1 Confirm that the Digital Operator LED Monitor is not mounted on the front cover Contact faults can occur If the cover is attached while the Digital Operator LED Monitor is mounted to it 2 Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it clicks into place on the Inverter BAttaching the Digital Operator LED Monitor Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18 5 kW or less 1 15 1 16 Wiring This chapter describes the terminals main circuit terminal connections main circuit terminal wiring specifica tions control circuit terminals and control circuit wiring specifications Connection Dilaga 2 2 Terminal Block Gonflgu ellus seeieasbkuricgi deg eaae a t repair 2 4 Wiring Main Circuit Terminalg e eie rrt reta teet 2 5 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals uu e retra rne 2 17 EN81 1 Conform Wiring with One Motor Contactor 2 21 Lip Ecl Perm 2 23 Installing and Wiring Option Cards 2 24 2 2 Connection Diagram Note 1 The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2 1 When using the Digital Operator the moto
330. t necessary to change it observe the following precautions f speed and torque oscillate at low speeds Lower the carrier frequency If inverter noise affects peripheral devices Lower the carrier frequency f leakage current from the Inverter too is large Lower the carrier frequency f metallic noise from the motor is large Increase the carrier frequency ECarrier Frequency and Inverter Overload Capability If the carrier frequency is increased the rated current is decreased and vice versa refer to page 9 6 Carrier Frequency Derating The overload capability is always 15096 of the derated inverter current for 30 sec If this E over load limit is exceeded the inverter trips with an inverter overload fault OL2 Current limitation level at low speeds The Varispeed L7 limits the output current at low frequencies This current limitation does not change with the carrier frequency selection The current limitation in the low frequency range is as follows 150 140 130 120 110 7 1 200V Class 15kW 400V Class 30kW 200V Class 3 7 18 30kW 400V Class 18 22kW 200V Class 5 5kW 400V Class 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 55kW 200V Clas 11kW 200V Class 7 5 22 37 45 55kW 400V Class 4 0 15 37 45kW Output 0 1 5Hz 3Hz 45Hz 6Hz Frequency Fig 6 1 Low frequency current limitation NL Ifthe torque at low frequencies is too low check whether the current runs into the limitatio
331. tage of the motor Motor rated cur rent Rated Current Sets the rated current of the motor Motor rated fre quency Rated Frequency Sets the rated frequency of the motor Number of motor poles Number of Poles Sets the number of motor poles Motor base speed Rated Speed Sets the base speed of the motor in r min Number of PG pulses PG Pulses Rev Sets the number of PG pulses per revolution No load current No load current Sets the no load current of motor The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 3 7 kW is given 2 These are values for a 200 V class Inverter Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double 3 The setting range is from 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The val ue for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW is given 5 53 Name Display Motor output power Mtr Rated Power BT2 Autotuning 2 Description Sets the output power of the motor in kilowatts Factory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Motor base fre quency Base Frequency Sets the motor base frequency Motor rated volt age Rated Voltage Sets the rated voltage of the motor Motor rated cur rent Rated Current S
332. tch DOWN function limits the speed to the leveling speed when the DOWN direction signal is given the UP direction has no speed limit 6 28 Improving the Operation Performance Reducing the Motor Speed Fluctuation Slip Compensation Function When the load is large the motor slip also increases and the motor speed decreases The slip compensation function keeps the motor speed constant regardless of changes in load When the motor is operating at the rated load parameter E2 02 Motor Rated Slip x the slip compensation gain value in parameter C3 01 is added to the output frequency The function can be used in V f control or Open Loop Vector control iRRelated Parameters Control Methods Change Parameter NS Factory during Open Closed Closed No Setting Operation Vif Loop Loop Loop Vec Vector Vector tor PM C3 01 Slip compensation gain 1 0 Yes A A C3 02 Slip compensation delay time 2000 ms No A A C3 03 Slip compensation limit 200 No A A C3 04 Slip compensation during regeneration 1 No A C3 05 Output voltage limit operation selection 0 No A A E Adjusting Slip Compensation Gain C3 01 If C3 01 is set to 1 0 the slip compensation value at 100 load is equal to the rated slip set in parameter E2 02 If necessary motor speed is too high or too low adjust the slip compensation gain as follows 1 With Open Loop Vector control set E2 02 Motor
333. tep Speed Command 3 Selected Frequency d1 1 8 20 d1 18 3 OFF OFF OFF Frequency reference 1 d1 01 or AI AI I4B CHI Stop ON OFF OFF Frequency reference 2 d1 02 or AI 14B CH2 OFF ON OFF Frequency reference 3 d1 03 or AI 14B CH3 ON ON OFF Frequency reference 4 d1 04 OFF ON Frequency reference 5 d1 05 ON ON Frequency reference 6 d1 06 OFF ON Frequency reference 7 d1 07 ON ON Frequency reference 8 d1 08 Nominal Leveling Speed Detection with Multi Speed Inputs Using this function the inverter can distinguish between the nominal and leveling speed when the speed selec tion is done by multifunction inputs which is required by other functions like the ASR controller short floor operation and slip compensation for V f control Related Parameters Parameter No Change during peration Setting o Control Methods Open Loop Vector Loop Closed Vector Closed Loop Vector PM S3 04 If the Nominal Leveling speed detection level No A A reference speed gt S3 04 the selected speed is regarded as nominal speed reference speed S3 04 the selected speed is regarded as leveling speed A llSeparate Speed Selection Inputs High Speed Has Priority d1 18 1 If d1 18 is set to 1 6 different speeds can be set and selected using four digital input
334. ters C4 01 Torque Compensation Gain and C4 02 Torque Compensation Delay Time Decrease C4 01 carefully in steps of 0 05 and or increase C4 02 Furthermore the Slip Compensation Delay Time C3 02 can be increased or decreased BOscillation and hunting occur with Open Loop Vector control The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine Adjust parameters C4 01 Torque Compensation Gain C4 02 Torque Compensation Delay Time Parameter and C3 02 Slip Com pensation Delay Time in order Lower the gain parameters and raise the delay time parameters If auto tuning has not been performed proper performance may not be achieved for Vector Control Perform auto tuning or set the motor parameters manually BOscillation and hunting occur with Closed Loop Vector control for IM and PM The gain adjustment may be insufficient Adjust the speed control loop Automatic Speed Regulator ASR by changing the C5 LIL1 parameters If the oscillation points overlap with those of the machine and cannot be eliminated increase the ASR Delay Time and then readjust the ASR gains If auto tuning has not been performed proper performance may not be achieved for Closed Loop Vector Con trol Perform auto tuning or set the motor parameters manually 7 21 7 22 Maintenance and Inspection This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter Maintenance and Inspection
335. tion Inverter startup complete 1 Completed 2 Not completed Error Data setting error Multi function contact output 1 terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Multi function contact output 2 terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Multi function contact output 3 terminal M5 M6 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 8 to F Not used Error details Overcurrent OC Ground fault GF Main circuit overvoltage OV Inverter overload OL2 Inverter overheat OH1 OH2 Braking transistor resistance overheat rr rH Fuse blown PUF Not used External error EF EFO Control board error CPF Motor overload OL1 or overtorque 1 OL3 detected PG broken wire detected PGO Overspeed OS Speed deviation DEV Main circuit undervoltage UV detected clr a mM BR WL t elo Main circuit undervoltage UV1 control power supply error UV2 inrush prevention circuit error UV3 power loss Missing output phase LF Bit E MEMOBUS communications error CE Bit F Operator disconnected OPR Data link status it 0 Writing data it 1 Not used Not used it 3 Upper and lower limit errors it 4 Data integrity error Bits 5 to F Not used Frequency refer ence Monitors U1 01 Output frequency Monitors U1 02 Output voltage Monitors U1 06 Output current Monitors U1 03 Output power Monitors U1 08 Torque reference Monitors U1
336. tion Before mounting an Option Card remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the Inverter is OFF After that remove the Digital Operator LED Monitor and front cover and mount the Option Card Refer to documentation provided with the Option Card for the mounting instructions 2 24 B Preventing C and D Option Card Connectors from Rising After installing an Option Card into slot C or D insert an Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising The Option Clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and pulling it out A Option Card mounting spacer hole CN4 A Option Card connector CN2 C Option Card connector A Option Card mounting spacer Provided with A Option Card sce d NN Pa C Option Card mounting spacer C Option Card Option Clip To prevent raising of C and D Option Card D Option Card D Option Card mounting spacer A Option Card A Option Card mounting spacer Fig 2 14 Mounting Option Cards PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications BPG B2 Option Card Input Output Specifications Table 2 12 PG B2 I O Specifications Terminal Contents Specifications 12 VDC 5 200 mA max 0 VDC GND for power supply Power supply for pulse generator H 8 to 12 V max input frequency 50 kHz Pulse input terminals phase A GND pulse input phase A
337. tion function in L1 01 according to the used motor As the motors thermal behavior depends on the motor type the thermal motor protection characteristics must be properly selected Set L1 01 to 0 to disable the thermal motor protection function 1 to enable the thermal motor protection for a fan cooled general purpose motor self cooled 2 to enable the thermal motor protection for an inverter motor externally cooled 3 to enable the thermal motor protection for a special vector motor externally cooled 5 to enable the thermal motor protection for a permanent magnet motor iSetting Motor Protection Operation Time L1 02 The motor protection operation time is the time for that the motor can handle a 150 overload when it was running with the rated load before 1 e operating temperature was reached before applying the 15096 over load Set the motor protection operation time in L1 02 The factory setting is 60 sec Fig 6 19 shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation time L1 02 1 0 min operation at 50 Hz general purpose motor characteristics when L1 01 is set to 1 Operation time min 10 7 3 Cold start 1 i Hot start 0 1 Motor current 76 0 100 150 200 E2 01 is set to 10096 6 Fig 6 19 Motor Protection Operation Time a i Setting a Motor Overload Pre Alarm If the motor overload protection function is enabled i e L1 01 is set to a value different from
338. tion method Operation after external fault detection The following table shows the relationship between the external fault conditions and the set value in H1 LILI Input Level Error Detection Method See Note 1 See Note 2 Operation During Error Detection Constant Detection Decelerate CEE Ee Continue NO Contact NC Contact During Oper to Stop gency ation Error Operation Detection Warning Stop Error Stop Error 6 51 Input Level See Note 1 Error Detection Method See Note 2 Operation During Error Detection NO Contact NC Contact Constant Detection Detection During Oper Decelerate to Stop Coast to Stop Error Emergency Stop Error Continue Operation ation Error Warning Yes 1 Sets the input level at which errors are detected NO contact External error when ON NC contact External error when OFF 2 Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation Constant detection Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter Detection during operation Detects only during Inverter operation Using the Timer Function The multi function digital input terminals S3 to S7 can be used as a timer function input and the multi func tion output terminals M1 M2 M3 M4 and M5 M6 can be used as a t
339. tion time 1 Decel Time 1 Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to 0 Hz Acceleration time 2 Accel Time 2 Sets the acceleration time when the multi function input accel decel time 1 is set to ON Deceleration time 2 Decel Time 2 Sets the deceleration time when the multi function input accel decel time 1 is set to ON Acceleration time 3 Accel Time 3 Sets the acceleration time when the multi function input accel decel time 2 is set to ON Deceleration time 3 Decel Time 3 Sets the deceleration time when the multi function input accel decel time 2 is set to ON Acceleration time 4 Accel Time 4 Sets the acceleration time when the frequency reference is below the value set in C1 11 Deceleration time 4 Decel Time 4 Sets the deceleration time when the frequency reference is below the value set in C1 11 Emergency stop time Fast Stop Time Sets the deceleration time when the frequency reference is below the value set in C1 11 Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM MEMO BUS Register Accel decel time setting unit Acc Dec Units Sets the number of decimals for the acceleration deceleration time parameters 0 0 01 second units 1 0 1 second
340. tion time gain 150 0 3 24 Light load direction search method 0 T1 01 Autotuning mode selection 0 T1 02 Motor output power T1 03 Motor rated voltage i T1 04 Motor rated current a T1 05 Motor base frequency 60 0 Hz T1 06 Number of motor poles 4 poles T1 07 Motor base speed 1450 r min T1 08 Number of PG pulses 1024 T1 09 Motor no load current E2 03 value T2 01 Motor output power T2 02 Motor base frequency 1750 rpm T2 03 Motor rated voltage i T2 04 Motor rated current x T2 05 Motor pole number 4 T2 08 Motor voltage constant T2 09 Number of PG pulses 2048 T2 10 Motor voltage constant calculation selection 1 The factory setting depends on the inverter model and the control method
341. tly connected to the inverter output may damage the Inverter ERES 10 4 M User Constants The factory settings of each parameter are given in the following table They are for a 200 V Class Inverter with 3 7 kW No Name XN y Setting Setting A1 00 Language selection for Digital Operator display 0 Al 01 Parameter access level 2 Al 02 Control method selection 0 Al 03 Initialize 0 Al 04 Password 0 Al 05 Password setting 0 ees 2 User specified parameters b1 01 Reference source selection 0 b1 02 RUN command source selection 1 b1 06 Control input scan 1 b1 08 Run command selection in programming modes 1 b2 08 Magnetic flux compensation volume 0 b4 01 Timer function ON delay time 0 0 sec b4 02 Timer function OFF delay time 0 0 sec b6 01 Dwell frequency at start 0 0 Hz b6 02 Dwell time at start 0 0 sec b6 03 Dwell frequency at stop 0 0 Hz b6 04 Dwell time at stop 0 0 sec C1 01 Acceleration time 1 10 0 sec C1 02 Deceleration time 1 C1 03 Acceleration time 2 C1 04 Deceleration time 2 C1 05 Acceleration time 3 C1 06 Deceleration time 3 as C1 07 Acceleration time 4 C1 08 Deceleration time 4 C1 09 Emergency stop time C1 10 Accel decel time setting unit 1 C1 11 Accel decel time switching frequency 0 0 Hz C2 01 S curv
342. to M6 function selection These functions are described in the following section Related Parameters Control Methods Closed Parameter Factory Open Closed Loop No Setting Loop Loop Vector Vector Vector PM H2 01 Terminal M1 M2 function selection H2 02 Terminal M3 M4 function selection H2 03 Terminal M5 M6 function selection iDuring Run Setting 0 and During Run 2 Setting 37 During Run Setting 0 The Run command is OFF and there is not output voltage The Run command is ON or a voltage is being output During Run 2 Setting 37 The inverter is not outputting a frequency Baseblock DC injection braking or stopped The inverter is outputting a frequency These outputs can be used to indicate the inverter s operating status Run _OFF_ ON Baseblock Output frequency During Run 1 Output OFF JON i 1 1 During Run 2 Output OFF ON Fig 6 22 Timing Chart for During RUN Output BZero Speed Setting 1 Output Frequency Zero Speed Level Zero Speed OFF ON Output Fig 6 23 Timing Chart for Zero speed The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level The Zero Speed Level depends on the control mode It is 0 1 Hz for Closed Loop Vector 0 5 Hz for Open Loop Vector and 1 2 Hz for V f control 6 56 Binverter Operation R
343. tory Setting Control Methods Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector Closed Loop Vector PM Analog output sig nal level for chan nel 1 AO Opt Level Sel Analog output sig nal level for chan nel 2 AO Opt Level Sel Selects the analog output signal level for channel 1 effective for the AO 12 option card only 0 Oto 10V 1 10 to 10 Using an AO 08 option card the possible outputs signal is 0 to 10V only The setting of F4 07 and F4 08 has no effect 5 29 5 30 Digital Output Card DO 02 and DO 08 F5 Con stant Number Name Display Channel 1 output selection DO Chl Select Description Effective when a Digital Output Card DO 02 or DO 08 is used Set the number of the multi func tion output to be output Setting Range Fac tory Setting Control Methods Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector Closed Loop Vector PM Channel 2 output selection DO Ch2 Select Effective when a Digital Output Card DO 02 or DO 08 is used Set the number of the multi func tion output to be output Channel 3 output selection DO Ch3 Select Effective when a DO 08 Digital Output Card is used Set the number of the multi func tion output to be output Channel 4 output selection DO Ch4 Select Effective when a DO 08 Digital Output Card is used Set the nu
344. tput current during low speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated output current range Adjust the value in steps of 0 05 only BAdjusting the Torque Compensation Delay Time Constant C4 02 The factory setting depends on the control mode The factory settings are V f control 200 ms Open loop vector control 20 ms Normally there is no need to change this setting If adjustments are necessary do the following f the motor vibrates or if overshooting occurs increase the set value Ifthe torque response is slow decrease the set value 6 31 Starting Torque Compensation Function C4 03 to C4 05 A starting torque compensation can be applied to speed up the torque establishment at start in Open Loop Vec tor control iRRelated Parameters Control Methods Change during Operation Parameter No Open Closed Loop Loop Vector Vector C4 03 Starting torque compensation value forward direction C4 04 Starting torque compensation value reverse direction C4 05 Starting torque compensation time constant It works like shown in the following diagram Forward Reverse Run command ON OFF Time constant C4 05 Time constant C4 02 A C4 03 forward Torque compensation C4 04 reverse negative polarity volume 4 C4 05 x 4 E1 09 Output frequency E1 09 Fig 6 10 Time Chart for Starting Torque Frequency 6 When this function is used the following should
345. trol Methods Parameter Factory Change Open Closed Closed No Name Setting e Gane ve L nis 9 Operation V pop V POP Vector ector ector PM 13 05 Stall prevention selection during running function 1 No x selection L3 06 Stall prevention level during running 150 No A BPrecautions If the motor capacity 1s smaller than the Inverter capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory set tings lower the stall prevention level during operation 6 Setting Precautions Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100 Do not increase the stall prevention level unnecessarily An extremely high setting can reduce the inverter lifetime Also do not disable the function Ifthe motor stalls with the factory settings check the V f pattern E1 LILT and the motor setup E2 LIL1 Ifthe stall level has to be increased very much to get the elevator running check the mechanical system or consider using a one size bigger inverter Motor Torque Detection Car Stuck Detection The inverter provides a torque detection function to detect overtorque Car stuck or undertorque An alarm signal can be output to the digital output terminals M1 M2 M3 M4 or M5 M6 To use the overtorque undertorque detection function set B 17 18 19 overtorque undertorque detection NO NC in one of the parameter H2 01 to H2 03 digital output terminals M1 to M6 function selection Overtorque u
346. ttings 01 04 Using parameter 01 04 the unit of the frequency parameters for the V f setting can be set If 01 04 is set to 0 the unit is Hz If 01 04 is set to 1 it is rpm The parameter is available in Closed Loop Vector control only i Changing the Display Contrast 01 05 Using 01 05 the contrast of the LCD display on the digital operator can be raised or lowered Lowering the 01 05 value decreases the contrast and vice versa 6 iEnable Disable the LOCAL REMOTE Key 02 01 a Set 02 01 to 1 to enable the LOCAL REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator If the key is enabled the frequency reference source and the RUN command source can be switched over between LOCAL Operator and REMOTE b1 01 02 setting Disabling the STOP Key 02 02 This parameter is used to set if the STOP key on the operator is active during remote control b1 02 0 or not If 02 02 is set to 1 a STOP command from the operators STOP key is accepted If 02 02 is set to 0 it is disre garded i Saving User Parameters 02 03 The Inverter parameter setting values can be saved as user set parameter initial values by setting parameter 02 03 to 1 To initialize the inverter using the user set initial values set parameter A1 03 to 1110 To clear the user set ini tial values set 02 03 to 2 ilChanging the Inverter Capacity Setting 02 04 The inverter capacity setting can be set using parameter 02 04 Refer to page 5 63 Factory Settings Changing w
347. ue like shown in Fig 4 5 to prevent saturation of the Inverter s output voltage Use the following procedure to perform autotun ing 1 Input the voltage of the input power supply to T1 03 Motor rated voltage 2 Input the results of the following formula to T1 05 Motor base frequency T1 03 T1 05 Base fi fi tor late x ase frequency from motor nameplate X vc rated voltage 3 Perform autotuning After the completion of autotuning set E1 04 Max output frequency to the base frequency from the motor s nameplate Output voltage Rated voltage from motor name plate T1 03 0 i i P Output frequency Base frequency from x T1 03 Base frequency motor name plate from motor name Rated voltage from motor plate name plate Fig 4 5 Motor Base Frequency and Inverter Input Voltage Setting If speed precision is required at high speeds i e 90 of the rated speed or higher set T1 03 Motor rated voltage to the input power supply voltage x 0 9 In this case at high speeds the output current will increase as the input power supply voltage is reduced Be sure to provide sufficient margin in the Inverter current If the Maximum Frequency is Higher than the Motor Base Frequency Set the maximum output frequency in parameter E1 04 after autotuning has been performed Autotuning Alarms and Faults EData Input Errors The inverter will show a Data Invalid message and will not perfor
348. us is discharged completely The CHARGE LED indicating if the DC bus is charged glows above a voltage of 10VDC 10 3 Motor Application Precautions Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard motor BLow Speed Ranges If a standard cooled motor is used at low speed the cooling effects are diminished If the motor is used in con stant torque applications in low speed area the motor may overheat If full torque is required at low speed con tinuously an externally cooled motor must be used BIinstallation Withstand Voltage If the inverter is used with an input voltage of 440 V or higher and long motor cables voltage spikes at the motor terminals may occur which can damage the motor windings Please ensure that the motor insulation class is sufficient BNoise The noise generated in the motor depends on the carrier frequency The higher the setting the less is the gen erated noise Using the Inverter for Special Motors Observe the following precautions when using a special motor BPole changing Motor The rated input current of pole changing motors differs from that of standard motors Select an appropriate Inverter according to the maximum current of the motor iSingle phase Motor Do not use an Inverter for a single phase motor These motors are often equipped with capacitors Any capaci tor direc
349. user parameter The name of the user parameter The display shown in the Digital Operator JVOP 160 OY Details on the function or settings of the user parameter The setting range for the user parameter The factory setting each control method has its own factory setting Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is changed Refer to page page 5 61 Settings which change with the Control Mode A1 02 for factory settings that are changed by setting the con trol method Indicates whether the parameter can be changed or not while the Inverter is in operation Yes Changes are possible during operation No Changes are not possible during operation Indicates the control methods in which the user parameter can be monitored or set The item can be monitored and set as well in quick pro E gramming mode as in advanced programming mode A The item can be monitored and set in advanced pro gramming mode only No The item cannot be monitored or set in this control method The register number used for MEMOBUS communications Reference page for more detailed information about the parameter M M Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter
350. ut The fault is detected when the output current falls below 596 of the inverter rated current and L8 07 1 enabled There is a broken wire in the output cable The motor winding is broken The output terminals are loose Reset the fault after correcting its cause The motor has a capacity less than 5 of the Inverter s maximum motor capacity Check the motor and Inverter capacity 7 4 Display OH Heatsink Overtemp Table 7 1 Resetable Faults Meaning Heatsink Overheat The temperature of the Inverter s cool ing fin exceeded the setting in L8 02 and L8 03 is set to 0 1 or 2 Probable Causes The temperature is too high Corrective Actions Check for dirt build up on the fans or heatsink There is a heat source nearby Reduce the ambient temperature around the drive The Inverter s cooling fan s is are bro ken Inverter s Cooling Fan Stopped The Inverter s internal cooling fan is broken 18 5 kW and larger Replace the cooling fan s OHI Heatsink Max Temp Heatsink Overheat The temperature of the Inverter s heat sink exceeded 105 C The ambient temperature is too high Check for dirt build up on the fans or heatsink There is a heat source nearby Reduce the ambient temperature around the drive The Inverter s cooling fan s is are bro ken Inverter s Cooling Fan Stopped The Inverter s internal cooling fan is broken 18 5
351. value of parameter C5 11 as ASR gain Decrease C5 11 if vibrations occur during the tuning and repeat the tuning ncrease C5 11 if the accuracy of the tuning is low and repeat the tuning Stabilizing Speed Automatic Frequency Regulator Open Loop Vector The speed feedback detection control AFR function controls the stability of the speed when a load is sud denly applied or removed It calculates the amount of speed fluctuation using the torque current Iq feedback value and compensates the output frequency with the amount of fluctuation fret PG gt fout ST I 4 1 ST K N2 02 N2 01 N2 03 Fig 6 12 AFR Control Loop ERelated Parameters Control Methods Parameter Factory enan ce Open Closed edosed Name t during Loop No Setting Vit Loop Loop Operation V V Vector ector ector PM n2 01 Speed feedback detection control AFR gain 1 00 No A n2 02 Speed feedback detection control AFR time constant 1 50 ms No A ESetting the AFR Gain n2 01 Normally there is no need to change this setting If adjustments are necessary do the following f hunting occurs increase n2 01 fthe response is too low decrease n2 01 Adjust the setting by 0 05 at a time while checking the response Setting the AFR Time Constants n2 02 Parameter n2 02 sets the time constant for the AFR control If adjustments are necessary Increase the setting i
352. ve responds The mes sage format 1s configured for both sending and receiving as shown below and the length of data packets depends on the command function content Slave address Function code Error check Slave Address The slave address can not be set in the inverter The slave address field in the message can contain any address from 0 to 31 6 83 6 84 Function Code The function code specifies commands The three function codes shown in the table below are available Command Message Response Message Function Code Function Hexadecimal Min Bytes Max Bytes Min Bytes Max Bytes 03H Read memory register contents 8 08H Loop back test 8 10H Write multiple memory registers 41 Data Configure consecutive data by combining the memory register address test code for a loop back address and the data the register contains The data length changes depending on the command details Error Check Errors during communications are detected using CRC 16 cyclic redundancy check checksum method The result of the checksum calculation is stored in a data word 16 bit which starting value is FFFH The value of this word is manipulated using Exclusive OR and SHIFT operations together with the data package that should be sent slave address function code data and the fixed value A001H At the end of the calcula tion the data word contains the checksum value Th
353. veling speed selection input is activated The leveling sig nal has priority over the selected speed i e the selected speed is disregarded The selected travel speed must be different from inspection speed The inverter stops when the leveling speed command is removed DC Injection Zero servo DC Injection Zero servo Speed Hardware BB Up Down Leveling speed Leveling speed has priority Selected speed The following speed selection table shows the different speeds and the according digital inputs Nominal Intermed Intermed Intermed Relevel Leveling Terminal function Speed Speed 1 Speed 2 Speed 3 Speed Speed d1 09 d1 10 d1 11 d1 12 d1 13 d1 17 Nominal Speed command H1 L1L1 80 1 0 1 0 0 0 Intermediate speed command H1 L1L1 81 0 Releveling speed command H1 L1L1 82 0 Leveling speed command H1 L1L1 83 X 0 0 0 disabled 1 enabled X no meaning Leveling Speed Priority is Selected and a Nominal Speed Input is Not Selected H1 O00 80 If di 18 is set to 2 and no digital input is set to nominal speed selection the speed reference with speed selection input set is nominal speed d1 09 When the leveling speed signal is set the inverter starts to decel erate to the leveling speed The leveling speed signal has priority over all other speed signals i e the interme diate speed 1 and 2 and the releveling s
354. w Closed Loop Vector for PM only Reduce or increase the current level for leakage inductance tuning by changing parameter n8 46 Z SRCH ERR PM motor tuning only All encoders The motor speed exceeded 20 rpm at the auto tuning start The magnetic pole position tuning could not be performed in the specified time Remove the ropes and repeat the tuning Encoder with Z pulse The difference between two measure ments of the magnet pole position was higher than 3 Check the encoder rotation direc tion and if necessary change F1 05 Serial encoders The difference between two measure ments of the magnet pole position was higher than 5 An encoder serial communication error has occurred during the tuning Check the encoder wiring order shield etc Check the encoder power supply Replace the encoder LD_ERR PM motor tuning only Inductance error The inductance could not be measured in the specified time during the motor rotation Check the motor wiring RS_ERR PM motor tuning only Line to line resistance error The resistance could not be measured in the specified time during the motor rotation or the calculated value was out of range Check the motor wiring Check the motor input data KE ERR PM motor tuning only Voltage constant error The voltage constant could not be mea sured in the specified time during the motor rotation Check the motor
355. wiring End 1 V f Over Setting V f Settings Alarm Displayed after auto tuning is complete The torque reference exceeded 100 and the no load current exceeded 70 during auto tuning Check and correct the motor set tings If the motor and the machine are connected disconnect the motor from the machine End 2 Saturation Motor Core Saturation Fault Displayed after auto tuning is com plete Detected only for rotating autotuning During auto tuning the measured val ues of motor iron core saturation coef ficient 1 and 2 E2 07 and E2 08 exceeded its setting range Check the input data Check the motor wiring If the motor and the machine are connected disconnect the motor from the machine End 3 Rated FLA Alm Rated Current Setting Alarm Displayed after auto tuning is complete During auto tuning the measured value of motor rated current E2 01 was higher than the set value Check the motor rated current value 7 15 Digital Operator Copy Function Faults These faults can occur during the digital operator COPY function When a fault occurs the fault content is dis played on the operator The fault or alarm contact output is not operated Function READ Function Digital Operator Display PRE READ IMPOSSIBLE Table 7 6 Operator Copy Function Faults Probable Causes 03 01 was set to 1 to write parameter into the Digi tal Operator w
356. xe au sejdiouug Bunse c LOM Aejas fuerixne y aao jun je od OY JO JUBLUISAOW Jud ULI 19 0J u02 J0JEA9 3 BY ZH JO Ly JO uorounjjeu e jo eseo y ul JO JOUOD J0je 9 3 eui q pexoeuo s JOe U0S Jojiuouu gg siu sindino je 5ip uoNOUNsNINW y Jo euo 0 pewWeBod eq JSNW 1eueAuoo Je od onejs eui jo uopunj JOUN gg eu eseejaJ uedo eq jsnuu eja1 fueiixne au jo 39e3uoo uedo j euuou y peziBieueep s ureuo Ajsjes y j Pun Jamod y ejqesip ejqeue oj pesn eq snW eAup 7 1 eui jo gg pue gg sindui yooq eseq eu 90019061 Peiep 900 E ZZZ 90 90 OLZ ON IAI ees e uobeyeo L ES6 N3 Sulpsoooe sjueujeJmbeu Aj9jes y siyn pue GAS ANL Aq peuiuexe ueeq SEY jeyeAuoo JOMOD EIS eu g 1 INIO ISO Z 1 MINIO JeueAuoo Jamod oneis au Aq pue 2x J0 0e U09 juepuedeputr ue Aq ujoq epeuu s yun Je Mod eui jo uwop 1nus eu OGA vZ 01 peunB1juoo aq o1 seu indui y L L8N3 Burpioooe yun samod eu jo UMOP INUS eui 104 pein6ijuoo oq ued jeu6is 2gAvz 9ui jo Aquejod ay La J I 2 XXXX 1 HINIO eMexseA ON OHUOW g8 uonooos peeds uwog dn Lag ag i Li be O0 vZ f 10M 4 4 uoissiuJeg ueisesi puewwog X99349 J0 9e U0D 9S0 2 108 u09 Ny 4J9 04JUOD JOje e 3 ynog uleug Aiejes uiejs S y jo uonduoseg y 9 40 9 aed 62 xe3 8LZZ L6L9 680 uojoja 900Z Ainr 9z ueu
357. y 0 EN81 1 conform one motor contactor solution possible Harmonics EN 12015 can be fulfilled with optiona AC reactor M Wi crating Ambient Temperature Derating If the inverter ambient temperature is higher than 45 C an output current derating like shown in Fig 9 must be considered 100 o So 80 cE w 5 60 Fas E 9 os 40 ge 5 amp 5 20 o 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Temperature C Fig 9 1 Ambient Temperature Derating Carrier Frequency Derating If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory default value an output current derating like shown in Fig 9 2 must be considered 100 Rated Current 3 minutes 50 ED Output current A 200V Class 22kW or less 125 4k 400V Class 22kW or less 100 a 75 200V Class 30 to 55kW 400V Class 30 to 55kW Carrier frequency 2 5 8 10 15 kHz E Fig 9 2 Carrier Frequency Derating Altitude Derating The standard inverter specification is valid for altitudes up to 1000m above sea level If the inverter is used in regions with higher altitude the allowable input voltage output current and ambient temperature are derated as shown below Table 9 4 Altitude derating 1000 m or less 100 100 100 1000 to 2000 m 90 of standard spec 90 of standard spec 95 of standard spec 2000 to 3000 m 80 of standard spec 80 of standard spec 90
358. y Sait and Capacity oc jm ex i ll c iw iring Contactor Sequence Contactor B Elevator 1 Control t San CREDE ee OD fs tad Con amp dorA 1 Cy B2 UPS f j B1 i 1x230 ral i VAC i ze i E um a 5 RILI 1 H 96 VIT2 ps S L2 I gt K W T3 TIL3 T 1 41 i Power Supply pus Rescue Operation Enable Input The contactors must be operated so that contactor B 1s always opened before A is closed When the rescue operation is finished the contactor A must be opened before B is closed If the UPS power is weak or Light load detection is not used it can happen that the inverter trips with a UV2 fault In this case increase the UPS power use the light load detection function or use the configuration in example 2 Contactor Sequence Contactor B Rescue Operation Enable Input The contactors must be operated so that contactor B 1s always opened before A and C are closed Contactor C can be closed after A but not before When the rescue operation is disabled the contactors A and C must be 7 3 opened before B 1s closed Contactor A 1 Phase 230 V UPS Power
359. y voltage E1 01 change the input data Accelerate Acceleration error detected during rotating autotuning only The motor did not accelerate in the specified time Rotating autotuning was performed with a high load connected Increase C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 Increase L7 01 and L7 02 Torque Limits if they are low Remove the ropes and repeat the tuning Motor Speed Motor Speed Fault Detected only for rotating autotuning The torque reference exceeded 100 during acceleration Detected only when A1 02 is set to 2 Open Loop Vector control If the motor is connected to the machine disconnect it Increase C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 Check the input data particu larly the number of PG pulses and the number of motor poles Perform not rotating auto tuning I det Circuit 7 14 Current Detection Fault The current exceeded the motor rated current Any of U T1 V T2 and W T3 has open phase Check wiring of the Inverter and the mounting Display Leakage Induc tance Fault Table 7 5 Auto tuning Faults Meaning The leakage inductance measurement caused an error Probable causes Auto tuning was not completed in the specified time Corrective Actions Check the motor wiring Check the motor rated current Auto tuning result is outside the parameter setting range input value The leakage inductance tuning current was too high or too lo
360. ycle the Inverter power supply Replace the option board Replace the Inverter CPF24 Option Comm Err PG F2 Hiperface EnDat serial com munication error Detected when no data were received from the encoder for 200 msec Encoder connection wiring broken or encoder broken Check the encoder connection or replace the encoder if necessary Alarm Detection Alarms are Inverter protection functions that indicate unusual conditions without switching off the drive and operating the fault output contact The alarm automatically disappears when its cause is eliminated During an alarm condition the Digital Operator LED Monitor alarm display flashes and an alarm output is generated at the multi function outputs H2 01 to H2 03 if programmed When an alarm occurs take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below Display EF External Fault flashing Table 7 3 Alarm Detection Meaning Forward Reverse Run Commands Input Together Both the forward and the reverse run commands are input simultaneously for 500ms or more This alarm stops the motor Probable causes Control sequence is faulty Corrective Actions Check external sequence logic so that only one input is received at a time UV DC Bus Undervolt flashing DC Bus Undervoltage The following conditions occurred The DC bus voltage was below the Undervoltage Detection Level Set ting L2 05 The MC o

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"